Owner's Manual

575012720BF (09.18)

Inglés

ATECA

(09.18) ATECA

575012720BF Owner’s manual

Inglés https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.18 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a CUPRA WARNING vehicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new CUPRA, you will be able to en- mation concerning the passenger's joy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technolo- front airbag ››› page 74, Important in- gy and top quality features. formation regarding the front passenger's airbag. We recommend reading this Instruction Manual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemen- ted with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. CUPRA

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- CAUTION About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol indicate possible This manual describes the features of the damage to the vehicle. vehicle at the time of drafting this text. Some  It indicates that the section continues of the features described below will be intro- on the next page. For the sake of the environment duced in the future or will only be available in  Important warnings on the page. certain markets. Texts after this symbol contain informa- More in-depth content on the page. tion about the protection of the envi- Some of the features described here are  ronment. not included in all the types or variations  General information on page indicated. of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing  Emergency information on the page. Note requirements without it being considered Texts after this symbol contain addition- You can access the information in this man- misleading advertising. al information. ual using: Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Thematic table of contents that follows the standard representation. manual’s general chapter structure. The direction indicators (left, right, for- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics wards, backwards) in this manual refer to the to indicate the pages containing “essential” travel direction of the vehicle unless other- information, which is detailed in the corre- wise stated. sponding chapters. The audiovisual material is only meant to ● Alphabetical index with many terms and help the users better understand some fea- synonyms to help you find information. tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruc- WARNING tion manual to see the complete information Texts after this symbol contain informa- and warnings. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.  The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as optional only for certain versions or only offered in certain countries.https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Printed Instruction Manual The printed instruction manual contains relevant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System. The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture How do you check and top up the brake fluid? Frequently Asked Ques- kit? ››› page 47 ››› page 43 tions How do you change a wheel? page 48 How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val- ››› ues? ››› page 322 Before driving How do you change a fuse? ››› page 45 Vehicle washing tips ››› page 334 How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 19 How do you change a light? ››› page 46 How do you adjust the steering wheel? How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 51 Functions of interest

››› page 21 Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 33 Useful tips How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How does the START-STOP system work?

››› page 20 How do you set the time? ››› page 104 ››› page 238 How do you turn on the exterior lights? When should the vehicle inspection should be What parking assistants are available?

››› page 30 performed? ››› page 106 ››› page 281 How does the automatic gearbox selector lever What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on How does the rear assist work? ››› page 294 work? ››› page 38 the steering wheel perform? ››› page 110 How does the adaptive cruise control work? How do you refuel? ››› page 41 How do you remove the luggage compartment ››› page 251 cover? ››› page 155 How do you activate the windscreen wipers and How can the driving mode be adjusted? windscreen washer system? ››› page 32 How do you drive in an economical and environ- ››› page 271 mentally-friendly way? ››› page 233 Emergency situations How does the lane departure warning system How do you check and top up the engine oil? work? ››› page 260 A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does ››› page 41

this mean? page 36 How does tyre pressure monitoring work? ››› How do you check and top up the engine cool- ››› page 325 How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 17 ant? ››› page 42 How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key- How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 52 less Access)? ››› page 116 ››› page 43 Where is the vehicle tool kit located? Interior lighting and ambient light page 138 ››› ››› page 48 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Table of Contents

Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 51 Instruments and warning/control lamps ...... 94 Table of Contents How to jump start ...... 52 Dashboard ...... 94 Changing the wiper blades ...... 54 Using the instrument panel ...... 108 The essentials ...... 7 Control lamps ...... 109 Exterior view ...... 7 Safety ...... 56 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 110 Exterior view ...... 8 Safe driving ...... 56 Opening and closing ...... 112 Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand Safety first! ...... 56 Central locking ...... 112 drive) ...... 9 Advice about driving ...... 56 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 121 Driver-side general instrument panel (right- Correct position of the vehicle occupants ...... 57 Rear lid (luggage compartment) ...... 124 hand drive) ...... 10 Pedal area ...... 61 Controls for the windows ...... 126 Passenger-side general instrument panel (left- Seat belts ...... 62 Sunroof* ...... 128 hand drive) ...... 11 Why wear a seat belt ...... 62 Lights and visibility ...... 132 Passenger-side general instrument panel How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 65 Lights ...... 132 (right-hand drive) ...... 12 Seat belt tensioners ...... 66 Visibility ...... 139 Centre console ...... 13 Airbag system ...... 68 Windscreen wiper and window wiper systems . . . . . 139 Interior view ...... 14 Brief introduction ...... 68 Mirror ...... 142 How it works ...... 15 Airbag safety instructions ...... 70 Seats and head restraints ...... 143 Unlocking and locking ...... 15 Deactivating airbags ...... 72 Adjusting the seats and headrests ...... 143 Before driving ...... 19 Transporting children safely ...... 73 Seat functions ...... 145 Airbags ...... 21 Safety for children ...... 73 Transport and practical equipment ...... 147 Child seats ...... 24 Child seats ...... 75 Starting the vehicle ...... 30 Storage compartments ...... 147 Lights and visibility ...... 30 Emergencies ...... 78 Storing objects ...... 150 Easy Connect ...... 33 Self-help ...... 78 Roof carrier* ...... 156 Warning lamps ...... 36 Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* ...... 78 Air conditioning ...... 158 Cruise control ...... 37 Tyre repair ...... 78 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 158 Manual unlocking/locking ...... 80 Gearbox ...... 38 Infotainment System ...... 164 Changing the windscreen wiper blades ...... 81 Air conditioning ...... 39 Introduction ...... 164 Tow-starting and towing ...... 81 Fluid level control ...... 41 Safety instructions related to the Infotainment sys- 85 Emergencies ...... 45 Fuses and bulbs ...... tem ...... 164 Fuses ...... Fuses ...... 45 85 Overview of the unit ...... 166 Changing a bulb ...... Bulbs ...... 46 89 General instructions for use ...... 167 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 46 Operation ...... 93 Connectivity ...... 172 Changing a wheel ...... 48 Controls and displays ...... 93 Data transfer ...... 172 Snow chains ...... 50 General instrument panel ...... 92 Full Link* ...... 172 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 5 Table of Contents

Media Control* ...... 179 Traffic Jam Assist ...... 263 Maintenance ...... 331 WLAN access point* ...... 180 Emergency Assist ...... 264 Maintenance Programme ...... 331 Operating modes ...... 182 Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance Service intervals ...... 331 Radio ...... 182 (RCTA)* ...... 265 Additional service offers ...... 333 Media ...... 184 Drive Profile* ...... 271 Warranty ...... 334 Navigation ...... 193 Park Assist* ...... 273 Vehicle maintenance ...... 334 Navigation in Offroad mode* ...... 202 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPi- Maintenance and cleaning ...... 334 Vehicle Menu ...... 205 lot) ...... 281 Remove the vehicle from traffic ...... 339 Telephone ...... 206 Parking System Plus* ...... 283 Multimedia ...... 212 Rear parking aid* ...... 287 Information for the user ...... 340 USB/AUX-INPort ...... 212 Top View Camera* ...... 289 Event Data Recorder ...... 340 Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* ...... 212 Rear Assist (Rear View Camera)* ...... 294 Description and operation ...... 340 Towing bracket device* ...... 296 Information about the EU Directive Driving ...... 214 Trailer mode ...... 296 2014/53/EU ...... 341 Start and driving ...... 214 Simplified EU compliance declaration ...... 341 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 214 Practical tips ...... 307 Table of correspondences ...... 341 Braking and parking ...... 217 Care and maintenance ...... 307 Addresses of the manufacturers ...... 342 Braking and stability systems ...... 221 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . . . 307 Frequency bands, station power ...... 342 DSG automatic gearbox ...... 224 Checking and refilling levels ...... 308 ...... 344 Address ...... 231 Filling the tank ...... 308 Technical data Run-in and economical driving ...... 232 Fuel ...... 309 Technical specifications ...... 344 Power management ...... 234 Engine compartment ...... 310 Important ...... 344 Engine management and emission control sys- Engine oil ...... 313 Vehicle identification data ...... 344 tem ...... 235 Cooling system ...... 316 Information on fuel consumption ...... 344 Driving tips ...... 236 Brake fluid ...... 317 Trailer mode ...... 345 Driver assistance systems ...... 238 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 318 Wheels ...... 345 Start-Stop system ...... 238 Battery ...... 318 Engine data ...... 347 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ...... 240 Wheels ...... 321 Dimensions ...... 348 Auto Hold Function ...... 241 Wheels and tyres ...... 321 Index ...... 351 Cruise control system (CCS)* ...... 242 Tyre monitoring system ...... 325 Speed limiter ...... 243 Temporary spare wheel ...... 328 Emergency braking assistance system (Front As- Winter service ...... 329 sist)* ...... 247 Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* ...... 251 Lane Assist system* ...... 260

6 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 16 5 ››› page 51 2 ››› page 41 6 ››› page 17 3 ››› page 15 7 ››› page 46 4 ››› page 41 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 7 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 42 5 ››› page 43 9 ››› page 29 2 ››› page 41 6 ››› page 41 10 ››› page 48 3 ››› page 43 7 ››› page 45 11 ››› page 47 4 ››› page 44 8 ›››  page 153 8 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 31 5 ››› page 20 9 ››› page 32 2 ››› page 15 6 ››› page 18 10 ›››  page 99 3 ››› page 37 7 ››› page 17 11 ››› page 21 4 ››› page 30 8 ››› page 36 12 ››› page 45 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 9 The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 32 5 ››› page 20 9 ››› page 37 2 ›››  page 99 6 ››› page 18 10 ››› page 21 3 ››› page 15 7 ››› page 36 4 ››› page 30 8 ››› page 31 10 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 21 2 ››› page 18 3 ›››  page 148

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 11 The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 21 5 ›››  page 148 2 ››› page 45 3 ››› page 17 4 ››› page 18 12 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Centre console

1 ››› page 38 3 ››› page 33, ›››  page 164 5 ››› page 39 2 ›››  page 214 4 ››› page 31

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 13 The essentials

Interior view

1 ››› page 19 5 ››› page 26 2 ››› page 20 6 ›››  page 152 3 ››› page 18 7 ››› page 19 4 ›››  page 142 8 ››› page 22 14 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using Unlocking or locking of driver door the key ●  Unlocking and locking Locking: press the button ››› Fig. 1. ● Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft system: Press the button for a sec- Doors ond time  ››› Fig. 1 within 2 seconds. ● Unlocking: press the button  ››› Fig. 1. ● Unlock the trunk lid: hold down the  ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder. ● Locking: press the button  ››› Fig. 2. None of the doors can be opened from the out- If the central locking system should fail to side. The doors can be opened from the in- operate, the driver door can still be locked side by pulling the inside door handle. and unlocked by turning the key in the lock. Fig. 1 Remote control key: keys. ● Unlocking: press the button  ››› Fig. 2. As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver  ››› in Description on page 112 door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system  ››› page 112 ›››  page 112. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade  ››› page 15, ››› page 16 ›››  page 113. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up- Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch. wards. ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 15 The essentials

Special characteristics If the central locking system should fail to ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder when vehicles are unlocked. However, the will have to be locked separately. alarm will not be triggered ›››  page 112. A mechanical locking device (only visible ● After the driver door is opened, you have when the door is open) is provided on the 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once front passenger door. this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. ● Pull the cap out of the opening. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. the right side) or to the left (if the door is on Fig. 6 Rear lid: button to close rear lid. the left side). Note The rear lid opening system operates electri- The anti-theft alarm is not activated when Once the door has been closed it can no cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres- the vehicle is locked manually using the key longer be opened from the outside. Pull the sure on the handle ››› Fig. 5. shaft  page 112. interior door handle once to unlock and ››› To lock/unlock, press the button  or but- open the door. ton  ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key. Emergency locking of doors without A warning appears on the instrument panel Rear lid display if the rear lid is open or not properly door cylinder closed.* An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing ● Open the rear lid: exert slight pressure on the handle. The rear lid opens automatically. ● Closing the rear lid: hold one of the handles on the inner trim and close it by sliding down, or press the button on the rear lid* ››› Fig. 6. Fig. 5 Rear lid: handle Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.

16 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

››› in Rear lid automatic locking on Bonnet  page 126  ››› page 124  ››› page 17

Manual release mechanism for the rear lid Fig. 8 Luggage compartment: manual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually from Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwell area. inside in the event of an emergency.

● Remove the cover using the key blade as a lever ››› Fig. 7. ● To unlock the rear lid, push the lever in the direction of the arrow using the key blade ››› Fig. 8.

Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to manual release. Fig. 10 Cam under the bonnet

Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 17 The essentials

● Open the door and pull the lever under the Controls for the windows* ››› in Opening and closing the elec- dashboard ››› Fig. 9 1 .  tric windows on page 127 ● To lift the bonnet: press the release catch under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 10 2 . The  ››› page 126 arrester hook under the bonnet is released. ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet. Panoramic roof*

Closing the bonnet ● Slightly lift the bonnet. ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.

● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for the so it locks. windows.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press ● Opening the window: press the button . downwards. Open it again and let it fall as ● Closing the window: pull the button . mentioned above. Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.

Buttons on the driver door ››› in Opening and closing the bon- ● Open: press button C backwards. net on page 311  1 Window on the front left door ● Close: press button D forwards. 2 Window on the front right door  ››› page 310 ● Raise: press the rear part of button B . 3 Window on the rear left door ● Lower: press the front part of button A . 4 Window on the rear right door 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric ››› in Introduction on page 128 window buttons in the rear doors.   ››› page 128

18 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Before driving Electric adjustment of the driver's Adjusting the head restraints seat* Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 15 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint. Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjustment. ● Grab the sides of the head restraints with A Adjust the lumbar support: press the both hands and push upwards to the desired button according to the desired position. position. To lower it, repeat the same action, Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. B Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- pressing the 1 button on the side. ton forwards/backwards. 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and in Correct adjustment of front Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the ››› move the seat.  head restraints on page 60 button up/down. To adjust the angle of 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. the seat cushion, press the front of the ››› page 60, ››› page 144 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. button up/down.  4 Lumbar support: move the lever until the C Backrest further upright/further re- required position is achieved. clined: press the button forwards/backwards. ››› in Manual adjustment of the  seats on page 143 ››› in Electric driver's seat adjust-  ment* on page 144

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 19 The essentials

Adjustment of the seat belt Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the front seats and side rear seats1) tighten automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Maintenance and disposal of  belt tensioners on page 67

Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- ››› page 66 tions, viewed from front and the side. 

To adjust the seat belt around your should- ers, adjust the height of the seats. Adjusting the exterior mirrors The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seat belt buckle. vis.

 ››› page 63 Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror.  ››› page 65 Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position:

1) Depending on version/market. 20 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- move the steering wheel to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver tion and lift the lever back up until it locks. side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel  Depending on the equipment fitted on  position on page 58 the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature.  Folding in mirrors. Airbags

››› in Adjusting the exterior rear-  view mirrors on page 143 Front airbags  ››› page 142

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of the steering the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- column. tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21. Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering wheel. ● Adjusting the position of the steering In conjunction with the seat belts, the front wheel: pull the ››› Fig. 19 1 lever down, airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 21 The essentials

the event of a severe frontal collision in ››› ››› in Activation and deactivation of Front airbags on page 70.  front passenger airbag on page 72 Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occu-  ››› page 72 pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

page 70  ››› Fig. 23 Dashboard: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger front Deactivating the front passenger airbag: front airbag ● Switch the ignition off. ● Open the door on the front passenger side. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag ››› Fig. 22. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ● Close the front passenger door. Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch. ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that the   control lamp remains lit where it says      in the centre of the dash panel ››› Fig. 23.

22 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Knee airbag* it is deployed. Objects should never be The side airbags are located in the driver's placed or mounted in this area. seat and front passenger seat backrests ››› Fig. 26. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the page 70  ››› backrests. In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system provides additional protection Side airbags for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision ››› in Side airbags on page 70. In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas Fig. 24 On the driver side: location of airbag for knees. of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.

Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver's seat.  ››› page 70

Fig. 25 On the driver side: action radius of airbag for knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel ››› Fig. 24. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area) Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated side air- ››› Fig. 25 is covered by the knee airbag when bags on the left side of the vehicle.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 23 The essentials

Head-protection airbags* Child seats

Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag

Fig. 28 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors ››› Fig. 28 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”. In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head Fig. 30 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear frame of and upper body in the event of a severe side the front passenger's door . collision ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 71. A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the pas- ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 71 Fig. 29 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on the passenger's sun visor and/or on the passenger  senger-side sun blind  and on the rear frame of side door frame. the front passenger's door . ››› in Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag on  page 74  ››› page 73 24 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 31 On rear seats: possible assemblies of children seats.

Figure ››› Fig. 31 A shows the basic child re- ● In the passenger seat with height regula- perfect position, adjust the passenger back- straint system mounting using lower retain- tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear- rest as far forward as possible1). ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- most and highest position1). If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- ure Fig. 31 B shows the child restraint ››› To correctly use a child seat in the back, the led, in which the method of attachment to system mounting using the vehicle seat belt. front backrest must be adjusted so that there the car is through the seat belt and support The seat belt may be used to secure univer- is no contact with the child seat in the back bracket, it should never be installed in the sal type child seats to the vehicle seats in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- central rear seat as the ground clearance is marked with a U in the table below. tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- lower than in other places and the support straint systems, the front backrest must be bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ● In the passenger seat without height regu- adjusted so that there is no contact with the ciently stable. lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear- child's feet. most position1). The systems include the child restraint sys- To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- tem mounting with an upper retaining » date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 25 The essentials

strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.

Seating position

Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 75

Securing child seats with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on FIX” rings are located between the rear seat and safely on the rear outer seats with the each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 32. “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. are secured to the seat frame and, in others, The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-

26 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials part of the backrests of the rear seats (be- To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- The body weight permitted and information hind the seat backrest or in the boot) FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la- ››› Fig. 34. below. bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi- universal” certification.

Vehicle Isofix positions Electrical Weight group Size class Front passenger seat equipment Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag on airbag off

F ISO/L1 X X X X Baby carrier G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group. IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRSs) listed in the attached list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 27 The essentials

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 75

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size”

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en- turer's instructions. sure that it is properly anchored.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Teth- taining rings ››› Fig. 32 until the child seat is er* attachment system are available from heard to engage securely. If the child seat is Technical Services. equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 34. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

Fig. 32 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U: Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

28 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top Securing the retainer strap Tether* retaining straps ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer strap. ● Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat ››› Fig. 33 (depending on the instructions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary). ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 34. Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the ››› back of the rear seat. ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manufacturer's instructions. Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- Releasing the retaining strap cle anchor point, located at the back of the ● Loosen the strap following the manufac- rear seat backrest and provide greater re- turer's instructions. straint. ● Push the lock and release it from the an- The objective of this strap is to reduce for- choring support. ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.  ››› in Safety instructions on page 75

Fig. 33 Retainer strap: adjustment and assembly Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- according to the Top Tether belt. ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufacturer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 29 The essentials

Move the selector lever to the P or N posi- Starting the vehicle 2. tion.  ››› in Starter button on page 215 Starter button Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 194 without pressing the accelerator. For the  ››› page 214 engine to start there must be a valid key in the vehicle. 3. After starting the engine, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed light indicating that the engine has Lights and visibility started.

If the engine does not start, stop and wait Light switch for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If 4. necessary, carry out an emergency start ››› page 214. Disconnect the electronic parking brake Fig. 35 In the lower part of the centre console: 5. when you are about to start driving start button. ››› page 217.

The vehicle engine is started with a starter Switching off the engine button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of 1. Stop the vehicle completely. the front or rear seats. Press and hold the brake pedal until the 2. In vehicles with the Keyless Access step 4 is performed. Fig. 36 Instrument console: light panel. ›››  page 112 system, the engine can also 3. Move the selector lever to the P position. be started with the key in the luggage com- ● Turn the switch to the required position partment. Connect the electronic parking brake ››› Fig. 36. 4. page 217. Opening the driver's door when exiting the ››› Sym- Ignition switched Ignition is vehicle activates the electronic lock on the Briefly press the start-up button bol off switched on steering column if the ignition is disabled. ››› Fig. 194. The START ENGINE STOP button 5. blinks again. If the engine fails to switch off, Fog lights, dipped Daylight running perform an emergency disconnect beam and side lights Start the engine (Press & Drive)  lights switched on. ››› page 214. off. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 1. is performed. 30 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Sym- Ignition switched Ignition is Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights bol off switched on

The “Coming Automatic control home”, “Leaving of dipped beam home” and Wel-  and daytime run- come lights may be ning light. switched on.

Daylight running Side light on.  lights switched on.

Dipped beam head- Dipped beam  light off switched on. Fig. 37 Turn signal and main beam lever. Fig. 38 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning  Rear fog light: move the switch com- lights.    pletely from positions , or . More the lever to the required position: Switched on, for example: ● Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it 1 Right turn light: right-hand parking light  to the position. (ignition switched off). ● When approaching a traffic jam ● 2 Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig- In an emergency ››› in Side light and dipped beam  headlight on page 132 nition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on ● When towing or being towed  ››› page 132 the instrument panel. 4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. ››› in Hazard warning lights  on Control lamp  lit up.  page 137 Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 136

››› in Turn signal and main beam lev-  er on page 133  ››› page 133

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 31 The essentials

Interior lights Ambient light*: light guide on door panel. More the lever to the required position: Lighting can be selected from 8 possible colours via the  menu and the SETTINGS Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control Fig. 40 A adjust function button. 1 ›››  the interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor. ››› page 138  2  Slow wipe.

3  Continuous wipe. Windscreen wipers and window wiper Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. 4  Hold the lever down for more time to in- blade crease the wipe frequency.

Fig. 39 Detail of headliner: front interior lighting. Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the lev- 5  Knob Function er forwards, and simultaneously the windscreen wipers start. Switches interior lights off.  Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper 6 will wipe the window approximately ev- Switches interior lights on.   ery six seconds. Door contact switch-on. The rear window wash function is activa- The interior lights come on automati- 7 ted by pressing the lever, and the rear Central posi- cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a  wiper starts simultaneously. tion door is opened or the key is removed or from the ignition. Fig. 40 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear a) The light goes off a few seconds after wiper. all the doors are closed, the vehicle is  ››› page 139 locked or the ignition is switched on. More the lever to the required position: page 54  Turning the reading light on and off  ››› 0  Windscreen wipers off. a) Depending on version.

32 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 41 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 42 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

The actual number of menus available and ● OR: Press the infotainment button  to Pressing the menu button  will always take the name of the various options will depend open the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 42. you to the last menu used. on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. ● Press the SETTINGS function button to Any changes made using the settings menus open the Vehicle settings menu. ● Switch the ignition on. are automatically saved on closing those ● To select a function in the menu, press the menus. ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it desired button. on. ● Press the Infotainment button  and When the function button check box is acti- then the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 41. vated , the function is active.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Selecting the ESC Sport mode or deactivating the electronic stability system (ESC) ››› page 221 Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 325 Tyres Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning value ››› page 329 »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 33 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamp Light assist page 132 range adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travel mode. ›››

Lights Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 138 page 135 Coming Home/Leaving Home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› ››› page 136 ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 251

Front Assist (emergency braking as- Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning display page 247 sistance system) ›››

Lane Assist (system warning you if Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance page 260 you leave the lane) ››› Driver assistance Detection of traffic signs Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warning ››› page 102 Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calculate Trailer page 296 the route, maximum speed for trailer ›››

Fatigue detection Activation and deactivation ››› page 100 Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound tre- page 283, ParkPilot ››› ble, adjust Infotainment volume ››› page 287 Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off ››› page 241 Parking and manoeuvring Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically ››› page 219 Braking while manoeuvring function Switching on and off ››› page 286

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 138

34 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Synchronised regulation, fold in after parking, rear-view mirror heating, dim in the page 20, Mirrors ››› dark page 142 Mirrors and wind- ››› screen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic windscreen wipers in case of rain, wipe when re- Windscreen wipers page 32 versing ›››

Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with Electric windows control page 127 central locking ›››

Opening and closing Unlocking doors, automatic lock/unlock when driving, “Easy Open” audible confir- Central locking mation, “Easy Entry” convenient entry function, automatic opening of the rear lid, ››› page 112 interior monitoring

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad- vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display, speed Instrument panel – page 99 warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset ››› data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format –

Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption, elec- Units – – tric consumption, pressure

Service – Chassis number, date of next service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 106

All Restore all settings –

Factory settings Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear view Individual – mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 35 The essentials

Other warning lamps Warning lamps  Fault in the emission control system ››› page 236.  Turn lights or emergency lights on Control and warning lamps ››› page 132.  Fault in the petrol engine management page 236.  Trailer turn signals page 132. Red warning lamps ››› ›››  Fault in the steering system page 231.  Auto Hold activated ››› page 241.  Notification central lamp: additional infor- ››› mation on the instrument panel display  Press the foot brake ››› page 225.  Tyre monitor system ››› page 326.  Parking brake on ››› page 218. Speed regulator ››› page 242; OR speed  Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 105. limiter page 243; OR Adaptive Cruise Fault in the brake system page 218.  ›››  ››› Control (ACC) ››› page 252. Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension-  Fault in the steering system ››› page 231.  ers ››› page 73. Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)  page 260. Driver or passenger has not fastened seat ›››  belt page 62. Front passenger front airbag is disa- ›››   Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 132.  bled ››› page 73.  Press the foot brake ››› page 252.  Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not The front passenger front airbag is activated properly closed ››› page 97.   Yellow warning lamps ››› page 73.  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 106. Notification central lamp: additional infor- Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)   Engine oil pressure page 314. mation on the instrument panel display ››› page 260.  ›››  Fault in the battery page 319.  Front brake pads worn page 218. Fault in the lighting of the vehicle ››› ›››  ››› page 132.  Main beam assist (Light Assist) page 132. Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by the ››› system; OR ESC or ASR in operation   Low engine oil level ››› page 314.  Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 240. ››› page 221.  Fault in the gearbox ››› page 230.  Electronic immobiliser active ››› page 120.  ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in Sport mode ››› page 221.  Service interval display ››› page 106.  Windscreen cleaning fluid too low ››› page 139. Mobile telephone is connected via Blue- Fault in the ABS page 221.   ››› tooth® ››› page 206.  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 132.

36 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

●  Mobile telephone battery charge status Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- ››› page 206. tion: press button 2 in  to lower the speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced  Risk of freezing ››› page 97. until reaching the new stored speed.  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 238. ● Switching off the CCS: Move switch ››› Fig. 43 1 to . The system is disconnec- . Start-Stop system unavailable ››› page 238. ted and the memorised speed is deleted.

››› in Control and warning lamps on Operation using the third lever  page 109 ● Switching on the CCS: move the third lever Fig. 44 On the left of the steering column: third to  Fig. 44. The system switches on but ››› page 109 lever to operate the CCS. ›››  it does not control the speed as no speed has been programmed. Operation of the turn signal lever ● Activating the CCS: press the button  ● Switching on the CCS: Move switch Fig. 44. It memorises and maintains the Fig. 43 1 to . The system is on. If no ››› Cruise control ››› current speed. speed has been programmed, the system will ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: move Operating the cruise control system not control it. the lever to  Fig. 44 and release it or ● Activate the CCS: Press button Fig. 43 ››› (CCS)* ››› press the brake pedal. The cruise control 2 in the  area. The current speed is system is switched off temporarily. memorised and controlled. ● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move  Fig. 44 and release it. The memo- switch Fig. 43 1 to  or push the ››› ››› rised speed is saved and controlled again. brake. The cruise control system is switched off temporarily. ● Disconnect the CCS: turn the key to position  Fig. 44. The system is disconnec- ● Reactivating the CCS: Press button ››› ted and the memorised speed is deleted. ››› Fig. 43 2 in . The memorised speed is saved and controlled again. ››› in Cruise control operation on ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regu-  page 243 lation: press button 2 in . The vehicle Fig. 43 Left of the steering column: CCS switch accelerates until the new stored speed. page 242 and controls.  ›››

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 37 The essentials

Gearbox Manual release of the selector lever Releasing the selector lever ● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- DSG Automatic transmission low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 46. ● Press the interlock button on the selector lever and move the selector lever to position N. ● After carrying out the manual release, attach the selector lever boot on the gearbox console again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. discharged battery) and the vehicle has to be Fig. 46 Selector lever: manual release from posi- pushed or towed, the selector lever must tion P. first be moved to position N, after operating the manual release mechanism. Fig. 45 Automatic transmission: selector lever po- Should the power supply be interrupted, sitions. there is a manual unlocking device located WARNING under the console of the selector lever, on P Parking lock the right. Releasing the selector lever re- The selector lever may be moved out of po- R Reverse gear quires a certain degree of practical skill. sition P only when the handbrake is firmly N Neutral (idling) applied. If this does not work, secure the ● Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriver vehicle with the brake pedal. On a slope the D/S Drive (forward) blade. vehicle could otherwise start to move inad- +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards vertently after shifting the selector lever (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to Removing the cover from the selector lev- out of position P - accident risk! go down a gear. er ● Apply the handbrake  ››› to ensure ››› in Selector lever positions on that the car does not move.  page 225 ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector ››› page 224 lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-  er handle.  ››› page 38

38 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic work?

Fig. 47 In the centre console: Climatronic control panel.

To switch a specific function on, press the The LED on each control lights up to indicate appropriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has switch off the function. been switched on.

Temperature 1 The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature

Fan 2 The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

Air distribution 3 The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides.

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind- Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 39 The essentials

 Air distribution towards the footwell.  Upward air distribution.  Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.  Air recirculation   Seat heating buttons  Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air   distribution adjusts automatically to the position .  When the warning light for button lights up , the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side, press the button or the temperature control on the passenger side

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press key: the lamp in button  will lit up.

 Press the  key: the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the  position or press the  button.

 ››› in Introduction on page 158  ››› page 158

40 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Fluid level control The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked Oil and locked automatically using the central locking. Filling capacities Opening the fuel tank cap Tank level ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the Petrol engines 55 l, 8.5 l reserve left side. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. tainer ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 48. Versions without ››› headlight washer approx. 3 litres system Closing the fuel tank cap Fig. 49 Engine oil dipstick. Versions with ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right headlight washer approx. 5 litres as far as it will go. system ● Close the lid.

››› in Refuelling on page 308 Fuel   ››› page 308

Fig. 50 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick located in the engine compartment ›››  page 313.

Fig. 48 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. The oil indicator must be between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A . »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 41 The essentials

● Zone A : do not add oil. – Gasoline engines: standard VW 504 00, Coolant ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or in that zone. API SN. ● Zone C : add oil until zone B . Have the oil changed by a specialised workshop. Topping up engine oil ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.  ● Add oil slowly. Recommended by CUPRA ● At the same time, check the level to ensure CUPRA recommends using original CUPRA you do not add too much. oil to guarantee high CUPRA engine per- ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , formance. Fig. 51 Engine compartment: coolant expansion unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. tank cap.

Engine oil additives ››› in Changing engine oil on The coolant tank is located in the engine No type of additive should be mixed with the  page 316 compartment ›››  page 313. engine oil. The deterioration caused by ››› page 313 When the engine is cold, replace the coolant these additives is not covered by the warran-  when the level is below . ty. Coolant specifications If the engine oil level is too low The engine cooling system is supplied from You can get information about the correct the factory with a specially treated mixture of engine oil for your vehicle in your specialised water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 shop. If you have to change your engine oil, (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the use this oil. necessary frost protection down to -25°C If the recommended engine oil is not availa- (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of ble, in the event of an emergency you can the engine cooling system against corrosion. change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- of the next oil until the next oil change: ses the boiling point of the coolant. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %,

42 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials even in warm climates where anti-freeze Brake fluid Windscreen washer protection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection in Top- ››› Fig. 52 Engine compartment: brake fluid reservoir Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: cap of the ping up coolant on page 317. The mixture cap. windscreen washer tank. of G13 with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will sig- The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located nificantly reduce anti-corrosion protection gine compartment ›››  page 313. in the engine compartment and should therefore be avoided ››› in ›››  page 313. Topping up coolant on page 317. The level should be between the  and  marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- To top up, mix water with a product recom- ››› in Topping up coolant on cal Service. mended by CUPRA.  page 317 In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.  ››› in Top up brake fluid on page 317  ››› page 316 ››› in Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir on page 317   ››› page 318  ››› page 318

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 43 The essentials

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 313. It does not require maintenance. It is checked as part of the Inspection Service.

››› in Important safety warnings for  handling a vehicle battery on page 319  ››› page 318

44 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Emergencies Colour Amp rating Purple 3

Fuses Light brown 5 Fuse location Brown 7.5 Red 10

Blue 15

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: lid of the fuse Yellow 20 box. White or transparent 25

Underneath the instrument panel (left- Green 30 hand drive) Orange 40 The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment ››› Fig. 54 .  ››› in Introduction on page 85 Behind the glove compartment (right- hand drive)  ››› page 85 The fuse box is located behind the glove compartment ››› Fig. 54 . To be able to access the fuse box ›››  page 86.

In the engine compartment Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 55. Fig. 54  Left guide: fuse box cover on the driver-side dash panel.  Right guide: fuse box be- Identifying fuses situated below the dash hind the glove compartment. panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 45 The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse Action in the event of a punc- box lid. ture

Bulbs What to do first ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface Changing bulbs and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Note: LEDs have an estimated life that ex- ● Apply the handbrake. ceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replace- ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ment. ● Move the selector lever to the P position. Fig. 56 Image of a blown fuse. Light source used for each function ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from Preparation your vehicle. Full-LED main headlights ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- ● Have the vehicle tool kit ›››  page 78 cal equipment. No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs and the spare wheel* ready  page 328. ● Open the corresponding fuse box ››› ›››  page 86. LED rear lights Type ● Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, Turn signal PY21W LL Identifying a blown fuse etc.). A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Reverse lights W16W ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ››› Fig. 56. The remaining functions work with LEDs roadside crash barrier). ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.  ››› page 89 WARNING ● Always observe the above steps and pro- To replace a fuse tect yourself and other road users. ● Remove the fuse. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an the wheel on the opposite side of the car identical amperage rating (same colour and with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- markings) and identical size. cle from moving.

46 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the ture kit ››› Fig. 57 3 and screw the open end of the valve. tube into the tyre valve. ● Repeat the inflation process. ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop bottle. and request assistance from an authorised ● Remove the bottle from the valve. technician. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew ing the tool ››› Fig. 57 1 . the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and Inflating the tyre 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube 80 km/h (50 mph). ››› Fig. 57 8 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ›››  page 80. Fig. 57 6 . Fig. 57 Standard display: contents of the anti- ››› puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running. ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on  page 78 ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 57 9 into the The anti-puncture kit is located under the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 149. page 78 floor panel in the luggage compartment.  ››› ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 57 5 . Sealing the tyre ››› ● Keep the air compressor running until it ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar the Fig. 57 1 tool to remove the insert. ››› (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 Place it on a clean surface. minutes. ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Disconnect the air compressor. ››› Fig. 57 10 . ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● Screw the inflator tube Fig. 57 3 into ››› unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 47 The essentials

Changing a wheel Wheel bolt caps Anti-theft wheel bolts

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 60 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter. Fig. 59 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps. ● Remove the cap*. Removal Fig. 58 Underneath the floor panel of the luggage ● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools) compartment: on-board tools. ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on ››› Fig. 58 7 ) over the cap until it clicks into as far as it will go. 1 Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* place Fig. 59. ››› ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto 2 Towline anchorage ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. the adapter as far as it will go. 3 Box spanner for wheel bolts* ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 49. 4 Crank handle for jack Note 5 Jack* Make a note of the code number of the an- 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe trims* place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a 7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps. new adapter, you can obtain it from the specialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Of- ficial Service, indicating the code number.  ››› in What to do first on page 46  ››› page 78

48 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

Loosening the wheel bolts Raising the vehicle ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed ››› Fig. 62. ● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 ››› Fig. 63 is below the housing provided. ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto the housing provided on the strut and the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with respect to the support point 1 . Fig. 61 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts. Fig. 62 Crossbar: brands. ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground. ● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapter WARNING is required to unscrew or tighten the anti- theft wheel bolts ››› page 48. ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* ● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one could slip or sink, respectively, with the return to the left Fig. 61 (arrow). To apply ››› sultant risk of injury. the required torque, hold the wheel brace at the end. If it is not possible to loosen a wheel ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- bolt, carefully apply pressure with one foot plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, on the end of the box spanner. Hold on to even those approved for other CUPRA models could slip, with the consequent risk the vehicle for support and take care not to Fig. 63 Crossbar: mounting the jack on the vehi- of injury. slip. cle. ● Only mount the jack* on the support WARNING ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm points designed for this purpose on the ground. If necessary use a large, strong strut, and always align the jack correctly. If Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) board or similar support. If the surface is slip- you do not, the jack* could slip as it does before raising the vehicle with the jack*. If pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: not, an accident may occur. rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- risk of injury! » ping ››› .

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 49 The essentials

● The height of the parked vehicle can ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs Subsequent work change as a result of variations in using the wheel brace. ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. temperature and loading. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- CAUTION the wheel condition and hub mounting sur- tion. faces. These surfaces must be clean before The vehicle must not be raised on the ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the fitting the wheel. crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points spare wheel housing, store it safely in the designed for this purpose on the strut. Oth- luggage compartment ›››  page 150. erwise, the vehicle may be damaged. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly Tyres with compulsory direction of ro- mounted tyre as soon as possible. tation ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi- Removing and fitting a wheel cator, adjust the pressure and store the A directional tread pattern can be identified reading in the radio/Easy Connect system* Change the wheel after loosening the wheel by the arrows on the sidewall that point in ›››  page 325. bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. the direction of rotation. Always observe the ● direction of rotation indicated when fitting Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- Taking off the wheel the wheel to guarantee optimum properties of this type of tyres with regard to grip, que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Mean- ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box noises, wear and aquaplaning. while, drive carefully. spanner and place them on a clean surface. ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare ● Take off the wheel. possible. tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive with care as this means the tyre does not of- Putting on the spare wheel fer optimum driving properties. This is of When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation particular importance when the road surface Snow chains direction, observe the instructions in is wet. ››› page 50. To return to directional tread tires, replace Use ● Mount the wheel. the punctured tyre as soon as possible and Snow chains should only be used on the ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and restore the obligatory direction of rotation of front wheels. tighten them loosely with a box spanner. all tyres. ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the 50 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials manufacturer's fitting instructions. Keep Emergency towing of the vehi- Towline anchorages your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). cle Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- If there is a danger of being trapped despite rages. having mounted the chains, it is best to disa- Towing The towline anchorages are located under ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC the floor panel in the luggage compartment,  page 223, Connecting/disconnect- ››› next to the vehicle tools ›››  page 78. ing the ESC. Screw the towline anchorage into the screw Snow chains will improve braking ability as connection ››› Fig. 64 or ››› Fig. 65 and well as traction in winter conditions. tighten it with the wheel brace. For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre Tow rope or tow bar combination. The tow bar offers increased safety and a lower risk of damage. 225/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm The tow rope is recommended when there is 225/45 R19 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm Fig. 64 Right side of the front bumper: towline no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does Other dimensions do not allow chains anchorage screwed in. not damage the vehicle.

Remove any central wheel trims and the rim Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ring before fitting snow chains. ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive Remove the chains when roads are free of off. snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the ● Release the clutch very carefully when wheels become damaged quickly and may starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac- even be rendered unusable. celerate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style Towing requires some experience, especially Fig. 65 Right side of the rear bumper: towline an- when using a tow rope. Both drivers should chorage screwed in. realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In- experienced drivers should not attempt to tow. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 51 The essentials

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle does not work. This is done by leveraging least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. wheel movement. 35 mm2 for diesel engines. When towing on an unpaved road, there is When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol always a risk of overloading and damaging Note engine, do not tow it more than a short dis- the anchorage points. tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter ● The vehicles must not touch each other, Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig- the catalytic converter. otherwise electricity could flow as soon as nals, windscreen wipers and windscreen the positive terminals are connected. washer can work. Ensure that the steering ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off. ● The discharged battery must be properly wheel is unlocked and moves freely. ● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down. connected to the on-board network. To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The ● Switch the ignition on. brake servo does not work when the engine ● Once both vehicles are moving, release is switched off. the clutch. How to jump start: description The power steering only works when the ig- ● As soon as the engine has started, press nition is switched on and the vehicle is mov- the clutch and move the gear lever to neu- ing, provided that the battery is sufficiently tral. charged. Otherwise, it will need more force. Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times. How to jump start

 ››› in Introduction on page 81 Jump leads The jump lead must have a sufficient wire page 81  ››› cross section. Fig. 66 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connec- Jump lead terminal connections Tow-starting ted to the battery of another vehicle to start Fig. 66 the engine. ››› If the engine will not start, first try starting it 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles Jump leads must comply with standard DIN using the battery of another vehicle ››› . 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- page 52. You should only attempt to ››› tions). The wire cross section must be at tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery

52 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead Removing the jump leads acid could leak and cause chemical burns. to the positive + terminal of the vehicle 9. Before you remove the jump leads, If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. with the flat battery A . switch off the dipped beam headlights if ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- 3. Connect the other end of the red jump they are switched on. rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- lead to the positive terminal + in the 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated plosion. Failure to comply could result in an vehicle providing assistance B . rear window in the vehicle with the flat explosion. 4. Connect one end of the black jump lead battery. This helps minimise voltage ● Observe the instructions provided by the C to a suitable ground terminal, to a peaks which are generated when the manufacturer of the jump leads. solid piece of metal in the engine block, leads are disconnected. ● Do not connect the negative cable from or to the engine block itself. 11. When the engine is running, disconnect the other vehicle directly to the negative 5. Connect the other end of the black the leads in reverse order to the details terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. jump lead D to a solid metal compo- given above. nent bolted to the engine block or to Danger of explosion. the engine block itself of the vehicle Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel with the flat battery. Do not connect it metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- system components or the brake lines in to a point near the battery. minals. the other vehicle. 6. Position the leads in such a way that If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery they cannot come into contact with any onds, switch off the starter and try again af- clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery moving parts in the engine compart- ter about 1 minute. terminal must not touch metal parts of the ment. vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. WARNING ● Position the leads in such a way that they Starting ● Please note the safety warnings referring cannot come into contact with any moving to working in the engine compartment 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the parts in the engine compartment. boosting battery and let it run at idling ›››  page 310. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could ● The battery providing assistance must speed. result in chemical burns. 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply Note until the engine is running. could result in an explosion. The vehicles must not touch each other, ● Never use jump leads when one of the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! the positive terminals are connected. Even after the battery has thawed, battery

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 53 The essentials

Changing the wiper blades Changing the windscreen and rear Cleaning windscreen wiper blades window wiper blades ● Raise the wiper arms. Windscreen wipers service position ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used ››› in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on page 81.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades ● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 68 1 Fig. 68 Changing the windscreen wiper blades and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- Fig. 67 Wipers in service position. rection of the arrow. ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- and design on to the wiper arm and hook it ers are in service position ››› Fig. 67. into place. ● Close the bonnet ›››  page 310. ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. ● Switch the ignition on and off. ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- Changing the rear wiper blade wards briefly 4 ››› page 32. ● Lift and fold the wiper arm. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. ● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 69 (arrow Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- Fig. 69 Changing the rear wiper blade A ). screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- ● Hold down the release button 1 while tion. Raising and lowering windscreen wiper gently pulling the blade in the direction of ar- arms row B .  ››› page 81 ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service position ››› page 54. ● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fastening point. 54 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ The essentials

● Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow B and hook into place button 1 . ● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

››› in Changing the windscreen and  rear window wiper blades on page 81  ››› page 81

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 55 Safety

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Safety good view of the surroundings. others on the road ››› , for this reason: – Make sure all luggage is secured – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safe driving ››› page 150. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. – Make sure that no objects can interfere Safety first! with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir- WARNING rors properly according to your size. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. ● This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, – Ensure that the passengers in the rear – Always reduce your speed as appropriate both for the driver and the passengers. The seats always have the head restraints in the for road, traffic and weather conditions. in-use position page 61. other sections of the on-board documen- ››› – When travelling long distances, take breaks tation also contain further information that – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- regularly - at least every two hours. you should be aware of for your own safety straints according to their height. and for the safety of your passengers. – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired ● Ensure that the on-board documentation – Protect children with appropriate child or stressed. is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- seats and properly applied seat belts pecially important when lending or selling ››› page 73. WARNING the vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. In- When driving safety is impaired during a struct your passengers also to assume a trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa- proper sitting position ››› page 57. ses. Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat Safety equipment Before setting off belts properly ››› page 62. Never put your safety or the safety of your For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an ac- passengers, always note the following points What affects driving safety? cident, the safety equipment may reduce before every trip: the risk of injury. The following points cover As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn and your passengers. When your concentra- signals are working properly. tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- – Check tyre pressure.

56 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Safe driving part of the safety equipment in your CU- Correct position of the vehicle For your own safety and to reduce the risk of PRA1): injury in the event of an accident, we recom- occupants mend the following adjustments for the driv- ● three-point seat belts, er: ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear Correct sitting position for the driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a side seats, distance of at least 25 cm between the ● belt tensioners for the front and rear side steering wheel and the centre of your seats, chest ››› Fig. 70. ● front airbags, – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- ● knee airbags, wards so that you are able to press the ac- ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled ● head-protection airbags, ››› . ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, – Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel. ● height-adjustable front head restraints, Fig. 70 The proper distance between driver and – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper ● rear head restraints with in-use position steering wheel. edge is at the same level as the top of your and non-use position, head, or as close as possible to the same ● adjustable steering column. level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 71. The safety equipment mentioned above – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- works together to provide you and your pas- tion so that your back rests completely sengers with the best possible protection in against it. the event of an accident. However, these – Fasten your seat belt securely page 62. safety systems can only be effective if you ››› and your passengers are sitting in a correct – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you position and use this equipment properly. have the vehicle under control at all times. Safety is everyone's business! Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 143. » Fig. 71 Correct head restraint position for the driver.

1) Depending on the version/market. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 57 Safety

WARNING ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- mend the following adjustments for the front ieve optimal protection. passenger: ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries. – Move the front passenger seat back as far ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at as possible ››› . least 25 cm distance between the centre of Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- the chest and the centre of the steering tion so that your back rests completely wheel ››› Fig. 70. If you are sitting closer Read the additional information carefully against it. than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro- ›››  page 21. tect you properly. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper ● If your physical constitution prevents you WARNING edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same from maintaining the minimum distance of ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head page 60. 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this ››› workshop will help you decide if special could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in specific modifications are necessary. ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering front of the front passenger seat. ● When driving, always hold the steering wheel position does not accidentally – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 62. wheel with both hands on the outside of change during driving. risk of accident! the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- ● Make sure you are capable of reaching It is possible to deactivate the front passen- tions. This reduces the risk of injury when and firmly holding the upper part of the ger airbag in exceptional circumstances the driver airbag is triggered. steering wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 72. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it o'clock position, or in any other manner Adjusting the front passenger seat points towards your face, the driver airbag (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In ››› page 143. will not protect you properly in the event of such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you an accident. Make sure that the steering may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and WARNING wheel points towards your chest. head. ● An incorrect sitting position of the front ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver passenger can lead to severe injuries. during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that accident, never drive with the backrest til- Correct position for the front passen- there is at least 25 cm between your chest ted far back! The airbag system and seat ger and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer belts can only provide optimal protection than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro- when the backrest is in an upright position For your own safety and to reduce the risk of tect you properly. and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt injury in the event of an accident, we recom- correctly. ● If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of

58 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Safe driving

25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The passengers on the rear seat bench must Examples of incorrect sitting positions workshop will help you decide if special consider the following: Seat belts can provide optimal protection specific modifications are necessary. – Sit up straight. ● Always keep your feet in the footwell only when the belt webs are properly posi- – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- when the vehicle is moving; never rest tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- them on the dash panel, out the window or sition ››› page 61. tially reduce the protective function of seat on the seat. An incorrect sitting position – Always keep both feet in the footwell in belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- exposes you to an increased risk of injury in front of the rear seat. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you case of a sudden braking or an accident. If are responsible for all passengers, especially the airbag is triggered, you could sustain – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 62. children. severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting – Use an appropriate child restraint system – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect position. when you take children in the vehicle sitting position in the vehicle while travel- ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front ››› page 73. ling ››› . passenger in events such as sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel WARNING The following list contains examples of sit- with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag ting positions that could be dangerous for all ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not system and seat belts can only provide opti- vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, mal protection when the backrest is in an sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries. but we would like to make you aware of this upright position and the front passenger is issue. wearing his or her seat belt properly. The ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- further the seat backrests are tilted to the der to achieve maximum protection. Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo- rear, the greater the risk of injury due to in- ● Seat belts can only provide optimal pro- tion: correct positioning of the belt web or to the tection when seat backrests are in an up- incorrect sitting position! right position and the vehicle occupants ● Never stand in the vehicle. ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- are wearing their seat belts correctly. If ● Never stand on the seats. der to achieve maximum protection. passengers In the rear seats are not sitting ● Never kneel on the seats. in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in- ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. creases. Correct sitting position for rear seat ● Never lean against the dash panel. passengers ● Never lie on the rear bench. ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a ● Never sit sideways. sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ● Never lean out of a window. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 59 Safety

● Never put your feet out of a window. Correct adjustment of front head re- death in an accident and increase the risk ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. straints of suffering injuries during abrupt braking actions or unexpected manoeuvres. ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. ● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height of the passen- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot- ger. well. ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING ● Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries. Sitting in an in- Fig. 72 Correctly adjusted head restraint as correct position exposes the vehicle occu- viewed from the front and the side. pants to severe injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who Read the additional information carefully has assumed an incorrect sitting position. ›››  page 19. ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the Properly adjusted head restraints are an improper sitting position and maintain it portant part of passenger protection and throughout the trip. Before every trip, in- can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- struct your passengers to sit properly and dent situations. to stay in this position during the trip ››› page 57, Correct position of the vehicle ● Adjust the head restraint so that its upper occupants. edge is, as far as possible, at the same level as the top of your head, or at the very least, at eye level ››› Fig. 72.

WARNING ● Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause

60 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Safe driving

Correct adjustment of rear head re- Rear head restraints Pedal area straints – The rear head restraints have 2 positions: use and non-use. Pedals – One position for use (head restraint raised) ››› Fig. 73. In this position, the head re- – Ensure that you can always press the accel- straints are used normally, protecting pas- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired sengers along with the rear seat belts. to the floor.

– And one position for non-use (head re- – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- straint lowered). paired to their initial positions.

– To fit the head restraints in position for use, – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- pull on the edges with both hands in the tened during the trip and do not obstruct direction of the arrow. the pedals ››› . Fig. 73 Head restraints in the correct position. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them ● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- are in the non-use position. See the warn- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. ing label located on the rear side fixed window ››› Fig. 74. If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop ● Do not swap the centre rear head re- the vehicle. straint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet Fig. 74 Head restraint position warning label. CAUTION properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals. Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Note the instructions on the adjustment of portant part of the passenger protection and the head restraints ››› page 144. WARNING can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations ● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 61 Safety

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor Seat belts Seat belt control lamp* coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident. Why wear a seat belt ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area Number of seats and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front you will not be able to operate the brake, and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci- with a three-point seat belt. dent! In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front seats and two rear seats. Fig. 75 Dashboard: right rear seat occupied and corresponding seat belt fastened display. WARNING  It lights up red ● Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your vehicle. Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt. ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to The control lamp illuminates to remind the his or her seat. Children must be protected driver to fasten his seat belt. with an appropriate child restraint system. Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely. ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. ● Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened during the drive, a warning sound will be

62 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Seat belts heard for a few seconds. The warning light The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat will also flash . belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means The lamp  goes out when the driver and of substantially reducing the risk of injury and passenger seat belts are fastened with the improving the chances of survival when in- ignition switched on. volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- Rear seat belts fastened display* tion provided by airbags in the event of an Depending on the model version, when the accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt ignition is switched on, the seat belt status is required by law in most countries. display ››› Fig. 75 on the instrument panel in- Although your vehicle is equipped with air- forms the driver whether the passengers in bags, the seat belts must be fastened and the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. Fig. 76 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will worn. The front airbags, for example, are on- The  symbol indicates that the passenger in not be thrown forward in the event of sudden ly triggered in some cases of head-on colli- this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt. braking. sion. The front airbags will not be triggered When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened during minor frontal or side collisions, rear- Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- end collisions, overturns or accidents in in the proper position. They also help pre- played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- which the airbag trigger threshold value in vent uncontrolled movements that may re- dication can be hidden by pressing the the control unit is not exceeded.  button on the dash panel. sult in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an Therefore, you should always wear your seat The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of accident. belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts properly be- Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. fore you drive off! An audible warning will also be heard if the correctly benefit greatly from the ability of vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph). the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag Important safety instructions for the system) are designed to absorb the kinetic use of seat belts energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing ki- – Always wear the seat belt as described in netic energy and consequently, the risk of this section. injury. This is why it is so important to fasten – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened seat belts before every trip, even when "just at all times and are not damaged. » driving around the corner". https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 63 Safety

WARNING proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- Head-on collisions and the laws of ducing their capacity to protect. ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at physics all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not optimal protection from seat belts can be be blocked with paper or other objects, as achieved only if you use them properly. this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely. ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. Other vehicle ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings occupants must also wear the seat belts at or similar items to alter the position of the all times, otherwise they run the risk of be- belt webbing. ing injured. ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- the connections, belt retractors or parts of tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor- the buckle could cause severe injuries in rectly. the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at ● Never allow two passengers (even chil- Fig. 77 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown regular intervals. dren) to share the same seat belt. forward violently. ● Seat belts which have been worn in an ac- ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in cident and have been stretched must be re- front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal motion. may be necessary even if there is no appa- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- rent damage. The belt anchorage should hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. also be checked. ● The seat belt must never be twisted while ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat it is being worn. belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or moved or modified in any way. fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise etc.) because this can cause injuries. the retractors may not work properly. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged Fig. 78 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or wearing a seat belt. in any other incorrect position. The effects of the laws of physics in the case ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as of a head-on collision are easy to explain: an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy called “kinetic energy” starts 64 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Seat belts acting on both the vehicle and its passen- possible to brace oneself with one's hands. How to properly adjust your gers. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact seat belt The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- the speed of the vehicle and on the weight screen or whatever else is in the way of the vehicle and of its passengers. The Fastening and unfastening your seat Fig. 77. higher they are, the more energy there is to ››› belt be “absorbed” in the event of an accident. It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could oth- The most significant factor, however, is the erwise be thrown forward violently through speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles the vehicle interior in an accident. Passen- from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), gers in the rear seats who do not use seat for example, the corresponding kinetic en- belts endanger not only themselves but also ergy is multiplied by four. the front occupants ››› Fig. 78. Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fastened, in the event of a collision the entire amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before Fig. 79 Positioning and removing the seat belt the impact. This example applies not only to buckle. » head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions. Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 65 Safety

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is tion and the seat belts have been fastened securely engaged in the buckle. properly. The seat belts are equipped with an auto- ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full another seat. If you do this, the seat belt freedom of movement is permitted when will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased. the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- areas or bends and during acceleration, the hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. locked. ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. The automatic belt retractors on the front Fig. 80 Position of seat belt during pregnancy. seats and side rear seats1) are fitted with seat ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the belt tensioners ››› page 66. seat belt must lie as low as possible over the Read the additional information carefully pelvis, never across the stomach, and al-  page 20. ways lie flat so that no pressure is exerted ››› Releasing the seat belt on the abdomen ››› Fig. 80. Fasten your seat belt ● Press the red button on the belt buckle ● Always engage the retractor lock when The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ››› Fig. 79 B. The latch plate is released and you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. springs out ››› . or 1 ››› page 73. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ● Read and observe the warnings ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correct- up easily and the trim is not damaged. ››› page 63. ly. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch Positioning seat belts plate and pull it slowly across your chest and Seat belts offer their maximum protection lap. Seat belt tensioners only when they are properly positioned. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is WARNING How the seat belt tensioner works securely locked with an audible click ● The seat belts offer best protection only ››› Fig. 79 A. Read the additional information carefully when the backrests are in an upright posi- ›››  page 20.

1) Depending on version/market. 66 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Seat belts

The seat belts for the front seats and the side when performing other repair work, the seat ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- 1) rear seats are equipped with belt tension- belt may be damaged. The consequence tection for one accident and must be ers. The belt tensioners are activated by sen- may be that, in the event of an accident, the changed if they have been activated. sors, although only in severe head-on, lateral belt tensioners function incorrectly or may and rear-end collisions. This retracts and not function at all. tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward So that the effectiveness of the seat belt motion of the occupants. tensioner is not reduced and that removed The belt tensioners will not be triggered in parts do not cause any injuries or environ- the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle mental pollution, regulations, which are overturns, or in accidents where no major known to the specialised workshops, must forces act on the vehicle. be observed.

Note WARNING ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by fine dust is produced. This is normal and it qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners ● The relevant safety requirements must be may fail to trigger or may trigger in the observed when the vehicle or components wrong circumstances. of the system are scrapped. Specialised ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove workshops are familiar with these regula- or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat tions, which are also available to you. belts. ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be repaired. Maintenance and disposal of belt ten- ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat sioners belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other re- The belt tensioners are components of the pair work, must be performed by a special- seat belts that are installed in the seats of ised workshop only. your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system

1) Depending on version/market. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 67 Safety

Airbag system thrown forward into the area of the deploy- gered. Children up to 12 years old should al- ing airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag ways travel on the rear seat. Never trans- may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the oc- port children in the vehicle if they are not Brief introduction cupant. This also applies to children. restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight. Always maintain the greatest possible dis- Why is it so important to wear a seat tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you belt and to sit correctly? This way, the front airbags can completely lean forward or to the side while travelling deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- or assume an incorrect sitting position, For the inflating airbags to achieve the best mum protection. there is a substantially increased risk of in- protection, the seat belt must always be jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- The most important factors for triggering the worn properly and the correct sitting posi- ther increased if you are struck by an inflat- airbag are the type of accident, the angle of ing airbag. tion must be assumed. impact and the vehicle speed. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration erly ››› page 62. overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected ● Always adjust the front seats properly. mind that the airbag system can only work by the control unit. If the vehicle decelera- effectively when the vehicle occupants are tion occurring during the collision and meas- wearing their seat belts correctly and have ured by the control unit remains below the adjusted the head restraints properly. There- Description of airbag system specified reference values, the front, side fore, it is most important to properly wear and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. the seat belts at all times, not only because Read the additional information carefully Take into account that the visible damage in this is required by law in most countries, but ›››  page 21. a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter also for your safety page 62, Why wear a ››› how serious, is not a determining factor for The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt. the airbags to have been triggered. seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so al protection for the driver and passenger in if you are not properly seated when the air- WARNING combination with the seat belts. bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- The airbag system comprises the following ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle suming an incorrect sitting position can modules (as per vehicle equipment): occupants assume a correct sitting position lead to critical or fatal injuries. while travelling. ● ● All vehicle occupants, including children, Electronic control unit Sharp braking before an accident may cause who are not properly belted can sustain ● Front airbags for driver and passenger a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig- ● Knee airbag for the driver 68 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Airbag system

● Side airbags ● the vehicle turns over. Activation factors ● Head airbag The conditions that lead to the airbag system WARNING ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument activating in each situation cannot be gener- panel ››› page 73 ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- alised. Some factors play an important role, vide maximum protection if the occupants such as the properties of the object the ve- ● Key-operated switch for front passenger are seated correctly ››› page 57, Correct po- hicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehi- airbag sition of the vehicle occupants. cle speed, etc. ● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- of the front passenger airbag. tem, have the system checked immediately vation. by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there The airbag system operation is monitored is a danger that during a collision, the sys- The control unit analyses the collision trajec- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- tem may fail to trigger, or not trigger cor- tory and activates the respective restraint luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- rectly. system. nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). If the deceleration rate is below the prede- There is a fault in the system if the control fined reference value in the control unit the lamp : Airbag activation airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to ● does not light up when the ignition is The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within the car. switched on ››› page 73, thousandths of a second, to provide addi- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition tional protection in the event of an accident. The following airbags are triggered in seri- is switched on, A fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ous head-on collisions: ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- ● turns off and then lights up again after the tion of fire in the vehicle. ● Driver airbag. ignition is switched on, ● Front passenger front airbag ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is The airbag system is only ready to function ● Knee airbag for the driver. moving. when the ignition is on. In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri- The airbag system is not triggered if: bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions: ● the ignition is switched off In the event of minor head-on and side colli- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ● there is a minor frontal collision sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent. over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● there is a minor side collision ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● there is a rear-end collision cident. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 69 Safety

In an accident with airbag activation: Knee airbag* sitting position must always be maintained ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior with seat belts fastened while travelling. Read the additional information carefully light switch is in the courtesy light position); ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will ›››  page 23. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- ● all doors are unlocked; WARNING rior of the doors, due to air escaping ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of through the areas with holes or openings in the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy- the door panel. ment areas of the knee airbags free. ● Never drive if the interior door panels Airbag safety instructions ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in have been removed or if the panels have the deployment area of the knee airbag. not been correctly fitted. ● ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- Front airbags Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- ers in the door panels have been removed, tween your knees and the location of the unless the holes left by the loudspeakers Read the additional information carefully this airbag. If your physical constitution have been closed properly.  page 21. ››› prevents you from meeting these require- ● Always check that the openings are ments, make sure you contact a specialised closed or covered if loudspeakers or other WARNING workshop. equipment are fitted inside the door pan- ● The deployment space between the front els. passengers and the airbags must not in any ● Occupants of the outer seats must never case be occupied by other passenger, pets Side airbags carry any objects or pets in the deployment and objects. space between them and the airbags, or al- ● The airbags provide protection for just Read the additional information carefully low children or other passengers to travel in one accident; replace them once they have ›››  page 23. this position. It is also important not to at- deployed. tach any accessories (such as cup holders) ● It is also important not to attach any ob- WARNING to the doors. This would impair the protec- jects such as cup holders or telephone tion offered by the side airbags. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean mountings to the surfaces covering the air- ● The built-in coat hooks should be used forward, or are not seated correctly while bag units. only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the ● Do not attempt to modify components of risk of injury if the side airbag system is trig- pockets. the airbag system in any way. gered in an accident. ● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed

70 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Airbag system

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, Curtain airbags* ● Any work on the head-protection airbag must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- system or removal and installation of the ster because the system may be damaged. Read the additional information carefully airbag components for other repairs (such In this case, the side airbags would not be ›››  page 24. as removal of the roof lining) should only be triggered. performed by a specialised workshop. Oth- ● Under no circumstances should protec- WARNING erwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation. tive covers be fitted over seats with side air- ● In order for the head-protection airbags bags unless the covers have been approved to provide their maximum protection, the ● Do not attempt to modify components of for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag prescribed sitting position must always be the airbag system in any way. deploys from the side of the backrest, the maintained with seat belts fastened while ● The side and head airbags are managed use of conventional seat covers would ob- travelling. through sensors located in the interior of struct the side airbag, seriously reducing ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag the front doors. To ensure the correct op- the airbag's effectiveness. must be disabled in those vehicles fitted eration of the side and curtain airbags nei- ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- with a screen dividing the interior of the ve- ther the doors nor the door panels should tery or around the seams of the side airbag hicle. See your technical service to make be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud- units must be repaired immediately by a this adjustment. speakers). If the front door is damaged, the specialised workshop. airbag system may not work correctly. All ● There must be no other persons, animals work carried out on the front door must be ● The airbags provide protection for just or objects between the occupants of the done in a specialised workshop. one accident; replace them once they have outer seats and the deployment space of deployed. the head-protection airbags so that the ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- head-protection airbag can deploy com- moval and installation of the airbag compo- pletely without restriction and provide the nents for other repairs (such as removal of greatest possible protection. Therefore, the front seat) should only be performed by sun blinds which have not been expressly a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults approved for use in your vehicle may not be may occur during the airbag system opera- attached to the side windows tion. ● The built-in coat hooks should be used ● Do not attempt to modify components of only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave the airbag system in any way. any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. ● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 71 Safety

Deactivating airbags Deactivate the front passenger front airbag Connect the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child ● Switch the ignition off. seat in the front passenger seat. Activation and deactivation of front ● Open the front passenger door. CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat in passenger airbag ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate deactivating the front passenger airbag the front passenger airbag. ››› Fig. 81. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go. Front passenger front airbag switch ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you When the front passenger airbag is deacti- have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted vated, this means that only the front passen- the key as far as it will go. ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other ● airbags in the vehicle remain activated. Close the front passenger door. ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that Disconnect the front passenger front air- the   control lamp is not lit where it says bag      in the centre of the dash panel Fig. 82. The   control lamp Fig. 81 Switch for activating and deactivating the ● Switch the ignition off. ››› front passenger airbag. lights up for 60 seconds and then goes off. ● Open the door on the front passenger side. WARNING ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible deactivating the front passenger airbag for disabling or switching on the airbag. Fig. 81. About 3/4 of the key should enter; ››› ● Always switch off the ignition before disa- this is as far as it will go. bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If do so could result in a fault in the airbag de- you have difficulty, ensure that you have in- activation system. serted the key as far as it will go. ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- ● Close the front passenger door. bling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving. ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that Fig. 82 Dashboard: control lamp for deactivated   ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, front passenger airbag in centre console. the control lamp remains lit where it says      in the centre of the reactivate it as soon as possible so that it dash panel ››› Fig. 82. can fulfil its protective function.

72 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transporting children safely

Airbag system control lamps front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp Transporting children safely does not remain lit or if it is lit together with   It lights up on the combi-instrument the control lamp on the dash panel, there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the Safety for children Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the Have the system checked immediately by a specialised disabling of the airbag system ››› . Have the Introduction workshop. system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. For safety reasons, as we have learned from   It lights up on the dash panel accident statistics, we recommend that chil- WARNING dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear Front passenger front airbag disabled. Check whether the airbag should remain disabled In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat seats. Depending on their age, height and belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat weight, children travelling in rear seats must belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-   It lights up on the dash panel trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. sons, the child seat should be installed in the Front passenger airbag enabled. ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the in the centre back seat. onds after the ignition is switched on system checked immediately by a special- The physical laws involved and the forces ised workshop. Several warning and control lamps light up acting in a collision apply also to children ● Do not mount a child seat in the front for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ››› page 64. But unlike adults, children do passenger seat or remove the mounted ed on, signalling that the function is being not have fully developed muscle and bone child seat! The front passenger front airbag verified. They will switch off after a few sec- structures. This means that children are sub- may deploy during an accident in spite of ject to a greater risk of injury. onds. the fault. If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system To reduce the risk of injuries, children must always use special child restraint systems control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- CAUTION cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat when travelling in the vehicle. Always pay attention to any lit control belt tensioner system . Have the system ››› lamps and to the corresponding descrip- We recommend the use of child safety prod- checked immediately by a specialised work- tions and instructions to avoid damage to ucts from the Original Accessories Pro- shop. the vehicle or harm to the occupants. gramme, which includes systems for all ages If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see the warning lamp      re- www.seat.com). » mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 73 Safety

These systems have been especially de- Important information regarding the suitable for the age and size of each child signed and approved, complying with the front passenger's airbag ››› page 75. ECE-R44. regulation. WARNING CUPRA recommends securing the child Read the additional information carefully seats shown on the website as described be- ›››  page 24. ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- low: senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- Read and always observe the safety informa- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ● Child seats in the opposite direction of tion included in the following chapters: accident increases. travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support brack- ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- ● An inflating front passenger airbag can et (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). ger airbag ››› page 68. strike the rear-facing child seat and project ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group it with great force against the door, the roof ● Objects between the passenger and the 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX or the backrest. passenger side airbag in Front airbags DUO Plus). ››› ● Never install a child seat facing back- on page 70. ● Child seats directed towards the front of wards on the front passenger seat unless the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISO- The passenger side front airbag, when ena- the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to FIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1). bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex- backward since the airbag can strike the seat ● Child seats directed towards the front of ceptional cases, to transport a child in the with such force that it can cause serious or the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISO- front passenger seat, the front passenger fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old FIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1). front airbag must always be disabled should always travel on the rear seat. page 72. If the passenger seat has a Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ››› height adjustment option, move it to the observe any statutory requirements when in- Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is highest, most upright position. If you have a stalling and using child seats. Always read fixed seat, do not install any child restraint and note ››› page 74. the safest location in the vehicle. Alterna- tively, the front passenger airbag can be dis- system in this location. We recommend you always carry the manu- abled with a key-operated switch ››› page 72. ● For those vehicles that do not include a facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- When transporting children, use a child seat key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the gether with the on-board documentation. vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag

1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by the Accessories Programme for groups 2 and 3 will be ROMER KIDFIX XP© instead of Peke G3 KIDFIX. It is available from the CUPRA website. 74 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transporting children safely when an adult wants to sit in the front pas- child seat, as this could cause injuries to the WARNING senger seat. abdominal and neck areas during a sudden The retaining rings are designed only for braking manoeuvre or in an accident. ● All vehicle occupants, especially children, use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system must assume the proper sitting position ● Do not allow the seat belt to become child seats. and be properly belted in while travelling. twisted and the seat belt should be proper- ● Never secure other child seats that do ly in place page 62. ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, ››› not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys- this can result in potentially fatal injuries to ● Only one child may occupy a child seat tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- the child! ››› page 75, Child seats. tening rings - this can result in potentially ● Never allow a child to be transported in a ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear fatal injuries to the child. vehicle without being properly secured, or seats, the door child-proof lock should be ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- activated ››› page 121. rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* ling. In an accident, the child could be flung securing rings. through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other ve- WARNING hicle occupants. Child seats ● If children assume an improper sitting An undue installation of the safety seat will position when the vehicle is moving, they Safety instructions increase the risk of injury in the event of a expose themselves to greater risk of injury crash. in the event of a sudden braking manoeu- Read the additional information carefully ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in vre or in an accident. This is particularly im- ›››  page 24. the luggage compartment. portant if the child is travelling on the front ● Never secure or tie luggage or other passenger seat and the airbag system is WARNING items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or triggered in an accident; as this could cause the upper ones (Top Tether). serious injury or even death. When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- ● A suitable child seat can protect your ble for age, weight and size. child! ● Read and always observe information and Categorisation of child seats into ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat warnings concerning the use of child seats or inside the vehicle because depending on groups page 74. the season, very high temperatures may be ››› reached inside a parked vehicle, which Use only child seats that are officially ap- could be fatal. proved and suitable for the child. ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall Child seats are subject to the regulation must not wear a normal seat belt without a ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 75 Safety

Economic Commission for Europe Regula- tested for use in our vehicles. You can find you which seats have i-Size approval for this tion. the right child seat for your model and age vehicle. group at our dealers. The child seats are grouped into 5 categories: Child seats by approval category Attachment systems Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 Child seats may have the approval category months) of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific Depending on the country, different attach- (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- ment systems are used for safely installing Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard). child seats. months) ● Universal: child seats with universal appro- Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 Attachment systems overview val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no years old) ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- need to consult any list of models. In the ment system allowing quick and safe attach- case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- child seat is additionally provided with a Top years old) tachment establishes a rigid connection be- Tether belt. tween the child seat and the car body. Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7 ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, years old) in addition to the standard requirements of The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- Child seats that have been tested and ap- universal approval, requires safety devices to ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 lock the child seat, which require additional between the seat cushion and the backrest standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle proval include a list of vehicle models for FIX attachment systems are used mainly in with the test number below it). which they can be installed. Europe page 26. If necessary, ISOFIX ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval ›››  Follow the manufacturer's instructions and attachment may have to be supplemented requires a dynamic test of the child seat for observe any statutory requirements when in- with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. each vehicle model separately. Child seats stalling and using child seats. with vehicle-specific approval also include a ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- We recommend you to always include the list of vehicle models for which they can be ever possible, it is preferable to attach the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual installed. child seats with the ISOFIX system rather together with the on-board documentation. ● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must than attaching them with an automatic CUPRA recommends you use child seats meet the requirements prescribed in the three-point seat belt ›››  page 25. from the Original Accessories Catalogue. ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation Additional attachment: These child seats have been designed and and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell 76 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transporting children safely

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided WARNING over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. points are located at the back of the rear seat backrest on the boot side ● Make sure the support bracket is correct- ›››  page 29. The rings for retaining the ly and safely installed. Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. ● Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats CUPRA recommends attaching child seats as follows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or iSize. ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 77 Emergencies

Note ● In outside temperatures below -20°C Emergencies (-4°F). The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the Self-help greased using universal type grease. tyre greater than 4 mm. ● If you have been driving with very low pres- Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* sure or a completely flat tyre. ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by The tools and anti-puncture kit* are stored Tyre repair date. under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* WARNING To access the vehicle tools: Read the additional information carefully Using the tyre mobility system can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at – Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han- ›››  page 47 the roadside. Please observe the following dle until it is fastened to the tabs on both The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) rules to minimise the risk of injury: sides. will reliably seal punctures caused by the ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- Depending on the vehicle equipment, the penetration of a foreign body of up to about ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- anti-puncture kit* is located under the floor 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign rounding traffic to fill the tyre. objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. panel in the luggage compartment. ● Ensure the ground on which you park is The tool kit includes: After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, flat and solid. you must again check the tyre pressure ● All passengers and particularly children ● Jack* about 10 minutes after starting the engine. must keep a safe distance from the work area. ● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov- You should only use the tyre mobility set if er*/wheel bolt cap clip. the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn ● Box spanner for wheel bolts* familiar with the procedure and you have the other road users. ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you ● Towline anchorage necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. are familiar with the necessary procedures. ● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* Otherwise, you should seek professional ● Towing bracket device Do not use the tyre sealant in the following assistance. cases: ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- Some of the items listed are only provided in porary emergency use only until you can ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. certain model versions, or are optional ex- reach the nearest specialised workshop. tras.

78 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Self-help

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre Note 1 Valve insert remover mobility set as soon as possible. You can purchase a new bottle of tyre seal- 2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. ● The sealant is a health hazard and must ant in specialised CUPRA dealers or any 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” be cleaned immediately if it comes into SEAT dealership. 3 Filler tube with cap contact with the skin. 4 Air compressor ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of Note 5 the reach of small children. ON/OFF switch Take into account the separate instruction ● Always switch off the engine, activate the 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac- electronic parking brake and place the se- in the inflator tube). turer. lector lever in P to reduce the risk of acci- 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- dental vehicle movement. toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Contents of the tyre mobility system* WARNING 8 Tube for inflating tyres A tyre filled with sealant does not have the 9 12 volt connector same performance properties as a conven- 10 Bottle of sealant tional tyre. 11 Spare tyre valve ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert and fast cornering. can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum way. This also applies to its replacement part speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check 11 . the tyre. WARNING For the sake of the environment When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot. Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- Fig. 83 Standard display: contents of the anti- ing any legal requirements. puncture kit. ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube The anti-puncture kit is located underneath or hot air compressor on flammable mate- the floor covering in the luggage compart- rial. » ment. It includes the following components ››› Fig. 83: https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 79 Emergencies

● Allow them to cool before storing the de- ● Carefully resume your journey until you ● Never leave children or disabled people vice. reach the nearest specialised workshop alone in the car. They could be trapped in without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at the car in an emergency and will not be least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. able to get themselves to safety. too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- WARNING peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. cle can be extremely high or extremely low Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous resulting in serious injuries and illness or and can cause accidents and serious injury. even death, particularly for young children. CAUTION ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. WARNING mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid ● Seek specialist assistance. overheating! Before switching on the air Getting in the way of the doors and the rear compressor again, let it cool for several mi- lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- nutes. jury. Manual unlocking/locking ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way. Check after 10 minutes of driving Introduction CAUTION Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 83 8 again Read the additional information carefully When opening and closing in an emergen- and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .  page 16,  page 17. ››› ››› cy, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sunroof can be locked manually and partially damage to the vehicle. ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be opened, for example if the key or the central sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. locking is damaged. ● You should obtain professional assistance ››› . WARNING Opening and closing doors carelessly can 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: cause serious injury. ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the again. doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside.

80 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Self-help

Changing the windscreen wiper CAUTION Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy. blades ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. Always consider the legal provisions relating to tow-starting and towing. Changing the windscreen and rear ● If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean window wiper blades For technical reasons, towing a vehicle the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- with a discharged battery is not allowed. aged. Read the additional information carefully The jump start should be used instead ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover,  page 54. ›››  page 52. ››› paint thinner or similar products to clean If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as the windows. system, towing is only allowed with the igni- standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is ● In icy conditions, always check that the tion on! responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is noise of the water as it is wiped across the may help to leave the vehicle parked with towed with the engine switched off and the windscreen will be louder. the wipers in service position ignition connected. Depending on the bat- ›››  page 54. tery charge status, the drop in voltage may Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- be so large, even after just a few minutes, ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, CAUTION that no electrical device in the vehicle may they should be changed if they are damaged, work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehi- or cleaned if they are dirty . ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the ››› cles with the Keyless Access system, the wiper arms, only leave them in the service Damaged windscreen wiper blades should steering wheel could lock . position. ››› be replaced immediately. These are available ● from qualified workshops. Before driving, always lower the wiper WARNING arms. A vehicle with no power should never be WARNING towed. Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- ● During towing, never switch off the igni- duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- Tow-starting and towing tion with the starter button. Otherwise, the dent and serious injury. electronic lock of the steering column ● Always replace damaged or worn wind- Introduction could suddenly get blocked and it would be screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of ger clean the windscreen properly. Tow-starting means starting the engine of control of the vehicle. » the vehicle while another pulls it.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 81 Emergencies

● If during towing the vehicle runs out of ● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power, stop towing immediately and re- converter and damage it during towing. power supply or there is an electric system quest the assistance of specialist person- fault, the engine must be tow-started to nel. deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column. Indications for tow-starting WARNING Vehicle handling and braking capacity Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- change considerably during towing. Please ted. The jump start should be used instead Towing instructions observe the following instructions to mini- ›››  page 52. Tow rope or tow bar mise the risk of serious accidents and in- For technical reasons, towing the following jury: vehicles is not allowed: It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. – You should depress the brake much tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is harder as the brake servo does not op- ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- not available. erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid crashing into the towing vehicle. locking and ignition system the steering re- damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to – More strength is required at the steer- mains locked and the electronic parking use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or ing wheel as the power steering does brake cannot be deactivated nor can the similarly elastic material. not operate when the engine is switch- electronic lock of the steering column be re- ed off. leased if they are activated. Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the – Accelerate with particular care and engine control units may not operate cor- If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a caution. rectly. towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially designed – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. CAUTION to be installed with a tow hitch ››› page 299. – Brake earlier than usual and more When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could en- smoothly. When the vehicle has to be towed: ter the catalytic converter and damage it. Check whether the vehicle may be towed CAUTION Note ››› page 83, Cases where towing a vehicle ● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- is not allowed. ple the paint, remove and replace the lid The vehicle can only be tow-started if the and towing eye carefully. electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ● Switch the ignition on. ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- 82 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Self-help

● Move the selector lever to the N ● When, for example, after an accident, the Fitting the front towing eye ››› page 224 position. smooth rotation of the wheels or the steer- ● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at ing operation cannot be guaranteed. speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). When the vehicle is to tow another vehi- ● The vehicle must not be towed further cle: than 50 km (30 miles). ● Observe legal requirements. ● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to ● Keep in mind the instructions in the man- be towed with the front wheels suspended. ual on towing vehicles.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive Note (4Drive) The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- Fig. 84 Front bumper on right: remove the lid. Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be tronic parking brake and the electronic towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve- lock of the steering column are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus- there is an electric system fault, the engine pended, the engine must be switched off, must be tow-started  page 52 to de- otherwise the transmission may be dam- ››› activate the electronic parking brake and aged. the electronic lock of the steering column.

Cases where towing a vehicle is not allowed ● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- cant. ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- Fig. 85 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage screwed in. cause the steering remains locked and, if appropriate, the electronic parking brake can- The housing of the screw towing eye is on not be deactivated or the electronic lock of the right side of the front bumper behind a the steering column released. lid ››› Fig. 84. ● If a distance above 50 km needs to be travelled. The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 83 Emergencies

Bear in mind the instructions for towing CAUTION The housing of the screw towing eye is on ››› page 82. the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid The towing eye must always be completely ››› Fig. 86. Vehicles equipped as standard and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be Fitting the towline anchorage with a towing bracket do not have any hous- released while towing and tow-starting. ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle this case, the tow hitch needs to be extrac- tool kit in the luggage compartment ted or installed and used for towing ››› page 78. Fitting the rear towing eye ››› page 296, ››› . ● Remove the lid of the towing eye by inserting a finger in the grid hole and pressing out- Bear in mind the instructions for towing ward ››› Fig. 84. ››› page 82. ● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- hicle. out a factory-equipped towing bracket) ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle turning it to the maximum anticlock- tool kit in the luggage compartment wise ››› . Use a suitable object that can page 78. completely and securely tighten the towing ››› eye in its housing. ● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 86 to unclip it. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye Fig. 86 Rear bumper on right: remove the lid. clockwise with a suitable object. ● Remove the lid and let it hang from the vehicle. ● Insert the bottom flange of the lid into its housing and press the upper side of the lid ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by until it is inserted into the bumper. turning it to the maximum anticlockwise Fig. 87 . Use a suitable object that ● Replace the lid by inserting the bottom ››› ››› can completely and securely tighten the part first and pressing until it fits into the towing eye in its housing. bumper. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then clockwise with a suitable object. store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools. ● Insert the upper flange of the lid into the opening of the bumper and press the lower Fig. 87 Right side of the rear bumper: towline an- side of the lid until it is inserted into the chorage screwed in. bumper.

84 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Fuses and bulbs

● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, Fuses and bulbs store it in the luggage compartment along the hazard warning lights will go off. When with the other vehicle tools. the turn signal lever is returned to the rest position, the hazard warning lights will be au- Fuses CAUTION tomatically reactivated. ● The towing eye must always be complete- Introduction ly and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle be released while towing and tow-starting. ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering In general, a fuse can be assigned to various ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a is not blocked, and the electronic parking electrical components. Likewise, an electri- towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with brake may be deactivated and the turn sig- cal component can be protected by several a tow bar if this has been specially designed nals and wash/wipe operated. fuses. to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuit- ● More strength is required at the steering Only replace fuses when the cause of the able tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and wheel as the power steering does not oper- problem has been solved. If a newly inserted the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow ate when the engine is switched off. fuse blows after a short time, you must have rope should be used. ● You should depress the brake much harder the electrical system checked by a special- as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid ised workshop as soon as possible. hitting the towing vehicle. Driving tips for towing WARNING ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- The high voltages in the electrical system Towing requires some expertise and experi- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow- can give serious electrical shocks, causing ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both ed. burns and even death! drivers should be familiar with the difficulties involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. ienced drivers should abstain from towing. ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- ● tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. Take care not to cause short circuits in During towing, it should be ensured that no the electrical system. impermissible tractive forces or shocks are ● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. generated. When towing on an unpaved ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- WARNING road, there is always a risk of overloading and tions in the manual of the towed vehicle. damaging the anchorage points. Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can During towing, the towing vehicle can signal cause a fire and serious injury. the change of direction even with the hazard warning lights turned on. To do so, at the ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only same time, the turn signal lever must be op- replace fuses with a fuse of the same » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 85 Emergencies

amperage (same colour and markings) and Vehicle interior fuses size. ● Never repair a fuse. ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

CAUTION ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from the ignition. Fig. 88 Vehicles with the steering wheel on the ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating left: fuse box cover under the driver-side dash fuse, you could cause damage to another panel part of the electrical system. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to prevent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Note Fig. 89 Vehicles with the steering wheel on the right: access the fuse box behind the glove com- ● One component may have more than one partment. fuse. ● Several components may run on a single Opening and closing the fuse box situated fuse. below the dash panel (left-hand steering wheel) ● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 88. ● Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.

86 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Fuses and bulbs

Fuses behind the glove compartment Engine compartment fuses Fuses in the vehicle interior (right-hand steering wheel) No. Consumers/Amps To be able to access the fuse box: 5 Gateway 5 ● Undo the opening limiter ››› Fig. 89 A in two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling 6 Automatic gearbox lever 5 back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently Air conditioning and heating to the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guide 7 control panel, back window 10 when the cover is in the normal opening po- heating, auxiliary heating. sition (30°). Diagnosis, handbrake switch, ● Free the side pivots B to release the cover light switch, reverse light, interior 8 10 to its second opening position (60°). lighting, driving mode, lit-up Fig. 90 In the engine compartment: lid of the fuse door sill Follow the same procedure in reverse order box. 9 Steering column 5 to return the glove compartment to its nor- To open the engine compartment fuse box mal position. 10 Radio display 7.5 ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 310. 11 Left lights 40 CAUTION ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse ● Always carefully remove the fuse box box cover ››› Fig. 90. 12 Radio 20 covers and refit them correctly to avoid ● Then lift the cover out. 14 Air conditioner fan 40 problems with your vehicle. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to 15 Steering column release 10 Push the locking tabs down until they click avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and audibly into place. 16 Connectivity Box 7.5 humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical system. 17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

Fuse placement 18 Rear camera 7.5 19 Kessy 7.5 Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 45 20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15 Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 amperage (same colour and markings) and 22 Trailer 15 » size.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 87 Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps

23 Electric sunroof 30 47 Rear window wiper 15 15 Horn 15

24 Right lights 40 49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5 16 Petrol pump 5/15/20

25 Left door 30 50 Electric rear lid 40 17 Engine control unit 7.5

26 Heated seats 30 52 Driving mode. 15 18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5

27 Interior light 30 53 Heated rear window 30 19 Front windscreen washer 30

28 Trailer 25 Fuse arrangement in engine compartment 20 Alarm horn 10 Control unit for parking aid, front 22 Engine control unit 5 32 7.5/10 No. Consumers/Amps camera and radar 23 Starter motor 30 1 ESP control unit 25 33 Airbag 5 24 PTC 40 2 ESP control unit 40 Reverse switch, climate sensor, 31 Pressure pump 15 34 electrochromic mirror, rear pow- 7.5 3 Engine control unit 30/15 er sockets (USB) 33 Gearbox pump 30 4 Engine sensors 5/10 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, 35 10 37 Parking heating 20 headlight adjuster 5 Engine sensors 7.5

36 Right LED headlight 7.5 6 Brake light sensor 5 Note 37 Left LED headlight 7.5 7 Engine power supply 10 ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These 38 Trailer 25 8 Lambda probe 10/15 should only be changed by a specialised 39 Right door 30 9 Engine 5/10/20 workshop. ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- 40 12V socket 20 10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20 pear in the following tables. 42 Central locking 40 11 PTC 40 ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions 43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30 12 PTC 40 of the model or are optional extras. 44 Trailer 15 13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

45 Electric driver's seat 15 14 Heated windscreen 40 88 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Fuses and bulbs

● Please note that the above lists, while CAUTION Rear bulbs (in the side panel) correct at the time of printing, are subject ● Remove the ignition key before working to change. on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur. ● Switch off the lights and the parking light Changing a bulb before changing a bulb. ● Take good care to avoid damaging any Topic introduction components.

Read the additional information carefully For the sake of the environment  page 46. ››› Please ask your specialist retailer how to Fig. 91 Boot: access to the bolt securing the tail Full-LED headlights dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner. light unit. Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam Note and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source. ● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on Full-LED headlights are designed to last the your vehicle is functioning properly. This is lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be not only in the interest of your own safety, replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to but also that of all other road users. an authorised workshop to have it replaced. ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb. Rear incandescent light bulbs ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb Type with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper Fig. 92 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light. towel instead, since the fingerprints left on Turn signal PY21W LL the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat Follow the steps indicated: generated by the bulb, they will be depos- Reverse lights W16W ited on the reflector and will impair its sur- 1. Check which of the bulbs is defective. The remaining functions work with LEDs face. 2. Open the rear lid. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 89 Emergencies

3. Remove the lid, levering it with the flat Rear lights (in the rear lid) 2. Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb side of a screwdriver into the recess holder ››› Fig. 94 1 or turn the bulb ››› Fig. 91 1 . holder to the left 2 and 3 . 4. Remove the bulb connector. 3. Remove the bulb holder from its loca- 5. Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand tion. or using a screwdriver ››› Fig. 91 2 . 4. Lightly press the defective bulb into the 6. Remove the light from the body, gently bulb holder, then turn it to the left and pulling it toward you, and place on a remove it. clean, smooth surface. 5. Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb 7. Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go. the securing tabs ››› Fig. 92 1 . 8. Change the damaged bulb. Fig. 93 Rear lid open: remove the lid. 6. Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb. 9. To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb 7. Check that the new bulb works proper- holder. The securing tabs must click in- ly. to place. 8. Carry out the same actions in reverse order for assembly and pay special at- CAUTION tention to placing the bulb holder, en- Take care when removing the rear light unit suring that the tabs are properly se- to make sure there is no damage to the cured. paintwork or any of its components. Note For LED pilots, you can only change the re- Note Fig. 94 Remove the bulb holder. verse bulb. ● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, The rear lid must be open to change the to avoid any scratches. bulbs. ● In the case of LED lights, change only the Follow the steps indicated: turn signal bulb. 1. Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated ››› Fig. 93.

90 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Fuses and bulbs

Changing number plate light bulbs 3. Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 96 in Side turn signals the direction of arrow 1 and pull on the connector. 4. Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of arrow 2 and extract it with the bulb. 5. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb with the same features. 6. Insert the bulb holder in the number plate light and turn in the opposite direction of arrow 2 until it stops. 7. Plug the connector into the bulb holder. Fig. 95 In the rear bumper: number plate light. Fig. 97 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mir- Note ror Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- have an estimated life that exceeds than grated in the exterior mirrors. that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go In case of failure, go to an authorised work- to an authorised workshop for replace- shop to have them replaced. ment.

Fig. 96 Number plate light: detach the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

1. Press the number plate light in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 95. 2. Remove the number plate light.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 91 Operation

Fig. 98 Instruments and controls.

92 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Controls and displays Operation 9 Control lever for: – Storage compartment ...... 147 – Windscreen wipers and wash- 18 DSG automatic gearbox lever ...... 224

er ...... 139 19 Rotating control(Driving Controls and displays – Wipe and wash system ...... 139 Experience button) for – On-board computer ...... 99 driving modes ...... 271 General instrument panel 20 10 Easy Connect system (navigation, Auto Hold switch ...... 241 radio, TV/video) ...... 164 21 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 217 1 Door release lever 11 Depending on the equipment, but- 22 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- 2 Central locking switch ...... 115 tons for: cess closing and start-up sys- 3 Control for the electric adjustment – Start-Stop system ...... 238 tem) ...... 214 of the exterior mirrors ...... 142 – Park assist system ...... 281 23 Driver's seat heating control ...... 145 4 Air vents ...... 161 – Hazard warning lights ...... 136 24 Steering column adjustment lev- 5 Control lever for: er ...... 21 – Tyre pressure switch ...... 327 – Turn signals and main beam 25 Knee airbag ...... 23 headlights ...... 133 – Airbag off display ...... 72 26 Bonnet lock release ...... 311 – Lane Assist ...... 260 12 Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: ...... 148 27 Headlight switch ...... 132 – Main beam assist ...... 134 – CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 186 28 Electric windows ...... 126 – Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 242 13 Front passenger airbag ...... 21 6 Depending on equipment fitted: Note 14 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . 72 – Lever for cruise control ...... 242 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- 15 Front passenger seat heating con- 7 Steering wheel with horn and tion is only fitted on certain models or are trol ...... 145 optional extras. – Driver airbag ...... 21 16 Automatic air conditioning con- ● The arrangement of switches and con- – On-board computer controls . . . . 108 trols ...... 39 trols on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in – Controls for radio, telephone, 17 Depending on the equipment: navigation and speech dialogue ››› page 92. However, the symbols used to – USB/AUX-IN input...... 212 system ...... 164 identify the controls are the same. – Lighter/power socket ...... 149 – Paddle levers for tiptronic gearshift (automatic gearbox) ...... 227 – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger* ...... 212 8 Instrument panel ...... 94 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 93 Operation

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Dashboard

Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort settings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. ● Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving. ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the In- fotainment system when the vehicle is stationary.

94 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital instrument panel (Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 99 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument you can choose between the different dis- 1 Engine coolant temperature display panel with a high-resolution TFT colour play options of the information that appears ››› page 106 screen. It has a 3 or 4 views, depending on in the Digital Cockpit. the version, accessible using the button  2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- of the multifunction steering wheel. By se- Classic View nute with the engine running lecting different information profiles, indica- page 105. The revolutions per minute and speedome- ››› tions other than the classic circular instru- ter needles appear along the entire length 3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- ments can be displayed, such as navigation ››› Fig. 99. tor lever currently selected data, multimedia information or travel data. 4 Screen display ››› page 96 View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1) Information profiles 5 Speedometer Personalisation of the information that ap- With the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Info- 6 Digital speed display pears in the Digital Cockpit. Only 2 of these tainment button  > Vehicle function items of information can be displayed at the » 7 Fuel gauge ››› page 105. button > View > Instrument cluster)

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Driving mode” selected. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 95 Operation

same time, but the user chooses which to It may vary based on the features, the num- Transfer of navigation map display, and in what order, by moving the fin- ber and the contents of the selectable infor- Using the map transfer key ››› Fig. 100, the ger vertically over the dials. mation profiles.. map is transferred from the Infotainment Depending on the version, the Views can be system to the Digital Cockpit and vice versa. memorised by exiting the menu or keeping Navigation system in the Digital Using the right thumbwheel of the multi- the View button pressed. function steering wheel, in the Navigation Cockpit* ● Consumption. Graphic representation of menu, you can transfer the map back to the the current consumption and digital display Infotainment System. of the average consumption. ● Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Display indications

● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- Possible indications on the instrument tude above sea level. panel display ● Compass. Digital display of the compass. Different pieces of information can be dis- ● Information about the final destination. played on the screen of the instrument pan- Digital display of the remaining travelling el, depending on the features of the vehicle. time, distance to the destination and the es- Fig. 100 Infotainment system: map transfer but- ● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open timated time of arrival. ton ● Warning and information messages ● Operating range. Digital display of the remaining range. Depending on the features, the Digital ● Odometer Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do ● Travel time. ● Time ››› page 104 this, select the Navigation option in the ● Route guidance. ● Indications of the radio and navigation sys- menu menu on the instrument panel tem ● Journey. Digital display of the distance ››› page 98. travelled. ● Indications of the phone Depending on the features, the navigation ● Outside temperature ● Assistance systems. Graphic representa- map can be displayed in the Digital Cockpit tion of different assistance systems. or on the Infotainment system or on both at ● Indications of the compass ● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- the same time. If it is displayed only in the In- ● Selector lever positions fotainment system, the Digital Cockpit will ted. ● Gear recommendation (Triptonic mode) only display the arrows for manoeuvres. ● Navigation. Graphical representation of ››› page 227 the navigation with arrows. 96 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- case is shown on the instrument panel dis- ● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- play) and menus for different settings play . ment system or the multifunction steering ››› page 98 wheel ››› page 99. ● Service interval display ››› page 106 Outside temperature display Speed warning for winter tyres ● Speed warning ››› page 99 If the outside temperature is lower than approximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is ● Speed warning for winter tyres symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- displayed on the instrument panel ● Start-Stop system status display play also lights up. This symbol remains lit ››› page 98. ››› page 238 until the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C The speed warning can be adjusted on the ● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- (+43 °F) . ››› Infotainment system: using button  > tion system page 102 ››› When the vehicle is stationary, when the SETTINGS > Driver Assistance ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) auxiliary heater is switched on or when driv- ›››  page 33 button. ● Driver assistance system display ing at very low speeds, the outside tempera- ››› page 238 ture indicated may be higher than the actual Compass indication temperature due to the heat produced by Depending on the equipment, when the ig- the engine. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open nition is on, the instrument panel display in- When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- The margin of measurement ranges from dicates the direction in which you are driving ing, the instrument panel display shows if any -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F). with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are When the Infotainment system is on and opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- Driving recommendation there is no route guidance active, the graph- ted by an audible warning. The display may While driving, the instrument panel of cer- ic representation of a compass is also shown. vary according to the type of instrument tain vehicles may indicate a gear recommen- panel fitted. dation for saving fuel ››› page 227. Identifying letters on engine (LDM) ● Select the information profile Range in the Selector lever positions (dual-clutch Odometer DSG®) instrument cluster (Infotainment button The odometer registers the total distance  / > View > Driving data > Range The current position of the selector lever is travelled by the car. function button). shown on the side of the lever and on the in- ● Press and hold the button  on the multi- strument panel display. When the lever is in The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- function steering wheel until the menu Serv- the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, tance travelled since the last time it was reset ice is displayed on the instrument panel dis- in some cases, the gear engaged in each to zero. play ››› page 98. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 97 Operation

● Select the menu option Engine code. ● If when switching on the ignition warn- Service Menu ings are shown about existing faults, it WARNING might not be possible to change the set- In the Service menu various settings can be Even when the outside temperature is tings or show the information as described. adjusted depending on the features. higher than freezing temperature, some In this case, go to a specialised workshop roads and bridges could be frozen. and request a repair. Open the Service menu ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that To open the Service menu, select the infor- there may be a risk of freezing. mation profile Range (Infotainment button ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C Instrument panel menus  > View > Driving data > Range (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the button) and press and hold the  button on “ice crystal symbol” is not on. The number of menus and information items the multifunction steering wheel for around available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- ● The outside temperature sensor takes a 4 seconds. You can browse the menu with tronics and features. guideline measurement. the buttons on the multifunction steering A specialised workshop can programme or wheel in the usual manner. Note modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. To do so, CUPRA Restart the service interval display ● There are different instrument panels recommends going to a specialised CUPRA Select the Service menu and follow the in- and therefore the versions and instructions dealer or any SEAT dealership. structions on the screen of the instrument on the display may vary. In the case of dis- panel. plays without warning or information texts, Some menu options can only be read when faults are indicated exclusively by the con- the vehicle is stationary. trol warning lamps. Restart the oil service ■ Driving data ››› page 99 ● Some indications on the instrument pan- Select the Restore Oil service menu and ■ Assistance systems. el screen may be concealed by a sudden follow the instructions on the instrument event, e.g. an incoming call. ■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 260 panel display. ● Depending on the equipment, some set- ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 247 tings and instructions can be carried out or ■ Blind spot detector On/Off ››› page 265 Restart journey data displayed on the infotainment system as ■ ACC (only display) ››› page 251 Select the Reset trip menu and follow the well. ■ Navigation. instructions on the instrument panel display ● If there are several warnings at the same ■ Audio. to reset the value. time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ■ ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- Telephone. bols will stay on until you remove the cause. ■ Vehicle status ››› page 100

98 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) values collected. When refuelling, the Travelling time This indicates the hours Select the menu Engine code. The identify- memory is deleted. (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition ing letters of the engine will be shown on the Long-term This memory contains travel da- was switched on. instrument panel display. ta up to a maximum of 19 hours and Operating range Approximate distance in 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, km that can still be travelled if the same Setting the clock or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or driving style is maintained. 9999.9 km. When one of these values is Select the Time menu and set the correct Distance travelled Distance covered in exceeded (varies depending on the ver- time by turning the right thumbwheel of the km (m) after switching on the ignition. sion of the instrument panel), the mem- multifunction steering wheel. Average speed The average speed will be ory is deleted. shown after driving for approximately 100 metres. Delete journey data presets Journey data display (multifunction Digital speed Current speed displayed in ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. display) digital format. ● Keep the  button on the multi-function Convenience consumers Displays a list of steering wheel pressed for approximately 2 The display of the travel data (multifunction the connected comfort systems that in- seconds. display) shows different values about the crease energy consumption, e.g. air journey and the consumption. conditioning. Select the instructions Change from one display to another In the Infotainment system, in the menu Ve- Set a speed warning hicle settings, you can display different travel ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multi- ● Select the display Speed warning at data  page 33. function steering wheel ››› page 108. ››› --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. Current fuel consumption The current ● Press the  button on the multi-function Changing memory fuel consumption display operates steering wheel to memorise the current Press the  button on the multi-function throughout the journey, in litres/100 speed and activate the warning. steering wheel. km; and with the engine running and ● Activate: set the desired speed within 5 the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. Since start The memory is deleted if the seconds by rotating the wheel on the multi- journey is interrupted for more than 2 Average fuel consumption The average function steering wheel. Next, press the  hours. fuel consumption is displayed after driv- button again or wait several seconds. The ing for approximately 300 metres. speed is stored and the warning activated. Since refuelling Display and storage of the journey data and the consumption ● Deactivate: press the  button. The stored speed is deleted. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 99 Operation

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- Priority 1 warning (red). The symbol lights Fatigue detection (break recommen- tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h up or flashes (in part accompanied by dation)* (155 mph). audible warnings).  Stop driving! Dan- ger! Check the fault and eliminate the Display Oil temperature cause. If necessary, seek professional assistance. The engine reaches its operating temperature when, under normal driving conditions, Priority 2 warning (yellow). The symbol the oil temperature is between 80°C and lights up or flashes (in part accompa- 120ºC. If the engine is under a lot of stress nied by audible warnings). Operating and the outside temperature is high, the en- faults or the lack of operating fluids can gine oil temperature can increase. This does cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. not present any problem as long as the warn- Check the faulty function as soon as ing lamps  or  ››› page 314 do not ap- possible. If necessary, seek professional pear on the display. assistance. Fig. 101 On the screen of the instrument panel: Information message. It provides informa- fatigue detection. tion about processes in the vehicle. Warning and information messages The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of (Vehicle status) Note fatigue. ● Depending on the equipment, some set- The system runs a check on certain compo- tings and instructions can be carried out or Function and operation nents and functions when the ignition is displayed on the infotainment system as switched on and while the vehicle is moving. well. Fatigue detection determines the driving be- Faults displayed on the instrument panel as ● If there are several warnings at the same haviour of the driver when starting a journey, red and yellow warning symbols accompa- time, the symbols will be displayed one af- making a calculation of tiredness. This is nied with messages and ›››  page 36, de- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- constantly compared with the current driv- pending on the case, even an audible warn- bols will stay on until you remove the cause. ing behaviour. If the system detects that the ing. The representation of the messages and ● If when switching on the ignition warn- driver is tired, an audible warning is given symbols may vary depending on the version ings are shown about existing faults, it with a sound and an optic warning is shown of the instrument panel. might not be possible to change the set- with a symbol and complementary message tings or show the information as described. on the instrument panel display Fig. 101. Existing faults can also be checked manually. ››› In this case, go to a specialised workshop The message on the instrument panel dis- To do so, open the menu Vehicle status and request a repair. play is shown for approximately 5 seconds, or Vehicle ››› page 98.

100 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps and depending on the case, is repeated. The ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) ● The system does not detect the tiredness system stores the last message displayed. ● When cornering of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 101, The message on the instrument panel dis- ● On roads in poor condition ››› play can be switched off by pressing the  System limitations. ● In unfavourable weather conditions button on the multi-function steering wheel ● In some situations, the system may incor- ››› page 108. ● When a sporty driving style is employed rectly interpret an intended driving ma- ● In the event of a serious distraction to the noeuvre as driver tiredness. The message can be recalled to the instru- driver ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- ment panel display using the multifunction fect called microsleep! display ››› page 99. Fatigue detection will be restored when the ● Please observe the indications on the in- vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, strument panel and act as is necessary. Conditions of operation when the ignition is switched off or when the Driving behaviour is only calculated on driver has unbuckled their seat belt and speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to opened the door. Note around 200 km/h (125 mph). In the event of slow driving during a long pe- ● Fatigue detection has been developed for riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the driving on motorways and well paved roads only. Switching on and off system automatically re-establishes the Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- tiredness calculation. When driving at a fast- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it vated in the Easy Connect system with the er speed the driving behaviour will be recal- checked by a specialised workshop.  / button and the SETTINGS function but- culated. ton ›››  page 33. A mark indicates that the adjustment has been activated. WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- System limitations gue detection system tempt you into taking The Fatigue detection has certain limitations any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, inherent to the system. The following condi- sufficient in length when making long journeys. tions can limit the Fatigue detection or prevent it from functioning. ● The driver always assumes the responsibility of driving to their full capacity. ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) ● Never drive if you are tired.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 101 Operation

1) Traffic sign detection system* Within its limitations, the system also displays Message Cause and solution additional signals, such as time-specific prohibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers Error: Detection There is a fault in the system. ››› page 296 or limitations that only apply in of traffic signs Have the system checked by a the event of rain. Even on journeys without specialised workshop. signs, the system may display any applicable Speed warning The speed warning function of speed limits. currently un- the traffic sign detection system available. is faulty. The traffic sign detection system does not Have the system checked by a work in all countries. Keep this in mind when specialised workshop. travelling abroad. Detection of The windscreen is dirty in the traffic signs: camera area. Indication on the display Clean the wind- Clean the windscreen. In Germany, on motorways and vehicle screen! roads, besides speed limits and overtaking Detection of No data transfer by the naviga- provisions the system also displays the end of traffic signs: tion system. prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the Limited at the Check whether the navigation time in other countries is always shown. moment system has current maps. OR: the vehicle is currently in a The traffic signs detected by the system are region that is not included in displayed on the dash panel display the navigation system's map. Fig. 102 and, depending on the navigation ››› No data availa- The traffic sign detection sys- system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- ble tem does not work in the cur- Fig. 102 On the instrument panel display: exam- ment system as well ›››  page 33. rent country. ples of speed limits or overtaking prohibitions with their respective additional signs. Traffic sign detection system messages Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis- Message Cause and solution The traffic sign detection system records the play on the instrument panel standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle There are no The system is starting up. The permanent display of traffic signs on the with a camera located on the base of the in- traffic signs OR: the camera has not recog- instrument panel can be activated or deacti- terior mirror and provides information about available nised any obligation or prohibi- vated in the infotainment system using the speed limits and overtaking prohibitions. tion signs.

1) System available depending on the country. 102 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

 > SETTINGS > Driver Assistance Speed warning the country in question for driving with a function buttons. If the system detects that the permitted trailer, the system automatically displays the speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h Display of traffic signs with a “gong” and visually with a message on (50 mph). When the traffic sign detection system is the dash panel display. If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- connected, a camera located on the base of The speed warning can be adjusted or deac- vated, the system displays the speed limits as the interior rear-view mirror records the traf- tivated completely in the infotainment sys- if there were no trailer hitched. fic signs in front of the vehicle. After check- tem using the  > SETTINGS > Driver ing and evaluating the information from the Assistance function buttons Limited operation camera, the navigation system and the cur- ›››  page 33. The speed is adjusted in The traffic sign detection system has certain rent vehicle data, up to three valid traffic steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be- limitations. The following cases may lead the signs are displayed Fig. 102 B in conjunc- ››› tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) system to operate with limitations or not at tion with their corresponding additional above the maximum speed permitted. all: signs. ● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, First: The sign that is currently valid for the Trailer mode rain, fog or intense mist. driver is shown in the left side of the In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket ● screen For example, a maximum speed device from the factory and a trailer that is In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) electrically connected to the vehicle, it is on traffic or by the sun. ››› Fig. 102 A. possible to activate or deactivate the display ● When driving at high speeds. Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trail- ● If the camera is covered or dirty. er, such as speed limits or overtaking prohib- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown ● If the traffic signs are out of the camera's itions. Activation or deactivation is per- second, together with the additional field of vision. rain sign. formed on the infotainment system using the  > SETTINGS > Driver Assistance ● If the traffic signs are partially or totally Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is function buttons ›››  page 33. covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve- working while you are driving, the signal hicles. with the additional rain sign will be For trailer mode, the display of speed limits shown first, on the left, as it is the one applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil that is applicable at the time. provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- the regulations. Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic No overtaking at certain times, will be range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and signs. » displayed third ››› Fig. 102 C. 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 103 Operation

● In the case of variable messages on over- tion system may differ from the actual cur- ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable rent traffic situation. tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs or other lighting units). ● The system may not detect or correctly traffic signs incorrectly. ● If the maps on the navigation system are show all the traffic signs. ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation not up-to-date. ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have system, the traffic sign detection system is ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles priority over the recommendations and dis- only partly available. that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on plays provided by the system. ● Failure to heed the control lamps and lorries. corresponding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehi- WARNING WARNING cle. If messages are ignored, the vehicle may The technology in the traffic sign detection stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- system cannot change the limits imposed vere injuries. by the laws of physics and only works within Time ● Never ignore the messages displayed. the system's limits. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the traffic sign ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity Setting the time on the infotainment sys- detection system tempt you into taking any and in a safe place. tem risks when driving. The system is not a re- ● Press the infotainment  button. placement for driver awareness. Note ● Press the SETTINGS function button. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit In order not to compromise the system's visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- ● Select the menu option Date and time to operation, please take the following points tions. set the time  page 33. into account: ››› ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the Adjusting the time in the Digital Cockpit fog may lead to the system failing to display camera and keep it in a clean state, without traffic signs or not displaying them correct- ● While on the Driving data menu select snow or ice. ly. Range (Infotainment button  > View > ● Do not cover the field of vision of the ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- Driving data > Range). camera. ered or damaged, system operation may be ● Press the button  on the multifunction impaired. ● Always replace damaged or worn blades steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- when required to avoid lines on the cam- played on the instrument panel display era's field of vision. WARNING ››› page 98. ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- ● Select the menu Time. The driving recommendations and traffic aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- indications shown on the traffic sign detec- sion.

104 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

● Adjust the correct time by turning the right ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs The display only works when the ignition is thumbwheel of the multifunction steering and heavy acceleration and do not make switched on. wheel. the engine work hard. The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel. For the sake of the environment Revolution counter You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- Changing up a gear early will help you to hicle in the ›››  page 41 section. The rev counter indicates the number of en- save fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise. gine revolutions per minute. WARNING Together with the gear-change indicator, When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- the rev counter offers you the possibility of Fuel level indicator vere injuries. using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed. ● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly The beginning of the red zone of the rev when driving up or down slopes. counter indicates the maximum speed in any ● The steering system and the driver assis- gear after running-in and with the engine tance systems and brakes do not work hot. However, it is advisable to move the se- when the engine is running irregularly or lector lever to D or lift your foot off the ac- switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu- celerator before the needle reaches the red lar supply thereof. zone . ››› ● Always refuel when there is only one We recommend that you avoid high revs and quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehi- that you follow the recommendations on the cle to stop due to lack of fuel. gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- Fig. 103 Fuel gauge. al information in ››› page 227, Gear recom- CAUTION mendation. Control lamps Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An It lights up, and in addition, the low- irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring CAUTION  er diode lights up in red and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev system. The catalytic converter or the par- counter needle should only remain in the Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has ticulate filter may get damaged! » been reached . Refuel as soon as possible. red zone for a short period of time. ››› When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flashes in red.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 105 Operation

Note cause for concern, provided the control mately the first 15 minutes when the engine lamp does not light up  is cold. The phase until the engine is warm The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to also depends on the outside temperature. the fuel pump symbol points out towards C Warning area. When the engine is work- If necessary, use the engine oil tempera- the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank ing hard, especially at high outside tem- ture* page 100 as a guide. flap. peratures, the diodes may light up in the ››› warning area. ● Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- The coolant temperature gauge only works fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- Engine coolant temperature display when the ignition is switched on. atures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. Control and warning lamp ● The front spoiler also ensures proper distribution of the cooling air when the vehi- It lights up red  cle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this  Do not keep driving! can reduce the cooling effect, which could Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too cause the engine to overheat. Seek special- high ist assistance.

 Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system. Service intervals Fig. 104 Engine coolant temperature indicator. ● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and The service interval indication appears on let it cool down. the instrument panel display and the Info- ››› Fig. 104: tainment system. ● A Cool zone. The engine has not reached Check the engine coolant level There are different versions of instrument operating temperature yet. Avoid high ››› page 316. panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- engine speeds and stressing the engine if ● If the warning lamp does not switch off sions and instructions on the screens may it has not reached operating tempera- even if the coolant level is correct, request vary. ture. assistance from specialised personnel. B Normal zone. At high outside tempera- CUPRA distinguishes between services with tures and when making the engine work CAUTION engine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. hard, the diodes may continue lighting ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, up and reach the upper zone. This is no avoid high revs, driving at high speed and Inspection). making the engine work hard for approxi-

106 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

In vehicles with Services established by Service due Resetting service interval display time or mileage, the service intervals are al- When the time for a service or an inspec- If the service was not carried out by a speci- ready pre-defined. tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- alised CUPRA dealer or SEAT dealership, the In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- ted when the ignition is switched on and the display can be reset as follows: vals are determined individually. Thanks to fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- ● The service interval display can only be re- technological progress, maintenance work strument panel for a few seconds, along with set through the Service menu page 98. has been greatly reduced. Because of the one of the following messages: ››› technology used by CUPRA, with this service ● Service now! Do not restart the indicator between the you only need to change the oil when the ve- service intervals, otherwise the information ● Request an inspection. hicle so requires. To calculate this variation displayed will be incorrect. (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use ● Oil service required! and individual driving styles are considered. If the oil change service is reset manually, ● Oil service and inspection re- The advance warning first appears 20 days the service interval display changes to a fixed quired! before the date established for the corre- service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- oil change service. Check a service warning maining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) With the ignition switched on, the engine off Note and the time is given in complete days. The and the vehicle at a standstill, the current ● The service message disappears after a current service message cannot be viewed service notification can be read: few seconds, when the engine is started or until 500 km after the last service. Prior to when the OK button is pressed on the mul- this, only lines are visible on the display. Check the date of the current service on the ti-function steering wheel. infotainment system ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in Inspection reminder ● Press the infotainment  button. which the battery has been disconnected If a service or an inspection has to be carried ● Press the SETTINGS function button for a long period of time, it is not possible to out soon, a service reminder will be dis- ›››  page 33. calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may played when the ignition is switched on. ● Select the Service menu option to display not be correct. In this case, bear in mind information about the services. The figure displayed are the kilometres that the maximum service intervals permitted can still be travelled or the time until the next page 331. Checking the date on the digital instrument ››› service. panel ● If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- ● The date of the service can only be read cles with fixed service intervals. For this » through the Service menu ››› page 98.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 107 Operation

reason we recommend that the service in- Using the multifunction steering wait a few seconds until the menu or the interval display be reset by an authorised wheel formative display opens automatically. dealer. Changing menu settings ● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Using the instrument panel wheel ››› Fig. 105 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears Introduction framed. ● Press the button  Fig. 105 to make With the ignition switched on, it is possible to ››› the required modifications. A mark indicates read the different functions of the display by that the system or function is activated. scrolling through the menus.

The multifunction display can only be con- Fig. 105 Right side of multifunction steering Back to menu selection trolled from the buttons on the multi-func- wheel: buttons to the menus and informative indi- Press the button  or  ››› Fig. 105. tion steering wheel. cations on the instrument panel. Some menu options can only be read when As long as a priority 1 ››› page 100 warning is Note the vehicle is at a standstill. active, it will not be possible to access any If when switching on the ignition warnings menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and are shown about existing faults, it might not WARNING hidden with the button  of the multifunc- be possible to change the settings or show Distracting the driver in any way can lead to tion steering wheel ››› Fig. 105. the information as described. In this case, an accident and cause injuries. go to a specialised workshop and request a repair. ● Never use the menus on the instrument Select a menu or an informative display panel display while the vehicle is in motion. ● Switch the ignition on. ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, Note press the button  ››› Fig. 105; if necessary, After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- several times. tery, check the system settings. If the pow- ● To change menus, use buttons   er supply is interrupted, the system settings or   ››› Fig. 105. might be incorrect or deleted. ● To open the menu or the information displayed, press the button  ››› Fig. 105 or

108 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

Key for the driving assistance sys- The driver assistance systems can also be WARNING tems* switched on and off in the infotainment system, in the menu Vehicle settings If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or  page 33. ››› may cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. Control lamps ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Control and warning lamps ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no highly flammable Read the additional information carefully materials under the vehicle that could ›››  page 36. come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel). Fig. 106 On the turn light and main beam lever: The control and warning lamps are indicators ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- key for driver assistance systems. of warnings, , faults or certain ››› ››› dent for the driver and for other road users. functions. Some control and warning lamps With the turn signal and main beam head- If necessary, switch on the hazard warning come on when the ignition is switched on, lamps and put out the warning triangle to light lever button, you can activate or deacti- and switch off when the engine starts run- advise other drivers. vate the driver assistance systems displayed ning, or while driving. in the Assistance systems menu . ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off Depending on the model, additional text the engine and allow it to cool. messages may be viewed on the instrument Activate or deactivate a driver assistance ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment panel display. These may be purely informa- system is a hazardous area and could cause severe tive or they may be advising of the need for injuries ››› page 310. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 106 in the action ››› page 94, Dashboard. direction of the arrow to open the menu As- sistance systems. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the CAUTION vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- Failure to heed the control lamps and text times a symbol may be displayed on the in- tivate or deactivate it page 108. A mark messages when they appear may result in ››› strument panel. indicates that driver assistance system is faults in the vehicle. switched on. When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard. ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing the  button on the multi-function steering wheel. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 109 Operation

Multifunction steering wheel

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 107 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction the audio, telephone and radio/navigation module from where it is possible to control functions without needing to distract the driver.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn announcement volume Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You up/down. You do not need to be in A do not need to be in audio do not need to be in audio do not need to be in audio do not need to be in tele- navigation mode but there has to Turn mode (radio). mode (media). mode (media). phone mode. be an announcement active when you adjust the volume.

A Mute the current navigation an- Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press nouncement.

Enable/disable voice controlb). B a) This function can be used from any mode, except with an active call.

Short press: Switch to the – No active call: Radio/Media No function for the other modes Search for the previous/next previous/next song. C / D No function functions (except AUX) (navigation, assistants, vehicle sta- stationc). Hold down: Fast rewind/for- – Active call: no function tus, travel data). wardd). 110 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

Short pressb): change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular clocks / Sport. G Long pressb): access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

– Navi System Plus: Zoom in/out (with and without active route). – There is no active call: Re- – Navi System: If there is a map on cent calls list. the Digital Scorecard: Zoom in-out H List of sources available (au- List of sources available (au- – Active call: go to the call (with and without active route). If No function Turn dio/media). dio/media). options list (call in standby, there is no map on the Digital hang up, mute microphone, Scorecard: the map is transferred private number, etc.). from the Infotainment System display to the Digital Scorecard (with and without active route).

H Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the No function No function No function No function Press map on the DigitScorecard. a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 111 Operation

Opening and closing The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- the alarm from being triggered accidentally tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle ››› page 123. can also be unlocked via the central locking Central locking switch or by pulling one of the inside door Turn signals handles. The Auto Lock function can be The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- switched on and off on the sound system or Description hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle on the Easy Connect* system page 114. ››› is locked. Read the additional information carefully In the event of an accident in which the air- If it does not flash, this indicates that one of ›››  page 15 bags inflate, the doors will be automatically the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. The vehicle can be locked and unlocked via closed correctly. the central locking system. There are several Anti-theft alarm system* methods, depending on the vehicle equip- Accidental lock-out ment: If the anti-theft alarm system senses inter- The central locking system prevents you ference with the vehicle it triggers an audible ● key with remote control page 114, from being locked out of the vehicle in the ››› and visible alarm. ● lock on driver door (emergency opening following situations: ›››  page 15) or The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the vehicle. It ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- ● interior central locking switch page 115. ››› switches off when the vehicle is unlocked not be locked with the central locking switch from a distance. ››› page 115. Unlocking one side of the vehicle only When the driver door is unlocked with the Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, When you lock the vehicle with the key, the key, you should switch on the ignition within when all the doors and the rear lid have been doors and the rear lid are locked. When you 15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig- closed. This prevents the accidental locking open the door, you can either unlock only gered. On some export versions, the alarm is of the vehicle. the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To triggered immediately when you open a select the required option, use Easy Con- door. WARNING nect* ››› page 114. To deactivate the alarm, press the  button Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside Auto Lock* on the remote control key, or switch on the ignition. After a certain time, the alarm will and the anti-theft security system* is ena- The Auto Lock function locks the doors and automatically switch off. bled, as the doors and windows cannot the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a then be opened from the inside. Locked speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph). Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and doors could delay assistance in an emer- tow-away protection if you wish to prevent gency, potentially putting lives at risk.

112 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Note Vehicle key To fold the shaft away, press button 1 and fold the key shaft in until it locks in place. ● Never leave any valuable items in the ve- With the vehicle key the vehicle may be hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 112. Spare key not a safe. The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, ● If the diode on the driver door sill lights tery. The receiver is in the interior of the ve- the vehicle chassis number is required. up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is hicle. The range of the vehicle key with relocked, the central locking system or anti- mote control and new battery is several me- Each new key contains a microchip which theft alarm* is not working properly. You tres around the vehicle. must be coded with the data from the vehi- should have the fault repaired at a special- cle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service or If it is not possible to open or close the vehi- not work if it does not contain a microchip or specialised workshop. cle using the remote control key, this should the microchip has not been encoded. This is be re-synchronised ››› page 121 or the bat- ● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an- also true for keys which are specially cut for tery changed ››› page 120. ti-theft alarm* system will only function as the vehicle. intended if the windows and the sunroof* Different keys belonging to the vehicle may The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be are closed. be used. obtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT Official Service, a specialised workshop Control lamp on the vehicle key or an approved key service qualified to cre- Car key When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, ate this kind of key. the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 108 (arrow) once briefly, but if the button is held down New keys or spare keys must be synchronised for a longer period the control lamp flashes before use ››› page 121. several times, such as in convenience opening. CAUTION All of the vehicle keys contain electronic If the vehicle key control lamp does not light components. Protect them from damage, up when the button is pressed, replace the impacts and humidity. key's battery ››› page 120.

Unfolding and folding the key shaft Note ● Only use the key button when you require Fig. 108 Vehicle key Press button 1 ››› Fig. 108 to unlock and unfold the key shaft. the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 113 Operation

also possible even when you are outside the In vehicles with a security central locking Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and radius of action. feature (selective unlocking of side doors) the tank flap simultaneously. page 114, when the  button is pressed ● Key operation can be greatly influenced ››› – Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the  but- once, only the driver door and the fuel tank by overlapping radio signals close to the ve- ton on the remote control key, or turn the hicle working in the same range of frequen- flap are unlocked. When the button is press- key twice within 5 seconds in the opening cies, for example, radio transmitters or mo- ed a second time, all the vehicle doors are direction. bile telephones. unlocked. The anti-theft security system* and the anti- ● Obstacles between the remote control WARNING theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably Observe the safety warnings ››› in De- unlock only the driver door, without unlock- reduce the range of the remote control. scription on page 112. ing the other doors. ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro- pressed ››› Fig. 108 or one of the central Note gramme the security central locking system locking buttons ››› page 115 is pressed re- directly page 114. ● Do not use the remote control key until ››› peatedly in short succession, the central the vehicle is visible. locking briefly disconnects as protection against overloading. The vehicle is then un- ● Other functions of the remote control Adjusting the central locking locked. Lock it if necessary. key ››› page 127, Convenience opening and closing. You can use Easy Connect* to select which doors are unlocked with the central locking Unlocking/Locking by remote control system. Using the radio or the Easy Connect* Selective unlocking system system, you can select whether the vehicle Read the additional information carefully automatically closes with the “Auto Lock” ›››  page 15 The selective unlocking system allows you to programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank The vehicle will be locked again automatical- (9 mph). flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain ly if you do not open one of the doors or the locked. rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the Setting door unlocking car. This function prevents the vehicle from Unlocking the driver door and tank flap – Select the  button > SETTINGS function remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is button > Opening and closing > Cen-  pressed by mistake. This does not apply if – Press (once) the button on the remote tral locking > Unlocking doors. you press the  button for at least one sec- control key or turn the key once in the ond. opening direction.

114 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Setting the Auto Lock Please note the following when using the (Auto Lock) ››› page 112. You can unlock – Select:  button > SETTINGS function central locking switch to lock your vehicle: the vehicle again using the  button on the central locking switch. button > Opening and closing > Cen- ● It is not possible to open the doors or the tral locking > Locking while driv- rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, ing. e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). Unlocking doors ● The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. You can choose to unlock all the doors or only the driver door when you unlock the ● You can open the doors individually from vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap the inside by pulling the inside door handle. is also unlocked. ● In the event of an accident in which the With the Driver setting, when you press the airbags inflate, doors locked from the inside  button on the remote control key once, will be automatically unlocked to facilitate only the driver door is unlocked. If that but- access and assistance. ton is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked. WARNING ● The central locking switch also operates In vehicles with a conventional key, turn the when the ignition is switched off and auto- key in the door lock, in the direction of matically locks all the vehicle doors when opening, twice within 2 seconds. the  button is pressed. If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle ● The central locking switch does not oper- doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside mation signal* is heard. and the anti-theft security system is switched on. Auto Lock while driving ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an If you select on, all the vehicle doors are emergency, potentially putting lives at risk. locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph). Do not leave anyone, especially children, in the vehicle.

Central locking switch Note Your vehicle will lock automatically when it Read the additional information carefully reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) ›››  page 15 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 115 Operation

Unlocking and locking the vehicle mote control key must be no further than with Keyless Access* approx. 1.5 m away from the door handle. It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase. Once the doors have been locked, they cannot be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are properly closed. Fig. 110 Keyless Access locking and ignition sys- If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock tem only the corresponding door or the entire vehicle. The necessary adjustments can be A Unlocking sensor surface on the inside performed in vehicles with a driver informa- of the door handle tion system ›››  page 33. B Locking sensor surface on the outside of the door handle General information

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle If a valid key is in the proximity of the car, may have the Keyless Access system. ››› Fig. 109  the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on without actively using its key. To do this, all the rear lid is operated. The following fea- Fig. 109 Keyless Access locking and ignition sys- that is required is to have a valid vehicle key tures are then available without having to use tem:  In the proximity of the car.  Opening the in the detection area where you are attempt- the vehicle key actively: rear lid with sensor-controlled opening ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 109  and (Easy Open) to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the ● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using door handles ››› Fig. 110 or operate the soft- the handles of the front doors or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid touch/handle on the rear lid. ››› page 124 ››› . ● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via sensor of the driver or passenger door han- the front doors only. When doing so, the re- dle.

116 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving On vehicles with selective opening or info- Unlocking and locking the boot hatch one foot below the rear bumper. tainment system configuration, pulling the When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine door handle twice will unlock all doors. matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- with the starter button ››› page 214. id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 109 . In vehicles without safety system The central locking and locking systems op- “Safelock”: closing and locking the doors Open or close the rear lid normally. erate in the same way as a normal locking (Keyless-Exit) After closing, the hatch locks automatically. and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Switch the ignition off. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear change. lid will not lock automatically after closing it. ● Close the driver's door. Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B double flash of the indicator lights; locking Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- (arrow) on one of the front door handles. by a single flash. ing/closing (Easy Open) The door that is used must be closed. If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity  the rear lid are closed leaving the last key In vehicles with a safety system “Safelock”: ››› Fig. 109 of the rear lid, it is possible to used inside the vehicle and none outside, closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- unlock and open or close it moving one foot  the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the it) in the area of the sensors ››› Fig. 109 lo- vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. cated under the rear bumper. ● Switch the ignition off. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if ● Switch the ignition off. you do not open any door or the rear lid. ● Close the driver's door. ● ● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow) Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- on one of the front door handles. The vehi- middle. onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to cle locks with the “Safelock” security system ● With a brisk movement, bring your foot open any door or boot hatch. ››› page 120. The door that is used must be and lower leg as close as you can to the closed. bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to Unlocking and opening the doors (Key- be close to the upper sensor area and your less-Entry) ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) of one of the front door handles to lock foot to the lower sensor area ● Grip one of the front door handles. In do- the vehicle without activating the “Safelock” ››› Fig. 109  1 . ing this, the sensor surface security system ››› page 120. ● Quickly remove your foot and lower leg Fig. 110 A (arrow) on the handle is ››› from the sensor areas Fig. 109  2 . The touched and the vehicle unlocks. ››› rear lid will be automatically opened. ● Open the door. ● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the procedure after a few seconds. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 117 Operation

The third brake light flashes once to show The Easy Open function can be connected ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the boot has opened with the Easy Open and disconnected permanently in the info- the key. function. tainment system by pressing the  button and the SETTINGS > Opening and clos- Keyless Access temporary disconnection The rear lid can be closed with another foot ing function buttons  page 33. function* movement similar to the opening one (provi- ››› ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- What happens when locking the vehicle the rear lid). cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking with a second key cycle. When closed, the rear lid automatically locks If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and if the vehicle has been locked beforehand it is locked from the outside with a second ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- and there is no valid key inside. vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- While the rear lid is in motion (either open- blocked for engine ignition ››› page 214. In wise the vehicle cannot be locked. ing or closing), it can be stopped with anoth- order to enable engine ignition, press the  ● Close the door. er foot movement similar to the opening one button on the key inside the vehicle. ● Push the central locking button  on the (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi- remote control and touch the locking sensor ty of the rear lid). Automatically disabling sensors surface of the driver door handle The Easy Open feature is not available or on- If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a ››› Fig. 110 B within the following 5 seconds. ly has limited availability in the following sit- long period of time, the proximity sensors on Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the uations (examples): the passenger doors are automatically disa- vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also bled. possible if the vehicle is locked through the ● If the rear bumper is very dirty. driver’s door lock. If one of the sensor surfaces on the door ● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, handles is often activated in an unusual man- ● To check that the function has been deac- e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. ner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the tivated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull ● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not branches of a bush rubbing against it), all on the door handle. The door should not covered. proximity sensors are disabled for a certain open. period of time. ● If the vehicle has been equipped at a later The next time the door can only be unlocked time with a tow bracket. Sensors will again be enabled: via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open ● After a time. Keyless Access will be active again. feature may take a little longer to open the ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- boot or may deactivate automatically, to ton  on the key. avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. because of the running water. ● OR: if the boot is opened. 118 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Convenience functions ● Before washing the vehicle, always disa- CUPRA recommends going to a specialised To close all the electric windows using the ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. convenience function, keep a finger on the ment system. ● Depending on the function set on the in- locking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door ● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- fotainment system for the mirrors, the ex- handle for a few seconds until the windows er, ››› page 296, always disable the Easy terior mirrors will unfold and the surround have closed. Open feature via the infotainment system. lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the The doors opened by touching the sensor driver and passenger door handles CAUTION surface of the door handle depend on the ››› page 142. settings that have been activated in the info- The sensor surfaces on the door handles ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle tainment system with the  > SETTINGS > could engage if hit with a water jet or high or the system fails to detect one, a warning Opening and closing function buttons. pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key will display on the dash panel screen. This in the proximity. If at least one of the elec- could happen if any other radio frequency WARNING tric windows is open and the sensor surface signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. B (arrow) on one of the handles is activa- If there is a valid key in the proximity of the from a mobile device accessory) or if the ted continuously, all windows will close. rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- key is covered by another object (e.g. an tion may be accidentally activated and the aluminium case). rear lid will open, for example, when Note ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a sweeping under the rear bumper, when di- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no layer of salt, the correct functioning of the recting a water jet or high pressure steam to charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost sensors on the door handles may be affec- the area or when carrying out maintenance or entirely out of charge, you will probably ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. work or repairs in that area. If accidentally not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- opened, the rear lid could injure somebody with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the situated in its area of operation or cause can be unlocked or locked manually gear stick is in position P. material damage. ››› page 80. ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the ● Therefore, always make sure that there is ● To control the proper locking of the vehi- remote control of the system is equipped no unsupervised valid key in the area near cle, the release function is disabled for ap- with a position sensor. If this remote con- the rear lid. prox. 2 seconds. trol does not detect movement for a cer- ● Before carrying out any maintenance or ● If the message Keyless access system tain length of time, the system will con- repair work on the vehicle, always disable faulty is displayed on the screen of the clude that the vehicle cannot be opened the Easy Open feature via the infotainment dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled. system. operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. To do so,

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 119 Operation

Anti-theft security system (Safelock)* Replacing the battery Changing the battery ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 113. The following message is displayed on the in- ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- strument panel to remind the driver that hicle key Fig. 111 in the direction of the when the vehicle is closed from the outside, ››› arrow . the anti-theft security system is switched on. ›››  Do not forget the Safelock. ● Extract the battery from the compartment Please see Instruction Manual. The ve- using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 112. hicle cannot be opened from inside. This ● Place the new battery in the compartment makes it more difficult for unauthorised per- as shown ››› Fig. 112, pressing in the oppo- sons to break into the vehicle ››› in De- site direction to that shown by the arrow scription on page 112. ››› . The anti-theft security system can be switch- Fig. 111 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 111, pressing ed off each time the vehicle is locked: partment. it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow until it ● Turn the key a second time to the lock po- clicks into place. sition, in the door lock, within two seconds. If necessary, remove the protective cover on CAUTION the driver door handle ›››  page 15 or ● If the battery is not changed correctly, ● Press the  button on the remote control the vehicle key may be damaged. key for a second time within 2 seconds. ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage The flashing frequency of the diode in the the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- door sill immediately confirms the process. place the dead battery with another of the Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence same voltage, size and specifications. ● When fitting the battery, check that the for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- Fig. 112 Vehicle key: removing the battery. mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues polarity is correct. flashing slowly. CUPRA recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery. For the sake of the environment The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- Please dispose of your used batteries cor- cle key, under a cover. rectly and with respect for the environment.

120 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Synchronising the vehicle key Childproof lock anti-clockwise for the right hand side doors. If the  button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- Deactivating the childproof lock hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked – Unlock the vehicle and open the door using the key. In this case, the key must be whose childproof lock you want to deacti- resynchronised as described below: vate. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 113. – With the door open, rotate the groove in ● If necessary, remove the cover from the the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- driver door lever ›››  page 15. wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 113 and clockwise for the right hand side ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For doors. this, it must remain with the vehicle. Fig. 113 Childproof lock on the left hand side ● Open the vehicle within one minute using door. Once the childproof lock is activated, the the key blade. The key has been synchron- door can only be opened from the outside. The childproof lock prevents the rear doors ised. The childproof lock can be activated or de- from being opened from the inside. This sys- activated by inserting the key in the groove ● If necessary, fit the cap. tem prevents minors from opening a door when the door is open, as described above. accidentally while the vehicle is running. This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- Anti-theft alarm system* ted and deactivated manually, as described below: Description

Activating the childproof lock The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned lock. on when the vehicle is locked with the key.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in ● The turn signal light will flash twice on the door using the ignition key, clockwise opening and deactivating the alarm. » for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 113 and

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 121 Operation

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ● When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat ing and activating the alarm. or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or then the anti-theft alarm will not operate vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 123). correctly. When does the system trigger an alarm? ● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered alarm system is disconnected. the battery is disconnected or not working for about 30 seconds accompanied by for any reason. sound and optical (flashing) warning signals How to turn OFF the alarm ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one and will be repeated about ten times when Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button of the battery cables is disconnected while the vehicle is locked and the following unau- on the key or turn on the ignition with a valid the alarm system is active. thorised actions are attempted: key. ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- Note locked using the vehicle key without switch- Vehicle interior monitoring and anti- ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be tow system* certain markets, such as the Netherlands, switched off to prevent the battery from there is no 15 second waiting time and the exhausting if the vehicle has been left It is a monitoring or control function incor- alarm is activated immediately on opening parked for a long period of time. The alarm porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de- the door). system remains activated. tects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ● ultrasound. ● A door is opened. If, after the audible warning goes off, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the ● The bonnet is opened. rear lid is opened after a door has been Activation ● The rear lid is opened. opened), the alarm is triggered again. – It is automatically switched on when the ● When the ignition is switched on with a ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated anti-theft alarm is activated. non-authorised key. when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . ● When the vehicle battery is disconnected. Deactivation ● If the driver door is unlocked mechani- ● – Open the vehicle with the key, either me- Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles cally with the key, only the driver door is  with interior monitoring ››› page 123). unlocked, the rest of the doors remain chanically or by pressing the button on ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with locked. Only when the ignition has been the remote control. The time period from anti-tow system ››› page 123). turned on will the other doors be available - when the door is opened until the key is in- but not unlocked - and the central locking serted in the contact should not exceed 15 ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with button will be activated. seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig- anti-tow system ››› page 123). gered.

122 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

– Press the  button on the remote control ● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially Deactivating the vehicle interior mon- twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- or completely). itoring and anti-tow system* sors will be deactivated. The alarm system ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, remains activated. such as loose papers, items hanging from When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. triggered if movements are detected in the The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in- tow system are automatically switched on Note clination is changed (e.g. during transport). again next time the vehicle is locked. ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is You can prevent the alarm from being trig- The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow activated without the volumetric sensor gered accidentally by switching off the vehi- sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- function, relocking will activate the alarm cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched with all its functions, except the volumetric tection. on. In order to activate it, all the doors and sensor. This function is reactivated when ● the rear lid must be closed. the alarm is switched on again, unless it is To disconnect vehicle interior monitoring deliberately switched off. and anti-tow protection, switch off the igni- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior tion and use the infotainment system to se- ● If the alarm has been triggered by the monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must lect the following:  button > function but- volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ton SETTINGS > Open and close > Cen- a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver if not, they will be automatically switched on. tral locking > Vehicle interior mon- door when the vehicle is opened. The flash The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- is different to the flash indicating the alarm itoring. tow system should be switched off if animals is activated. ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehi- are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- cle interior monitoring and the tow-away their movements will trigger the alarm) or side the vehicle may cause the vehicle inte- protection are switched off until the next when, for example, the vehicle is transported rior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both time the door is opened. or has to be towed with only one axle on the sensors react to movements and shakes in- ground. side the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* ››› page 120 is switched off, the vehicle inte- False alarms ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the rior monitoring and the tow-away protection rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- are automatically switched off. Interior monitoring will only operate correct- vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and ly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please the anti-tow system will only be activated observe related legal requirements. once all the doors are closed (including the WARNING rear lid). Observe the safety warnings ››› in De- The following cases may cause a false scription on page 112. alarm: ● Open windows (partially or fully). https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 123 Operation

Rear lid (luggage compart- Opening the rear lid er (Easy Open) ››› page 116. The key of the ● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 112 and briefly vehicle must not be further away than 1.5 m ment) press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles from the boot or inside the vehicle. with Keyless Access you can directly press ● OR: manually move the rear lid in the di- Rear lid with electric opening and the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- rection of closing until it closes automatical- closing* locked if an authorised key is recognised in ly. the proximity of the vehicle. ● The rear lid goes down automatically to the ● OR: press the button on the centre con- final position and also closes automatically sole for at least one second ››› Fig. 115. The ››› . button also works when the ignition is switched off. Interrupting opening or closing ● OR: press and hold the  button of the After beginning to open or close the rear lid, vehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi- the action can be halted by pressing one of cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the the  buttons. doors remain locked). Continue opening or closing the rear lid by ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and hand. To do this, some force will have to be sensor-controlled opening you can open the Fig. 114 Rear lid open: button to close rear lid im- used. mediately. rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy If you press one of the  buttons again, the Open). The rear lid will be automatically rear lid will move again in the original direc- opened. tion. If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob- Closing the rear lid stacle during the automatic opening or clos- ● Briefly press the  button on the rear lid ing, opening or closing will be interrupted ››› Fig. 114 ››› . immediately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly. ● OR: press the  button located on the centre console until the rear lid is closed ● Check why it has not been possible to ››› Fig. 115. open or close the rear lid. ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press ● Fig. 115 Centre console: button to open and close Try to open or close the rear lid again. and hold the  vehicle key button until the rear lid. ● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or rear lid is closed or move one foot in the area closed by hand using reasonable force. of the sensors located below the rear bump- 124 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Special feature for pulling a trailer Resetting and memorising the opening Emergency unlocking If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- angle ›››  page 17 cally connected to a trailer ››› page 296, the For the rear lid to reopen completely, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed opening angle must be reset and memorised WARNING with the buttons on the rear lid itself. again. If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open ● Release the rear lid and open it to the Acoustic warnings or, after opening, it may lower by itself due memorised height. Throughout the process of opening or clos- to the extra weight and cause serious in- ● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To ing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be jury. do this, some force will have to be used. heard. Exception: when the rear lid is ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a opened manually using the handle or the ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 114 on the rear lot of snow on it or when carrying a load Easy Open function with the movement of lid for at least 3 seconds. (e.g. on a rack). the foot or closed using the button on the ● This resets and memorises the factory-set ● Before opening the rear lid, remove the rear lid itself ››› Fig. 114. opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by snow or the load. blinking of the hazard warning lights and an Modifying and memorising the opening audible warning. WARNING angle If the rear lid is closed incorrectly or with- Automatic protection against overheating If the space behind or above the vehicle is out due care, it could result in serious in- less than the travel area of the rear lid, you If the system is operated repeatedly in a jury. can change the opening angle of the rear lid. short space of time, it automatically switches ● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- To memorise a new opening angle, the rear off to prevent overheating. low children to play inside or next to it, es- lid must be open at least halfway. Once the system is cool again, the function pecially if the rear lid is open. Children can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can could enter the luggage compartment, ● Interrupt the opening process in the de- close the rear lid and become trapped. A only be opened and closed by hand using sired position. locked vehicle can reach extremely high reasonable force. ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 114 on the rear and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, lid for at least 3 seconds. If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is disconnected ››› page 318 or the corre- illness or even death. The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- sponding fuse burns out ››› page 85, the sys- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard tem will have to be reset. This requires clos- CAUTION warning lights and an audible warning. ing the rear lid completely once. Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 125 Operation

close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga- ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of Controls for the windows rage. accident or injury. ● The rear lid must not be opened when Opening and closing the electric win- the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This dows Rear lid automatic locking may damage the tail lights. ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it Where the vehicle has been locked by press- down with your hand on the rear window. ing the  button on the remote control with The glass could smash. Risk of injury! the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto- ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing matically when closed. it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving. The automatic rear lid locking time extension function can be activated. Where this ● Closing the rear lid without observing and function is activated and once the rear lid ensuring it is clear could cause serious in- has been unlocked by pressing the  but- jury to you and to third parties. Make sure ton on the remote control key ››› page 114, that no one is in the path of the rear lid. the rear lid can be re-opened for a certain ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- length of time. closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- Where required, the automatic tailgate lock- soning! Fig. 116 Detail of the driver door: controls for the ing time extension function can be activated windows. ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave or deactivated at an authorised service, the key inside. The vehicle cannot be which will provide all the necessary informa- Read the additional information carefully opened if the key is left inside. tion. ›››  page 18 Before the vehicle locks automatically, there The front and rear electric windows can be is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. operated by using the controls on the driver Therefore, we recommend you always lock door. The other doors each have a switch for the vehicle by pressing the  button on the their own window. remote control or by using the central lock- Always close the windows fully if you park the ing button. vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . WARNING You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- duction on page 80. neither the driver door nor the front 126 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing passenger door has been opened and the obstacle for assistance in an emergency sit- there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- key has not been removed from the ignition. uation. ing will stop working for 10 seconds. ● Therefore always take the key with you ● If the window is still obstructed, the win-  Safety switch * when you leave the vehicle. dow will stop at this point. The safety switch ››› Fig. 116 5 on the driver ● The electric windows will work until the ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- door can be used to disable the electric win- ignition has been switched off and one of dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by dow buttons on the rear doors. the front doors has been opened. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear ● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- doors are activated. ble the rear electric windows. Make sure back function is now deactivated. that they have been disabled. ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors will open fully when you operate one of the are deactivated. Note buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- If the window is not able to close because it low if the buttons on the rear doors are WARNING is stiff or because of an obstruction, the switched off. window will automatically open again Observe the safety warnings ››› in Open- ››› page 127. If this happens, check why the ing and closing the electric windows on WARNING window could not be closed before at- page 127. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- tempting to close it again. ● The roll-back function does not prevent duction on page 80. fingers or other parts of the body getting ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can pinched against the window frame. Risk of result in injury. Roll-back function accident. ● Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- could cause serious injury to you and third jury when the electric windows close. Convenience opening and closing parties. Make sure that no one is in the path ● of a window. If a window is obstructed when closing au- Use the convenience opening/closing func- tomatically, the window stops at this point ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric tion to easily open/close all the windows and lowers immediately . equipment could be activated with risk of ››› from the outside. » injury, for example, in the electric windows. ● Next, check why the window does not ● The doors can be locked using the re- close before attempting it again. mote control key. This could become an ● If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 127 Operation

Convenience open function tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. – Close the window as far as it will go by lift- – Press and hold the  button on the remote To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the ing and holding the electric window switch. control key until all the windows have windows when pressing the button to close – Release the switch and then lift it again for reached the desired position, or them. The windows stop moving as soon as 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic the button is released. – First unlock the vehicle using the  button function. on the remote control key and then keep If you push (or pull) a button to the first the key in the driver door lock until all the One-touch opening and closing stage, the window will open (or close) until windows have reached the required posi- you release the button. If you push or lift the tion. One-touch opening and closing means you button briefly to the second stage, the win- do not have to hold down the button. dow will open (one-touch opening) or close Convenience close function (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op- Buttons Fig. 116 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have – Press and hold the  button on the remote ››› erate the button while the window is opening control key until all the windows are closed two positions for opening windows and two or closing, it stops at this position. ››› , or for closing them. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the desired position. – Lock the driver's door with the key and hold the key in the lock position until all the One-touch closing Sunroof* windows are closed – Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The window closes fully. Introduction Programming convenience opening in the Easy Connect* One-touch opening The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The – Select:  button > SETTINGS function rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- – Push down the window button briefly up to button > Opening and closing > so has a sun blind. the second position. The window opens Opening the window by holding down fully. button or > Front window on/off. WARNING

Resetting one-touch opening and closing If the sunroof is used negligently or without WARNING paying due attention, it can cause serious ● Never close the windows without due The automatic open and close function will injury. not work if the battery has been temporarily care or proper control. There is a risk of ● Open or close the sunroof and the sun disconnected. The function can be restored suffering injury. blind only when no one is in their path of as follows: ● For safety reasons, you should only use movement. the remote control open and close func-

128 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

● Never leave any key inside the vehicle ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, The  button ››› Fig. 117 has two levels. The when exiting. the anti-trap function will not work either. first level switches the sunroof to the tilted position, opening or closing it fully or partial- ● Never leave a child or any other person Contact a specialised workshop. ly. who may need help in the vehicle, especially if they have access to the vehicle key. If On the second level, the sunroof automati- using they key unattended, they could lock Opening and closing the sunroof cally moves to the corresponding final posi- the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat- ignition and activate the sunroof. ing the button again stops the automatic ● After switching off, it is still possible to function. open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof driver nor passenger door is opened. ● Press the rear part of the button B to the first level. CAUTION ● Automatic function: briefly press the rear ● To prevent damage, during winter tem- part of button B to the second level. peratures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening Closing the sunroof from a tilted position the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. Fig. 117 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but- ● Press the front part of the button A to the ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of ton. first level. rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water The sunroof only works when the ignition is ● Automatic function: briefly press the front can enter the interior and can cause con- switched on. Once the ignition has been part of the button A to the second level. siderable damage to the electrical system. switched off, you can still open or close the As a result, other damage can occur in the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver Stopping the automatic operation by ad- vehicle. door and the front passenger door are not justing the tilted position of the sunroof or opened. by closing the sunroof

Note The sun blind automatically opens along with ● Press button A or B again. ● Leaves and other loose objects that ac- the sunroof if completely closed or if in front cumulate on the sunroof rails should be of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the Opening the sunroof regularly cleaned away either by hand or previous position and does not automatically ● Press button C backwards to the first level. » with a vacuum. close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only be closed completely once the sunroof has been closed. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 129 Operation

● Automatic function to the comfort posi- When the sunroof is in its most tilted posi- Note tion: briefly press button C backwards to the tion, the sun blind automatically goes into a second level. ventilation position. The sun blind remains in When the sunroof is open, the electric sun blind can only be closed to the front edge this position also with the sunroof closed. of the sunroof. Closing the sunroof Buttons ››› Fig. 118 1 and 2 have two lev- ● Press button D forwards to the first level. els. The first level opens or closes the sun ● Automatic function: briefly press button D blind fully or partially. Convenience function to open or forwards to the second level. By briefly pressing the button to the second close the sunroof* level, the sun blind automatically moves to Stopping the automatic operation during the corresponding final position. Activating the opening or closing the button again stops the automatic func- ● Press button C or D again. tion. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few Opening and closing the sun blind minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind

● Press button 1 to the first level. Fig. 119 Driver door lever: sensor surfaces. ● Automatic function: briefly press button 1 to the second level. The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the win- Closing the sun blind dows. ● Press button 2 to the first level. Using the door lock* ● Automatic function: briefly press button 2 Fig. 118 On the interior roof lining: switches for to the second level. ● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver the sun blind. door in either the unlocking or locking posi- Stopping the automatic operation during tion to open or close the roof in the tilted The electrical sun blind works when the igni- the opening or closing position. Release the key to interrupt this tion is switched on. function. ● Press button 1 or 2 again.

130 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Opening and closing

Using the remote control ance, it stops at the corresponding position ● The anti-trap function does not prevent ● Keep the locking/unlocking button press- and then opens. For automatic closing, a fingers or other parts of the body from be- ed to open/close the roof. If you release the new closing attempt might take place. coming trapped against the roof frame and button is the opening/closing will stop. ● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to injuries occurring. close, close it without the anti-trap function. Using the Keyless Access* system (only closing) Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function ● Press and hold the locking sensor surface ››› Fig. 119 B on the door handle to close ● Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds of the sunroof. If you release the sensor sur- having activated the roll-back function, press face, the closing movement stops. the  button ››› Fig. 117 to the second level in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 117 D until WARNING the sunroof closes completely. If the sunroof is used negligently or without ● Sun blind: within approximately 5 seconds paying due attention, it can cause serious of having activated the anti-trap function, injury. press button ››› Fig. 118 2 until the sun blind closes completely. ● The sunroof or sun blind close without Anti-trap function of the panoramic the anti-trap function intervening! sliding sunroof and the sun blind ● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close, visit a specialised workshop. The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof and the sun WARNING blind . If the sunroof or sun blind en- ››› Closing the sunroof or sun blind without counter resistance or an obstacle when clos- the anti-trap function can cause serious in- ing, they reopen immediately. juries. ● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not ● Always be careful when closing the sun- close. roof and sun blind. ● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. ● No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when ● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closing without the anti-trap function. closed due to an obstacle or some resist-

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 131 Operation

Lights and visibility Several warning and control lamps light up WARNING for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road Lights verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ahead and to ensure that other road users onds. are able to see you. Control lamps WARNING ● Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.  It lights up Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109. Driving light totally or partially faulty. WARNING

Fault in the cornering light system. If the headlights are set too high and not Side light and dipped beam headlight used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could re-  It lights up sult in a serious accident. Read the additional information carefully Rear fog light switched on ››› page 135. ›››  page 30 ● Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted. The driver is personally responsible for the  It lights up correct use and adjustment of the lights in all Note Left or right turn signal. situations. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn sig- The legal requirements regarding the use of nal is faulty. Audible warnings to advise the driver that vehicle lights in each country must be ob- the lights have not been switched off served. Hazard warning lights on ››› page 136. If the key is not in the ignition and the driver  It lights up door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind Daytime running lights Trailer turn signals you to turn the light off. The daytime running lights consist of individ-  It lights up ● When the parking light is on ››› page 133. ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. ● When the light switch is in position  or When the daytime running lights are switch- Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 133. . ed on, the rear side light also switches on ››› . It lights up  The daytime running lights switch on every The Light Assist system is on ››› page 134. time the ignition is switched on, if the switch 132 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Lights and visibility is in positions  or , according to the level the lever. The turn signal will flash three ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- of exterior lighting. times. tive part stops flashing and only flashes When the light switch is in position , a One-touch signalling is activated and deacti- once in the new part selected. light sensor automatically switches dipped vated in the Easy Connect system via the  ● The turn signal only works when the igni- beam on and off (including the control and button and the function button SETTINGS > tion is switched on. The hazard warning instrument lighting) or the daytime running Lights > One-touch signalling lights also work when the ignition is switch- lights depending on the level of exterior ›››  page 33. ed off. lighting. ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the In vehicles that do not have the correspond- control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn ing menu, this function can be deactivated in WARNING signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash a specialised workshop. at double speed. ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting WARNING ● The main beam headlights can only be conditions. Daytime lights do not provide switched on if the dipped beam headlights Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, enough light to illuminate the road proper- are already on. or forgetting to deactivate them can con- ly or be seen by other road users. ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the fuse other road users. This could result in a headlights, tail lights and turn signals may ● A vehicle which does not have the rear serious accident. lights on may not be visible to other drivers mist up inside temporarily. This is normal ● Always give warning when you are going in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or and in no way effects the useful life of the to change lane, overtake or when turning, in conditions of poor visibility. vehicle lighting system. activating the turn signal in good time. ● As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn Automatic dipped beam control * Turn signal and main beam lever signal off.

Read the additional information carefully The automatic dipped beam control is mere- ›››  page 31 WARNING ly intended as an aid and is not able to recognise all driving situations. Push the lever all the way down to turn off Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main the corresponding function. When the light switch is in position , the beam may distract or dazzle other drivers. vehicle lights and the instrument panel and Convenience turn signals switch lighting switch on and off automati- Note cally in the following situations ››› in Day- For the one-touch signalling, when the igni- time running lights on page 133: » tion is switched on, move the lever as far as ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- possible upwards or downwards and release ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 133 Operation

Automatic switching Automatic switching ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is auto- ● In poorly lit towns with highly reflective on off matically switched on. signs. The main beam assist generally detects illu- ● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as The photo sensor detects When adequate lighting is pedestrians or cyclists). darkness, for example, detected. minated areas and deactivates the main when driving through a beam when passing through a town, for ex- ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps) tunnel. ample. and when oncoming vehicles are partially obscured. The rain sensor detects When the windscreen rain and activates the wipers have been inactive Switching the main beam assist on and off ● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- windscreen wipers. for a few minutes. Func- Use cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard tion rail in the centre of the road. WARNING ● If the camera is damaged or the power – Switch the ignition on and turn the light If the road is not well lit and other road supply is cut off. switch to position . users cannot see the vehicle well enough or – From the base position, move the main ● In fog, snow and heavy rain. at all, accidents may occur. Activate: beam and turn signal lever forwards ● With dust and sand turbulence. ● The automatic dipped beam control  ››› page 133. When the warning lamp  is ● With loose gravel in the field of vision of () only switches on the dipped beam displayed on the instrument panel display, when there are no changes in brightness, the main beam assist is switched on. the camera. and not, for example when it is foggy. ● When the field of vision of the camera is – Turn the light switch to a different posi- misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,  tion to ››› page 132. ice, etc. – OR: with main beam on, move the turn Main beam assist (Light Assist)* Deacti- signal and main beam lever backwards. vate: – OR: move the turn signal and main WARNING The main beam assist acts within the limits of beam lever forward to manually enable The convenience features of the main the system and depending on environmental the main beam. The main beam assist will beam assist should not encourage the tak- and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the then be deactivated. ing of risks. The system is not a replace- system is activated as of a speed of about 60 ment for driver concentration. km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below Malfunctions ● You are always in control of the main about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› . The following conditions may prevent the beam and adapting it to the light, visibility When the system is activated and the cam- main beam headlight control from turning and traffic conditions. era detects other vehicles that may be daz- off the headlights in time or from turning off ● It is possible that the main beam head- zled, the main beam is automatically switch- altogether: light control does not recognise all driving

134 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Lights and visibility situations and is limited under certain cir- Fog lights “Coming home” function cumstances. This function may be connected/disconnec- ● When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of ted through the radio menu. The “Coming the main beam control may be affected. Home” and/or “Leaving Home” delay time This also applies when changes are made to may also be set (default: 30 sec). the vehicle lighting system, for example, if In the “Coming Home” function, the dipped additional headlights are installed. beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the rear side lights, the number plate lights and CAUTION the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror (Welcome Light) switch on. To avoid affecting the operation of the system, take the following points into consid- Fig. 120 eration: Instrument console: light panel. Automatic* activation of “Coming Home” ● Clean the field of vision of the camera The fog lights can be switched on when the For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (ro-  regularly and make sure it is free of snow light panel is in the ,  position (side tary light switch in position ). and ice.  light) or (dipped beam) and the engine is ● Switch off the engine and remove the key ● Do not cover the field of vision of the running. from the ignition with the rotary light switch camera.  in position  ›››  page 30. ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- – Switching on the rear fog light : pull ● aged in the area of the field of vision of the on the light switch until it engages The automatic “Coming Home” function is camera. ››› Fig. 120 1 . The  indicator light will only active when the light sensor detects appear in the instrument panel. darkness. Note – To switch off the fog lights, press the ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming light switch in or turn it to position . Home” lighting comes on. Main beam and headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with Note Manual “Coming Home” activation the turn signal and main beam lever ››› page 133. The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (ro- you. You should use the rear fog light only tary light switch without position ). when visibility is very poor. ● Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 135 Operation

● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- In the “Leaving Home” function, the dipped Hazard warning lights  mately 1 second. beams, the daytime running lights (DRL), the ● Activated for any position of the rotary light rear side lights, the number plate lights and switch. the courtesy lights in the rear view mirror (“Welcome Light”) switch on. ● When the car door is opened, the “Coming Home” lighting comes on. The headlights Activation are turned off 60 seconds after the vehicle door is opened. ● When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. Deactivation ● The “Leaving Home” function is only acti- ● If no door has been closed, they go out au- vated when the rotary light switch is in position  and the light sensor detects dark- tomatically after 60 seconds. Fig. 121 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning ness. ● After the last door has been closed, the lights. headlights will be switched off after the Deactivation “Coming Home” delay (as established in the Read the additional information carefully radio menu) has elapsed. ● When the “Leaving Home” delay period ›››  page 31 ends (default: 30 sec). ● On turning the light switch to position  The hazard warning lights are used to draw ›››  page 30. ● When the vehicle is locked using the re- the attention of other road users to your ve- mote control. hicle in emergencies. ● When the ignition is switched on (when starting the engine). ● When the light control is switched into a If your vehicle breaks down: position other than . 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from ● With the ignition is switched on. moving traffic. Function “Leaving Home” 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard The “Leaving Home” function is only availa- warning lights ››› . ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor 3. Switch the ignition off. (rotary light switch in position ). 4. Apply the handbrake. This function may be connected/disconnected through the radio menu. The “Leaving 5. Move the selector lever to position P. Home” function switch-off delay may also be set (default: 30 sec).

136 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Lights and visibility

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- an area where the catalytic converter could up, and additionally the tail lights will do so tention of other road users to your come into contact with highly inflammable partially. vehicle. materials, for example dry grass or spilt 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when petrol. This could start a fire. you leave the vehicle. Motorway light* Note All turn signals flash simultaneously when the The function is connected/disconnected via hazard warning lights are switched on. The ● The battery will run down if the hazard the corresponding Easy Connect system warning lights are left on for a long time, two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the menu. even if the ignition is switched off. turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- ● Activation: when going above 110 km/h warning lights also work when the ignition is scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- (68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- switched off. utory requirements. ped beam raises slightly to increase the driver's visibility distance. Emergency braking warning ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- Parking lights  ped beam returns to its normal position. ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 When the parking light is switched on, (right mph), the brake light flashes several times or left turn signal), the front side light and per second to warn the vehicles driving be- the rear light on the corresponding side of hind. If you continue braking, the hazard Driving abroad the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on- warning lights will come on automatically ly be activated with the ignition switched off when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They The light beam of the dipped beam lights is and the turn signal and main beam lever in switch off automatically when the vehicle asymmetric: the side of the road on which the central position, before being triggered. starts to move again. you are driving is lit more intensely. When a car that is manufactured in a country WARNING that drives on the right travels to a country Parking light on both sides ● The risk of an accident increases if your that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard normally necessary to cover part of the With the ignition switched off and the light warning lights and a warning triangle to headlight bulbs with stickers or to change switch in position , when locking the vehi- draw the attention of other road users to the adjustment of the headlights to avoid cle from the outside, the parking lights on your stationary vehicle. dazzling other drivers. both sides of the vehicle light up. In doing so, ● Due to the high temperatures that the only the side lights of both headlights light In such cases, the regulations specify certain catalytic converter can reach, never park in light values that must be complied with for » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 137 Operation

designated points of the light distribution. ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load Glove compartment and luggage com- This is known as “Tourist light”. status so that it does not blind other driv- partment lighting* The light distribution of the halogen and full- ers. When opening and closing the glove com- LED headlights allows the specific “tourist partment on the front passenger side and light” values to be met without the need for the rear lid, the respective light will automati- stickers or changes in the settings. Lighting of the instrument panel, cally switch on and off. screens and controls Note Footwell lighting* “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If Depending on the model, the lighting of the The lights in the footwell area below the dash you are planning a long stay in a country instrument panel and controls can be adjus- (driver and front passenger sides) will switch that drives on the other side, you should ted in the Easy Connect system, using the on when the doors are opened and will de- take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical  button and the SETTINGS function but- crease in intensity while driving. The intensity Service to change the headlights. ton ›››  page 33. of these lights can be adjusted using the radio menu (see Easy Connect > Light In certain cases,when the engine is running Settings > Interior lighting and the lights are not switched on; e.g., pass-  page 33). Dynamic adjustment of headlight ing through a tunnel without having activa- ››› range ted the  function, a Switch on the Ambient light* lights warning will appear on the instru- The headlight range is automatically adjus- ment panel. The ambient light lights up the area of the ted according to the vehicle load status centre console, the footwell area and, de- when they are switched on. pending on the version, the front door pan- Interior and reading lights1) els. WARNING The ambient lighting in the door panels may Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that Read the additional information carefully change colour. The brightness and colour of the headlights dazzle and distract other ›››  page 32 these lights can be adjusted using the radio drivers. This could result in a serious accident.

1) Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind and glove compartment light. 138 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Lights and visibility menu (see Easy Connect > Light Set- ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its Windscreen wiper and window tings > Interior lighting mounting and turned towards the door ›››  page 33). ››› Fig. 122 1 . wiper systems ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- Note gitudinally backwards. Window wiper lever The reading lights switch off when the vehicle is locked using a key or after several mi- Vanity mirror light Read the additional information carefully nutes if the key is removed from the igni- ›››  page 32 There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, tion. This prevents the battery from dis- on the rear of the sun visor. When the cover charging. CAUTION is opened 2 a light comes on. If the ignition is switched off with the wind- The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror screen wipers active, they complete their cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed wipe before returning to the rest position. Visibility back up. When switching the ignition back on, the windscreen wiper will continue to operate Sun visors WARNING at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and other obstacles on the windscreen may dam- Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. age the wiper and the windscreen wiper ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their motor. housing when not in use. ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your Note journey. The light above the sun visor automatically ● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip- switches off after a few minutes in certain ers from the glass. CUPRA recommends a conditions. This prevents the battery from de-icer spray for this operation. discharging. ● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the Fig. 122 Sun visor windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. Options for adjusting driver and front pas- ● In icy conditions, always check that the senger sun visors: wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it screen. may help to leave the vehicle parked with »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 139 Operation

the wipers in service position Windscreen wipers performance in different Note  page 54. ››› situations The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta- Intervals between wipes depend cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper Note For the interval on the vehicle's speed. The will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the ● The windscreen and window wipers only wipe higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals. wiper back on again. function when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed. Heated windscreen washer jets* ● The interval wipe speed varies according The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. is moving, the more often the windscreen is When the ignition is switched on the heated cleaned. windscreen washer jets automatically adjust ● The rear wiper is automatically switched the heat depending on the ambient temper- on when the windscreen wiper is on and the ature. car is in reverse gear. Headlight wash/wipe system* The headlight washers/wipers clean the Windscreen wiper functions headlight lenses. After the ignition is switched on, the first and Windscreen wipers performance in different every fifth time the windscreen washer is situations switched on, the headlights are also washed. The activated position provision- Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever If the vehicle is at a ally changes to the previous po- should be pulled towards the steering wheel standstill sition. when the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any encrusted dirt (such as insects) should The air conditioner comes on be cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling). for approximately 30 seconds in During automatic air recirculation mode to prevent To ensure the headlight washers work cor- wipe the smell of the windscreen rectly in winter, any snow which has got into washer fluid entering the inside the vehicle. the bumper jet supports should be cleaned away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray.

140 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Lights and visibility

Rain sensor Move the lever to the required position reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ››› Fig. 123: or make it react more slowly, later or not at all. 0 Rain sensor off. ● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sary. sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor reduction in the sensitive surface area and – Set control to the right: high sensitivity. adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage – Set control to the left: low sensitivity. caused by the stone. When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts WARNING Fig. 123 Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the rain operating again when the windscreen wipers The rain sensor may not detect enough rain sensor A . are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling to switch on the wipers. at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). ● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually when water on the windscreen ob- Rain sensor modified behaviour structs visibility. Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 124 of Note the rain sensor include: ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the sensor regularly and check the blades for damage Fig. 124 (arrow). damaged blades may lengthen the activation ››› time, reduce the washing intervals or result in ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- a fast and continuous wipe. mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. Fig. 124 Rain sensor sensitive surface ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper. the windscreen wiper intervals, depending ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on on the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity the roads may cause an extra long wipe of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. when the windscreen is almost dry. Manual wipe ››› page 139. ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 141 Operation

Mirror CAUTION Adjusting the exterior rear-view mir- In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rors Anti-dazzle rear view mirror rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as clearly through the rear window. possible.

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- Note zle function* ● If the light incident in the interior rear vi- The anti-dazzle function is activated every sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun time the ignition is switched on. blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with automatic setting will not operate per- When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, fectly. the interior rear vision mirror will darken au- Fig. 125 Driver door: control for the exterior mir- ● When the interior lights are on or reverse tomatically according to the amount of light ror. it receives. The anti-dazzle function is can- gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle celled if reverse gear is engaged. Read the additional information carefully position. ›››  page 20 WARNING Synchronized regulation of the exterior In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle mirrors rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluid may leak. This could cause irritation to ● In the Settings - Convenience menu, the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you select whether or not the exterior mirrors come into contact with this liquid, it must should move in synchronisation. be rinsed with large quantities of water. If ● Turn the knob to position L1). necessary, get medial help. ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical. 142 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Seats and head restraints

● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- CAUTION Seats and head restraints view mirror: rotate the control to position R1). ● If one of the mirror housings is knocked ● In the Easy Connect system the exterior out of position (e.g. when parking), the Adjusting the seats and headr- mirrors can be adjusted using the  button mirrors must first be fully retracted with the and the SETTINGS function button. electric control. Do not readjust the mirror ests housing by hand, as this will interfere with Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the the mirror adjuster function. Manual adjustment of the seats vehicle* ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The Easy Connect system, the  > SET- matic car wash, please make sure to retract Read the additional information carefully TINGS > Mirrors and windscreen wip- the exterior mirrors to prevent them from ›››  page 19 ers can be used to have the exterior mirrors being damaged. Electrically retractable ex- fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked terior mirrors must not be folded in or out WARNING ›››  page 33. by hand. Always use the electrical power control. The safe driving chapter contains impor- When the vehicle is locked with the remote tant information, tips, suggestions and control, the exterior mirrors are retracted warnings that you should read and observe Note automatically. When the vehicle is opened for your own safety and the safety of your with the remote control, the exterior mirrors If the electrical adjustment should fail to passengers ››› page 56. are deployed automatically. operate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of WARNING the mirror glass. WARNING ● Adjust the front seats only when the vehicle is stationary. Failure to follow this in- Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors struction could result in an accident. give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects look smaller and further away ● Be careful when adjusting the seat than they really are. If you use these mirrors height. Careless or uncontrolled adjust- to estimate the distance to vehicles behind ment can cause injuries. you when changing lane, you could mis- ● The front seat backrests must not be re- judge the distance. Risk of accident! clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they »

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 143 Operation

should, with the subsequent danger of in- ● If the engine is started while the seats are seats at a minimum of the next socket up jury. being electrically adjusted, the adjustment ››› . will stop. Adjusting the head restraints Electric driver's seat adjustment* – To set the head restraint higher, grasp the Adjusting the front head restraints sides with both hands and move it up- Read the additional information carefully wards, until you see it engage. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 19 – To set the head restraint lower down, press  page 19 ››› the 1 ››› Fig. 126 button and move it WARNING Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 19 so downwards. ● If the electric front seats are used negli- that as far as possible the top of the head re- gently or without paying due attention, it straint is level with the top of your head. Removing the head restraint can cause serious injury. When this is not possible, try to get as close To remove the head restraint, the corre- ● The front seats can also be electrically as possible to this position. sponding backrest must be partially folded adjusted when the ignition is switched off. forward. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle. Adjustment of the rear head restraints – Unlock the backrest ››› page 146. ● In the event of an emergency, electrical – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- adjustment can be stopped by pressing any rives to the top. control. – Press button 1 ››› Fig. 126, while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 CAUTION ››› Fig. 126 with a flat screwdriver a maxi- To avoid damaging the electrical compo- mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head nents of the front seats, please refrain from restraint. kneeling on the seat or applying sharp – pressure at a single point to the seat cush- Move the backrest until it engages properly ion and backrest. ››› .

Fitting the head restraint Note Fig. 126 Rear centre head restraint: release point. To mount the external head restraints, the ● It may not be possible to electrically ad- When transporting people in the back seat, corresponding backrest must be partially fol- just the seat if the vehicle battery is very place the head restraints of the occupied ded forward. low. 144 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Seats and head restraints

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 146. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth- Activate – Insert the head restraint bars into the er parts of the body away from the operat- Press the button  or . Seat heating is guides until they perceptibly engage. It ing radius and the adjustment of seats. switched on fully. should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest. Adjusting the heating output

– Move the backrest until it engages properly Seat heating Press the button  or  repeatedly until the ››› . desired temperature is reached.

WARNING Deactivating ● Please observe the general notes Press the button  or  until all the warning ››› page 61. lamps switch off. ● Remove the rear head restraints only when it is necessary for the placement of a WARNING child seat ››› page 73. After removing a child Children and people who cannot perceive seat, remount the head restraint immedi- pain or temperature because of medica- ately. Travelling with the head restraints re- Fig. 127 On the centre console: front seats heat- tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. dia- moved or improperly adjusted increases ing switch betes) or have a limited perception of the risk of severe injuries. these, may suffer burns to the back, but- The seat cushions can be heated electrically tocks or legs when using seat heating, an when the ignition is switched on. The back- occurrence that may entail a very lengthy rest is also heated in some versions. recovery period or from which it may not be Seat functions The seat heating should not be engaged in possible to recover fully. Seek medical ad- any of the following conditions: vice if you have doubts regarding your Introduction health. ● The seat is unoccupied. ● People with limited pain and temperature WARNING ● The seat has a covering. thresholds must never use seat heating. ● If an abnormality in the device's tempera- Inappropriate use of the seat functions can ● There is a child seat installed in the seat. ture control is detected, have it checked by cause severe injuries. ● The seat cushion is wet or damp. a specialist workshop. » ● Assume the proper sitting position before ● The indoor or outdoor temperature is your trip and remain in it throughout. This greater than 25°C (77°F). also applies to the other occupants.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 145 Operation

WARNING Front centre armrest If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can The centre armrest can be adjusted to vari- adversely affect the operation of the seat ous levels. heating, increasing the risk of burns.

● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to Adjusting the centre armrest using the seat heater. – To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from the ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is starting position so that it is engaged. wet or damp. ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp – To return the armrest to the starting position, remove the armrest from the upper on the seat. Fig. 129 In the trunk: levers for remote release of ● Do not spill liquid on the seat. fixed position and lower it. the left part 1 and right part 2 of the rear seat backrest. The armrest can be moved backwards and CAUTION forwards. The rear seat backrest is split and each part ● To avoid damaging the heating elements be lowered separately to extend the luggage of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on compartment. the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single Folding down and lifting the rear seat When the rear seat backrest is lowered no- point on the seat cushion or backrest. backrest body else can travel in the corresponding ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating seats (not even a child). materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. Lowering the rear seat backrest with the ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat unlock button heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop. ● Lower the head restraint properly. ● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 128 1 for- For the sake of the environment wards and at the same time lift the backrest. ● The rear seat backrest is not engaged The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- when the red marking of the button 2 is sary fuel waste. visible. Fig. 128 On the rear seat backrest: release button 1 ; red mark 2 .

146 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat Transport and practical remote release lever backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and ● Lower the head restraint properly. other body parts out of its path. equipment ● Open the rear lid. ● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessary protection all the parts of the rear ● Storage compartments Pull the remote release lever of the left backrest must be properly engaged. This is part ››› Fig. 129 1 or right part 2 of the particularly important in the case of the backrest in the direction of the arrow. The centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a Storage areas under the front seats* released part of the rear seat backrest is fol- seat whose backrest is not properly engag- ded automatically down and forwards. ed they will fly forward, along with the ● If this occurs, close the rear lid. backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when ● A red signal on button 2 warns that the the red marking of the button ››› Fig. 128 2 backrest is not engaged. Always check that is visible. the red marking is not visible when the backrest is in the upright position. Folding up the rear seat backrest ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or ● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the is not properly engaged nobody else can lock until it engages ››› . travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child). Fig. 130 Storage compartment under the front ● It should not be possible to see the red seats. mark of the unlock button 2 . CAUTION ● The backrest must be properly engaged. There is a storage compartment with a cover Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- under each front seat. WARNING cle and other objects if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care The drawer* is opened by pulling on the Serious injuries can be caused if the rear and attention. handle of the cover ››› Fig. 130. seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. ● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, To close the drawer, press the cover until it always adjust the front seats so that neither locks into position. ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest the head restraints nor the cushions of the while driving. rear backrest can hit them. WARNING ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. ● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 147 Operation

● Do not drive with the drawer cover open. ● Do not use hard china cups or glasses. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the There is an injury risk for passengers if the These could cause injury in the event of an CD player is located in the glove compart- cargo is released in case of sudden braking accident. ment. Separate operating instructions are or an accident. enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding Instruction Manual. CAUTION You should avoid putting open drinks con- WARNING Drink holders tainers in the drink holders. The drinks The cover of the glove compartment could otherwise spill over and cause dam- should always be closed while driving. Fail- age to e.g. the electrical equipment or the ure to follow this instruction could result in seat covers. an accident.

Glove compartment Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compartments and supports in other parts of the vehicle: Fig. 131 Centre console: drinks holder. ● In the top of the glove compartment in vehicles that do not have a CD reader. The load Front drink holders of the compartment should not exceed – Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 131. 1.2 kg. Placement of two drinks is possible. There ● In the centre console under the centre is also the possibility of placing larger plas- armrest*. tic bottles in the trims of the doors. Fig. 132 Glove compartment ● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› . WARNING Opening/closing ● Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the ● Do not place any hot drinks in the drink – To open the glove compartment, pull the seats. holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot handle in the direction of the arrow. drinks could spill and cause burns, which may cause an accident. – To close the glove compartment, move the cover upwards until it engages.

148 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment

WARNING Power sockets ● Please make sure that any items of clothing hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear. ● The coat hooks should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags. Fig. 134 Detailed view of the side trim in the boot: 12-volt power socket.

In the centre console – Remove the cap located on the centre console of the socket ››› Fig. 133. . – Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

In the luggage compartment* – Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 134. Fig. 133  Centre console: front 12 volt power – Insert the plug of the electrical appliance socket.  Rear of the centre console: USB sock- into the power socket. ets. Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket. The appliances connected to each power socket must not exceed a power rating of 120 Watt. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 149 Operation

USB power sockets ● Before switching the ignition on or off, ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- Depending on the equipment and the coun- unplug the appliances from the USB ports partment and secure them on the fastening try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- to protect them from any damage caused rings. tions exclusively for charging or as a power by fluctuations in voltage. ● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- socket. jects. These USB ports are located at the rear of ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, the console, between the front seats Storing objects loose objects can be thrown forward, injur- ››› Fig. 133 . These connectors can work at ing vehicle occupants or passers-by. This a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port. increased risk of injury will be further in- Loading the luggage compartment creased if a loose object is struck by an in- They are not intended for file playback. flating airbag. If this happens, objects may All luggage and other loose objects must be shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in- WARNING safely secured in the luggage compartment. jury. Unsecured objects which shift back and The power socket works only when the ig- ● Please note that the centre of gravity may forth could impair the driving safety or driv- nition is on. Improper use may cause seri- shift when transporting heavy objects; this ous injury or even fire. Children should ing characteristics of the vehicle by shifting may affect vehicle handling and lead to an therefore not be left in the vehicle unatten- the centre of gravity. accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accordingly, to ded if the button is also left behind. Other- – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage avoid accidents. wise there is a possibility that they may be compartment. injured. ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- allowed maximum weight. If said weights ble in the luggage compartment. CAUTION are exceeded, the driving characteristics of – Place the heavy objects first. the vehicle may change, leading to acci- Always use the correct type of plugs to dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. avoid damaging the sockets. – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasten- ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- ing rings ››› page 153. pecially when the rear lid is open. Children Note could climb into the luggage compartment, WARNING closing the door behind them; they will be ● The use of electrical appliances with the trapped and run the risk of death. engine switched off will cause a battery dis- ● Loose luggage and other objects in the charge. luggage compartment could cause serious ● Never allow children to play in or around injuries. the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors ● Should the connected appliance over- and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. heat, immediately switch it off and discon- Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that nect it from the socket.

150 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment there are no adults or children in the vehi- WARNING cle. ● The luggage compartment cover must always be fixed properly (risk of accident). Note ● The luggage compartment cover should ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce not be used as a storage shelf. Articles fogging of the windows. Used air escapes placed on this cover could cause injury to through ventilation slits in the side trim of vehicle occupants in an accident or if the the luggage compartment. Ensure that the brakes are applied suddenly. ventilation slots are never covered. ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten- Fig. 136 In the boot: removing and installing the ing rings are commercially available from shelf. accessory shops. The luggage compartment cover blocks the view into the luggage compartment. Luggage compartment shelf Removing ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 135 B from their hooks A . ● Remove the rear shelf from the side supports ››› Fig. 136 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored under the luggage compartment double floor ››› page 152.

Fig. 135 In the boot: removing and installing the Fitting shelf. ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “recess” fits onto the axis of the supports ››› Fig. 136 and press down until it engages. ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 135 B to the rear lid. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 151 Operation

Storing the rear shelf ● Put the left and right covers in their original To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects position. should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard. When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- Tailboard for transporting long items* el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard ● Lower the centre armrest. ● Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover ››› Fig. 139 1 down and forwards. Fig. 137 In the boot: covers for storing the rear ● Open the rear lid. shelf. ● Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. ● Secure the objects with the seat belt. Fig. 139 On the rear seat backrest: opening the tailboard. ● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard ● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible. ● Close the rear lid. Fig. 138 In the boot: fitting the rear shelf. ● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug- Note gage compartment variable floor. The tailboard can also be opened from the Fig. 140 In the boot: opening the tailboard. luggage compartment. To do so, press the ● Remove the left and right covers release lever down, in the direction of the Fig. 137. ››› On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, arrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 140. ● Press the rear shelf until it engages in its there is a tailboard for transporting long housing ››› Fig. 138. items in the interior, such as skis. 152 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment

Fastening rings* ● Objects in the luggage compartment that Retaining hooks are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. ● Secure all objects, little and large. ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening ring when securing objects. ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

Note Fig. 141 In the boot: fastening rings. ● The maximum tensile load that the fas- Fig. 142 In the boot: retaining hooks. tening rings can support is 3.5 kN. In the front and rear part of the luggage ● Belts and securing systems for the appro- At the rear of the luggage compartment, on compartment there are fastening rings to se- priate load can be obtained from special- the left and right, there are fixed retaining cure the luggage ››› Fig. 141. ised dealerships. To do so, CUPRA recom- hooks ››› Fig. 142. In order to use the fastening rings, they must mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer The retaining hooks have been designed to be lifted beforehand. or any SEAT dealership. secure light shopping bags. ● The fastening rings are rendered unusa- WARNING ble for versions with a spare wheel. WARNING If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining Never use the retaining hooks as fastening straps are used, they could break in the rings. In case of sudden braking or an acci- event of braking or an accident. Objects dent, the hooks could break. could then be launched across the passenger compartment and cause serious or fatal CAUTION injuries. ● Always use belts or retaining straps that Each hook is designed for a maximum load are suitable and in a good condition. of 2.5 kg. ● Belts and retaining straps should be securely fastened to the fastening rings.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 153 Operation

Net bag* Hooking the net bag into the luggage ● Always secure the net hooks properly so compartment floor that they do not suddenly release from the ● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings fastening rings when hooking or unhooking ››› Fig. 143 2 . them. ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are re- 2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up- leased suddenly. wards. ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings described order. If a hook is unexpectedly 1 . released the risk of injury is increased.

Hook the net bag next to the load threshold Fig. 143 In the boot: net bag hooked up at floor level. ● Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings ››› Fig. 144 1 ››› . The bag zip should be facing upwards. ● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Remove the hooks and the net bag straps from the fastening rings and from the bag hooks. ● Store the net bag in the luggage compart- Fig. 144 In the boot: rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag. ment.

The luggage compartment prevents light WARNING luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- and can be used to store small objects. ing rings it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked The net bag can be hooked up to the lug- up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks gage compartment in different ways. could cause injuries. 154 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment variable floor Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can access the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position using handle ››› Fig. 145 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until the floor folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Fig. 146 Variable boot floor: tilted position. ● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 146 (arrows). Variable floor in high position ● To move from the low position to the high Variable floor with folded seats position, lift the floor using the handle ● To move from the high position to the low ››› Fig. 145 1 , and pull it back until the front position, lift the floor using the handle of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . ››› Fig. 145 1 and pull it back a little. ● Move the floor forward over the supports ● Push the variable floor towards the folded as far as the rear seat backrest and then low- rear seats with the handle 1 using some er the floor with the handle 1 . downward pressure so that the moving part of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear Variable floor in low position seats. Fig. 145 Variable boot floor:  raised position;  lowered position. ● To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle WARNING ››› Fig. 145 1 , and pull it back until the front During a sudden driving or braking ma- of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- ● Now let the front part fall to the floor and jects could be flung though the interior and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat cause serious or fatal injuries. backrest; lower the floor at the same time ● Always secure objects, even when the with the handle 1 . luggage compartment floor is properly lifted. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 155 Operation

● Only objects that do not protrude more As the roof water drains are integrated in the CAUTION than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- roof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA- ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- ried between the rear seat and the raised approved cross bars and roof carrier systems er system before entering a car wash. luggage compartment floor. can be used. ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal- ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between Cases in which cross bars and the roof car- and the load secured on them. For this pur- the rear seat and the raised luggage com- rier system should be disassembled. pose, check that your vehicle's height does partment floor. ● When they are not used. not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. ple, for underpasses or for entering garage CAUTION doors. ● When the vehicle height exceeds the max- ● The maximum weight that can be loaded imum height, for example, in some garages. ● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and on the luggage compartment variable floor the load secured on them should not inter- in the top position is 150 kg. WARNING fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. ● Do not let the luggage compartment When heavy or bulky loads are transported ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it floor fall when closing it. Always carefully on the roof carrier system, car driving per- does not knock into the roof load. guide it downwards in a controlled manner. formance is affected, as the centre of gravi- Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the ty shifts and there is greater wind resist- luggage compartment could be damaged. ance. For the sake of the environment ● Always secure the load properly using When cross bars and a roof carrier system Note belts or retaining straps that are suitable are installed, the increased air resistance CUPRA recommends the use of straps to and in a good condition. means that the vehicle uses more fuel. secure objects to retaining rings. ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance. ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Roof carrier* ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and Introduction traffic conditions.

The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains. 156 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Transport and practical equipment

Attach the cross bars and the roof car- cm and the distance between the crossbars Loading the roof carrier system rier system and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 15 cm. The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- WARNING stalled ››› . Incorrect attachment and use of the crossbars and the roof carrier system may cause Maximum authorised roof load the whole system to detach from the roof The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. and cause an accident and injuries. This figure comes from the combined weight ● Always take the manufacturer assembly of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the instructions into account. load itself on the roof ››› . ● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier Always check the weight of the roof carrier system when they are in perfect condition system, the cross bars and the weight of the and are properly secured. load to be transported and weigh them if ● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier Fig. 147 Attachment points for the roof railings for necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- system properly. the roof carrier system. thorised roof load. ● Check threaded joints and attachments If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier travelling and if necessary tighten them af- The crossbars are the basis of a series of with a lower weight rating, you will not be ter you have travelled a short distance. special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- able to carry the maximum authorised roof sons, special fixtures must be used to safely When making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest. load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is ● Always fit the special roof carrier systems or boats on the roof. The appropriate acces- listed in the fitting instructions. sories can be purchased at specialised CU- correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership. etc. Distributing a load ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or Always secure the crossbars and the roof roof carrier system. Distribute loads uniformly and secure them carrier system properly. Always take the as- correctly ››› . » sembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system in Note question into account. Always read the assembly instructions that The crossbars are assembled on the roof come with the crossbars and the roof carri- railings. The distance between crossbars er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle. ››› Fig. 147 A should be between 70 and 90 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 157 Operation

Check attachments Air conditioning WARNING Once the cross bars and roof carrier system Reduced visibility through the windows in- have been installed, check the bolted con- creases the risk of serious accidents. nections and attachments after a short jour- Heating, ventilation and cool- ● Always ensure that all windows are free of ney and subsequently with a certain ing ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, frequency. so as to maintain good visibility of every- Introduction thing outside. WARNING ● The maximum heat output required to Exceeding the maximum authorised roof Read the additional information carefully defrost windows as quickly as possible is load can result in accidents and considera- ›››  page 39 only available when the engine has reached ble vehicle damage. its normal running temperature. Only drive ● Never exceed the maximum authorised Viewing Climatronic information when you have good visibility. load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- On the screen of Climatronic control unit ● Always ensure that you use the heating hicle's maximum authorised weight. and on the screen of the factory-fitted Easy system, fresh air system, air conditioner ● Never exceed the load capacity of the Connect system, the theoretical values of and the heated rear window to maintain good visibility to the outside. cross bars and the roof carrier system, even the temperature zones are shown. if the maximum authorised roof load has ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a not been reached. The unit of temperature measurement can long period of time. If the cooling system is be changed in the Easy Connect system. ● Secure heavy items as far forward as pos- switched off and air recirculation mode sible and distribute the vehicle load uni- switched on, the windows can mist over formly. Dust and pollen filter very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. The dust and pollen filter with its activated ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it WARNING charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against is not required. impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in- If the load is loose or not secured, it could terior. fall from the roof carrier system or cause WARNING accidents and injuries. The dust and pollen filter must be changed Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and ● Always use belts or retaining straps that regularly so that air conditioner performance reduce driver concentration possibly re- are suitable and in a good condition. is not adversely affected. sulting in a serious accident. ● Secure the load properly. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or to use in areas with very high levels of air pol- use the air recirculation for long periods of lution, the filter must be changed more fre- time; the air in the vehicle interior will not quently than stated in the Service Schedule. be refreshed.

158 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Air conditioning

CAUTION Operating the Climatronic through To switch a function on or off, or to select a the Easy Connect system* submenu, you must press the corresponding ● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a function button. service centre. ● Switch the air conditioner off if you think Function button: Function it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the air conditioner checked OFF Climatronic is switched off. by a specialised workshop. ON Climatronic is switched on. ● Repairs to the air conditioner require Synchronise driver and front passenger specialist knowledge and special tools. CU- SYNC PRA recommends going to a specialised temperatures. CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service. The air conditioning settings submenu is opened. The following settings can also Note be adjusted: Fig. 148 Easy Connect screen: air conditioner ● When the cooling system is turned off, air menu. Automatic supplementary heater: to coming from the outside will not be dried. activate/deactivate the automatic acti- To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRA In the Easy Connect system it is also possible vation of the auxiliary heating for colder countries (only for engines with auxiliary recommends leaving the cooling system to perform various adjustments to the Clima- heating). With the option deactivated, (compressor) turned on. To do this, press tronic. depending on the outside temperature the  button. The button lamp should the heating may need more time than light up. Open the air conditioner menu SETTINGS normal to reach a comfortable tempera- ● The maximum heat output required to ture. ● Press the  button of the Climatronic defrost windows as quickly as possible is control panel. Automatic front window heating:* only available when the engine has reached to switch the automatic windscreen its normal running temperature. On the top of the screen you can see and heating on and off ››› page 162. ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the change the current settings, such as, for ex- windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ample, the temperature set for the driver Automatic air recirculation: to ensure heating and cooling are not im- side and for that of passenger. Temperatures switch automatic air recirculation on and paired, and to prevent the windows from up to +22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue ar- off ››› page 161. misting over. rows, and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) BACK: to close the submenu. with red arrows. It enables manual switching on or off of * the windscreen heater. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 159 Operation

Function button: Function the Infotainment system using the Infotain- Special characteristics  ment button > function button Set- If the humidity and temperature outside the It enables activation and deactivation of tings > Units. vehicle are high, condensation can drip off  the PureAir and opens the submenu. the evaporator in the cooling system and The cooling system cannot be activated form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is If the air conditioning system cannot be normal and does not indicate a leak! Air conditioning user instructions switched on, this may be caused by the following: Note The interior cooling system only works when After starting the engine, any residual hu- the engine is running and fan is switched on. ● The engine is not running. midity in the air conditioner could mist over The air conditioner operates most effectively ● The fan is switched off. the windscreen. Switch on the defrost with the windows and the panoramic sliding ● The air conditioner fuse has blown. function as soon as possible to clear the sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has windscreen of condensation. ● The outside temperature is lower than ap- heated up after standing in the sun for some proximately +3°C (+38°F). time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows and the ● The air conditioner compressor has been panoramic sliding sunroof briefly. temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high. Climatronic: change the temperature unit ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air on the screen of the factory-fitted info- conditioner checked by a specialised work- tainment system shop. The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of

160 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 149 On the dash panel air vents.

Air vents Note When the outside temperature is very high, To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- selecting manual air recirculation mode for a Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- short period refreshes the vehicle interior lation in the vehicle interior, air vents sitive objects should never be placed in more quickly. ››› Fig. 149 1 should remain open. front of the air outlets as they may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de- coming from the air vents. switched off when the button  is press- tail) in the required direction to open and ed or the air distributor turned to . close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is in the  position, the corresponding air vent Switching the manual air recirculation is closed. Air recirculation mode mode on and off  ● Change the air direction using the ventila- Basic points Activate: press the  button until the warn- tion grille lever. ing lamp lights up. Air recirculation: There are other additional, non-adjustable Deactivate: press the  button until the air vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell  Manual recirculation warning lamp goes off. » and in the rear area of the interior. Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 161 Operation

Functioning mode of automatic air recir- ● If the cooling system is switched off and Heated windscreen* culation (air conditioning menu) air recirculation mode switched on, the With the automatic air recirculation mode windows can mist over very quickly, consid- activated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin erably limiting visibility. interior is enabled. If the system detects a ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it high concentration of hazardous substances is not required. in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of CAUTION impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off. Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condi- The system is unable to detect unpleasant tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the smells. cooling system vaporiser and on the activa- Fig. 150 Windscreen humidity and temperature ted charcoal cartridge of the dust and pol- The air recirculation will not connect auto- sensor. len filter, leading to a permanently un- matically in versions without humidity sensor pleasant smell. and in the following external conditions: The heated windscreen is comprised of a set of heated wires placed between the layers of ● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C Note the windscreen which, when electric current (+38°F). Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti- is supplied to them, heat up and cause the ● The cooling system is switched off and the vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant temperature of the glass to rise. outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F). odours from entering the vehicle interior Its function is to assist the air-conditioning when it is in reverse and while the automat- ● The cooling system is switched off, the system to prevent the windscreen from mist- ic windscreen wiper is working. outside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up. and the windscreen wipers are switched on. The system can be switched on manually or Activation/deactivation of automatic air re- automatically. circulation is done in the air conditioner menu, under Configuration. Manual activation ● Press the  button of the Climatronic WARNING control panel. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- ● Press the  function button to switch the duction on page 158. windscreen heating on or off.

162 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Air conditioning

Automatic activation To facilitate use of the heated windscreen it can turn on automatically. The Climatronic control panel can detect the danger of the windscreen misting thanks to its temperature and humidity sensors, switching the system on or off accordingly ››› Fig. 150. Moreover, it will also be activated automatically when the  button is pressed on the Climatronic control panel. Adjust it as follows for it to switch on automatically:

● Press the  button of the Climatronic control panel. ● Press the SETTINGS function button on the infotainment system. ● Switch the function on or off by pressing the Automatic windscreen heating function button.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 163 Infotainment System

Infotainment System the Infotainment system can distract your WARNING attention from the traffic. Connecting, inserting or removing a data ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. medium while driving can distract your at- Introduction ● Select volume settings that allow you to tention from the traffic and cause an acci- easily hear signals from outside the vehicle dent. Safety instructions related to the Info- at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens tainment system and horns). WARNING ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high Connecting leads for external devices may a volume setting, even if only for short peri- Travelling on today's roads requires the driv- obstruct the driver. er's full attention at all times. ods of time. ● Arrange the connecting leads so that Only operate the infotainment system and its they do not obstruct the driver. various functions when the traffic situation WARNING really permits this. The volume level may suddenly change WARNING when you switch audio source or connect a WARNING new audio source. External devices that are loose or not properly secured could move around the pas- ● Lower the base volume before connect- ● Before starting the trip, you should famil- senger compartment during a sudden driving or switching audio sources. iarise yourself with the different infotain- ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident ment system functions. and cause damage or injury. ● High audio volume may represent a dan- WARNING ● Never place or fit external devices to the ger to you and to others. The driving recommendations and traffic doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash ● Adjust the volume in a way that you can indications shown on the navigation system panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or distinguish surrounding noise, for example, may differ from the current traffic situa- near the area marked “AIRBAG” or be- horns and sirens, etc. tion. tween these areas and the occupants. Ex- ternal devices can cause serious injury in an ● Changes to the Infotainment system set- ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have accident, especially when the airbags in- tings should be made when the car is stop- priority over the recommendations and dis- flate. ped, or by a passenger. plays provided by the navigation system. ● Adjust your vehicle speed and driving WARNING style to suit visibility, weather, road and WARNING traffic conditions. Distracting the driver in any way can lead to The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm an accident and cause injuries. Operating movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries.

164 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Introduction

● Always keep the armrest closed while the CAUTION vehicle is in motion. Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage device and non-round media may damage WARNING the CD or DVD player. Opening a CD or DVD player's housing can ● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDs lead to injuries from invisible laser radia- should be used. tion. – Do not affix stickers or other items to ● Have CD or DVD players repaired only by the data medium. Stickers may peel off a qualified workshop. and damage the drive. – Do not use printable data media. Prin- CAUTION ted labels and coverings may peel off and damage the CD/DVD drive. The Infotainment system can be damaged – Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu- by the incorrect insertion of a data storage larly shaped CDs or DVDs. device or the insertion of an incompatible data storage device. – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker ● When inserting a data storage device, than normal CDs. make sure it is correctly positioned. ● Applying force may irreparably damage the memory card slot locking mechanism. CAUTION ● Only use compatible memory cards. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is dis- ● When inserting and removing CDs and torted. DVDs, always hold them at right angles to the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilting so as not to scratch them. Note ● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is For the proper functioning of the Infotain- already in the unit or being ejected, the ment system it is important that the date DVD drive may be irreparably damaged. Al- and time set in the vehicle are correct. ways wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 165 Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Navi System Plus

Fig. 151 Overview of the controls

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 6 Voice control 12 Settings button (search and selection) page 182 page 167 ››› 7 Full Link ››› page 172 ››› 2 Touchscreen page 168 ››› 8 Vehicle settings ›››  page 33, 3 Navigation Mode ››› page 193 ››› page 205 4 Media mode (audio sources) 9 Selecting the main menu ››› page 167 page 184 ››› 10 Volume. Off/on ››› page 167 5 Phone Mode page 206 ››› 11 Proximity sensor ››› page 170 166 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Introduction

General instructions for use can change settings for lowering the vol- Switching on and off ume in the Sound setup > Volume menu. To manually switch the Infotainment system Introduction on and off, briefly press the left rotary knob . If the setup is changed, this may change the Diagram of the menus display on the screen and in some cases, the When switching on, the system starts-up Infotainment system may behave in a man- The Infotainment system touchscreen can with the last set volume, provided that this ner different to that described in this man- be used to select the different main menus. does not exceed the preset maximum start- ual. up volume. Select Sound > Volume. Press the Infotainment button  to open the menus summary . The unit will switch off automatically when Note the key is removed from the ignition or when The display of the touchscreen's main menu ● Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly the on/off button is pressed (depending on can be switched between “grid” and “carou- pressing the touchscreen is sufficient to the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the sel” via the Settings > Display menu . operate the Infotainment system. Infotainment system is switched on again, it ● Not all listed function buttons and func- will switch off automatically after approxi- tions described may be available due to the mately 30 minutes (switch-off delay). device software used in your market. The Infotainment rotary/push knobs equipment is not faulty if a function button Note is missing from the screen. Rotary/push knobs ● The Infotainment system is a part of the ● Due to country-specific legislation, cer- The left-hand rotary knob  is the volume vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- tain functions may not be available on the control or the on/off button. cle. screen when the vehicle is travelling above ● If the battery has been disconnected, the a certain speed. The right-hand rotary knob is the setup button. ignition must be activated before switching ● Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle on the Infotainment system. may cause noise from the vehicle loud- Infotainment buttons speakers. ● Restrictions on the use of devices using The buttons on the unit are shown in this Bluetooth® technology may apply in some manual with the word “infotainment button” countries. For further information, contact and their function within a rectangle, for ex- the local authorities. ample, the infotainment button  . ● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol- The Infotainment buttons are used by press- ume of the audio source is automatically ing them or pressing and holding. lowered when reverse gear is selected. You https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 167 Infotainment System

Changing the basic volume lower the volume again before switching to The Infotainment system comes equipped another audio source. with a touchscreen. Increasing or decreasing the volume or Active areas of the screen that call up a cer- muting the sound tain function are called “function buttons”. Raise the volume: turn the volume control  Handling the function buttons and These buttons are operated by briefly press- clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on display instructions ing the screen or by pressing and holding. the multifunction steering wheel upward . The function buttons appear in the instruc- Lower the volume: turn the volume control tions with the label “function button” and a  clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on button symbol inside a rectangle . the multifunction steering wheel downward Function buttons start functions or open . submenus. The currently selected menu is Changes in volume are indicated by a volume displayed in the title bar ››› Fig. 152 A of the bar on the screen. The volume can be con- submenus. trolled using the steering wheel controls. In Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be this case, the changes in volume are dis- selected. played on the instrument panel by a volume bar. Fig. 152 View of some of the function buttons on Increase or decrease the size of the im- It is possible to preset certain volume set- the screen. ages displayed on the screen tings and adjustments. Select Sound > Vol- The size of the navigation map image ume ››› page 193 and, for example, photos when viewing images ››› page 184 can be enlarged Muting the Infotainment system sound or reduced. To do so, enlarge or reduce the ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise image displayed by moving two fingers. until it displays . Overview of screen and function buttons Muting the Infotainment system sound stops the media source that is playing The screen Display and function buttons: operation and displays . effect

The title bar shows the selected menu and, Note A Fig. 153 Sound setup menu where applicable, other function buttons. If the base volume has been considerably increased to play a certain audio source, 168 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Introduction

Display and function buttons: operation and Display and function buttons: operation and The entries on a list can be activated by effect effect pressing them on the screen directly or by using the adjustment button. B Press it to open another menu. Some functions or messages are accompanied by a check box and are activated   /  Mark list entries using the setup button The scroll bar is shown on the right and its or deactivated  by pressing said check and open them size depends on the entries in the list. box. Move the bar on the screen by pressing ● Turn the setup button to mark the entries C lightly and without lifting the finger, see OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection. on the list with a rectangle one by one and page 169, Opening list entries and continue searching the list in this manner. ››› Press to close a pop-up window or an input searching in lists. × window. ● Press the setup button to activate the marked entry on the list. Movable cursor: Move the cursor around Press them to change the setup adjust- the screen by pressing lightly and without /  ments one at a time. lifting the finger. Search lists (scrolling the screen) Move the slider around the screen by OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-  pressing it lightly and without lifting your The scroll bar is shown on the right and its sition, press that spot on the screen. finger. size depends on the entries in the list Fig. 154 1 . D Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left ››› and right arrows to move the sound ac- ● Briefly press the screen above or below the cording to preference. The cursor D will Opening list entries and searching in scroll marker. move. lists ● OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker OR: Press the central button to centre the stereo sound in the centre of the passen- and without lifting it, move it around the ger compartment screen. Lift your finger off the screen when you reach the desired position. Press it on some lists to move up a level,  ● one by one. OR: Place your finger in the centre of the screen and without lifting it, move it around Press to return from the submenus one at a the screen. Lift your finger off the screen BACK  time to the main menu or to undo the en- when you reach the desired position. tries made.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens  (options window) which displays other setup options. Fig. 154 Entries on a setup menu list.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 169 Infotainment System

Input masks with on-screen keypad Input windows for selecting a saved entry Function icon and text: operation and effect (e.g. selection of a destination address) Scroll bar, the size of which depends on It is only possible to select a sequence of let- 4 the number of matching entries. ters, numbers and special characters that matches a stored entry. Hold and press to display a pop-up window with the special characters based on said Suggestions for matching destinations ap- 5 letter. Press the desired character to enter pear depending on the characters entered in it. Some special characters can be written the input line ››› Fig. 155 4 . In the case of out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”). compound names, it is necessary to enter a  Press to enter a space. space. If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries, Press to delete characters in the input line from right to left. Fig. 155 Input window with on-screen keypad. the number of remaining entries is displayed  after the input line 3 . Pressing this function Press and hold to delete several characters. Input windows with on-screen keypad are button displays these remaining entries in a BACK  Press to close the input window. used for functions such as entering an entry list. name, selecting a destination address or entering a search term for searching long lists. Overview of the function buttons Proximity sensors The function buttons listed below are not Function icon and text: operation and effect available in all countries or for all topics. The Infotainment system is equipped with an Letters Press them to copy them into the input integrated proximity sensor Fig. 151 11 . Subsequent chapters only explain those and dig- ››› line. functions that differ from those in the screen its The image on the screen changes from dis- shown in the figure. Press to change the keypad to another lan- play mode to automatic operation when The input line with cursor is located in the guage. Keypad languages can be selected your hand moves toward it. In operation 1 top bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed from the menu System settings > Lan- mode, the function buttons are automatical- here. guage . ly highlighted to facilitate their use.

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad. Input windows for “free text input” Displays the number and opens the list of In the input masks for open text, you may 3 remaining selectable entries that match enter letters, numbers and special charac- the entered text. ters in any combination.

170 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Introduction

Additional information and display ››› Fig. 156 if any parameters have not been Function button: function options set or if the NEVER function button has not been pressed. To go to the previous or next parameter to set. The displays appearing on the screen may When a parameter has been set, the Function button: function PREVIOUS vary depending on the settings, and may dif- only way to reset it is from the main fer from those described here. menu, clicking on it, and not using the Closes the Configuration Wizard, and NEXT Previous/Next buttons. The status bar on the screen can display, for the main menu or last mode in which you used the Infotainment system will When setting any parameter, a confir- example, the current time and outside tem- CLOSE  appear. The next time you switch on mation mark will appear on it . perature. the system, the Configuration Wizard Once one or more settings have been will start up again. All displays can be viewed only after com- applied, click on this in the main menu pletely restarting the Infotainment system. Disables the possibility of changing the of the wizard to confirm and finalize the settings. settings of the Infotainment system. If FINISH NEVER you want to perform the initial system If there are any parameters you have setup, you must enter via System set- not set, the next time you connect the Initial configuration wizard up and select Configuration Wizard . Infotainment system, the Initial Config- uration Wizard will start up. START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

Press to configure the time and date (if A it has a navigation system it will be configured automatically with the GPS).

Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best re- B ception at that moment on all available bands (AM, FM and DAB).

Press to link your mobile telephone to C the Infotainment system. Fig. 156 Initial configuration wizard Press to select your home address using The initial configuration wizard will help you D your current position or by manually to set up your Infotainment system the first entering an address. time you switch it on. Every time you switch on the Infotainment system, the initial setup screen will appear https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 171 Infotainment System

 Connectivity infotainment button and then select ● Consult the instruction manual for the the Full Link context. mobile terminal. Data transfer The connection to Full Link is made through a USB interface. WARNING This communication can allow data to be The use of applications while driving can WARNING read and/or written. distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer for If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in- tracting the driver in any way can lead to an correctly secured in the vehicle, it could SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti- accident and cause injuries. move around the passenger compartment vate/deactivate the function and a drop- ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. in the event of a sudden driving manoeu- down menu called Operation via apps which vre, emergency stop or accident, resulting controls the level of interaction between the in injury. CAUTION apps and the system . ● While driving, mobile terminals must be ● In areas where special regulations apply securely fastened in position, outside the or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed the mobile terminal must be switched off at Full Link* away. all times. The radiation produced by the mobile terminal when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical WARNING Full Link technology description equipment, possibly resulting in malfunc- Any applications that are not suitable or tion or damage to the equipment. The Full Link system provides a way of bring- execute incorrectly may cause damage to ● CUPRA cannot be held liable for any ing together technologies that allow com- the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. damage caused to the vehicle as a result of munication between the Infotainment Sys- ● CUPRA recommends the use of the Apps the use of applications that are of poor tem and mobile devices: that SEAT provides for this vehicle. quality or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insuf- ● MirrorLink® ● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must activate the option Setup, Data transfer ficient coverage of the network, the loss of ● Android Auto™ for SEAT apps . data during transmission or the improper ● Apple CarPlay™ use of mobile terminals. ● The interaction level of the Apps on the system must be: ALLOW. Interfaces Note ● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli- To access the Full Link system, press the In- cations from improper use. ● Use of Full Link technology may result in  fotainment button (Full Link) or press the ● Never make modifications to the applica- high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan. tions. 172 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Connectivity

● CUPRA recommends having a high bat- You will have to go to a specialised CUPRA 1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have tery charge on the device when connected dealer or any SEAT dealership to unlock this Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it to Full Link. function. Otherwise, a message like this will as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- appear on the screen whenever you select ice. ● CUPRA recommends that to use Full Link, the “Date and time” should be correctly the feature ››› Fig. 157. 2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- configured. Select Settings > Date and Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™ Time. websites to confirm whether your phone ● SEAT applications are designed to com- Requirements for Full Link is compatible with the system. municate with the vehicle and interact with Mirror Link it via the Full Link connection, therefore its – Check smartphone compatibility: functionality is linked to the mobile device www.mirrorlink.com/phones being connected via USB. ® ● Information about the technical require- – MirrorLink 1.1 or higher ments, compatible devices, adapted appli- – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or cations and availability can be obtained at the CCC must be installed in the de- www.cupraofficial.com, at specialised CU- vice. PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership. Android Auto – Check smartphone compatibility. An- droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/ Is Full Link blocked? – Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher – Install Android Auto™ app Apple CarPlay – Check smartphone compatibility. Ap- ple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay – iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher – Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see phone settings) » Fig. 157 Message on Infotainment system screen. Fig. 158 Full Link Requirements

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 173 Infotainment System

3 USB cable connecting car to phone: Finally, a message will appear stating that da- use the USB cable approved and sup- ta transfer will commence when the device is plied by the phone's official distributor. connected. Please note that data is transferred over connections between your vehicle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selected, Activation of Full Link the technology compatible with your device can be used.

Note Depending on your smartphone, it may Fig. 160 Full Link menu have to be unlocked for the connection to occur. Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not necessary to establish the connection between the smartphone and Full Link. Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is necessary to enable all of the app features1). Fig. 159 Full Link Setup Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system ● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's USB port using a USB cable ››› page 212. ● In the main menu for the Full Link setup, select Activate data transfer for SEAT apps ››› Fig. 159:

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve additional charges. Please check the charges with your operator. 174 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Connectivity

What should I do if it does not con- Pairing of portable devices supporting which one to make the connection with nect? the MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ ››› Fig. 161. and/or Apple CarPlay™ technologies View of the device list Restart the mobile device iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car- Check the USB cable visually. Play™. Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam- There are some Android devices that sup- aged or worn. port MirrorLink® and Android Auto™. Clean the USB ports (device Bear in mind that once the device is connec- Visually check that and vehicle). the USB ports are ted it will not be available as an audio source. properly connec- Try another compatible mobile ted. device. Full Link setup Check that the vehicle and device USB Have the USB port replaced at Function button: function connections are not an authorised dealership. Fig. 161 Full Link menu damaged and/or  Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows the worn. Have the mobile device re- Carousel exchange of information between the vehicle and ap- paired or replace it. plications authorised by SEAT. When you enter the Full Link context for the Try another compatible mobile device. first time, the technologies available for pair- Last Mode ing the portable device are displayed. If a session using one technology ends with- Once the device connects via USB, the sys- out the disconnection being made from the tem will offer you the technologies available Infotainment system (simply by disconnect- for establishing a connection with your mo- ing the cable) then when the device is next bile phone. connected to it, the session will start without In the event of simultaneous connections the user being required to take any action1). between two devices with different operating systems, a choice will be presented for Information Consult the mobile device manual. »

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be unlocked in order to establish the connection. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 175 Infotainment System

Depends on each technology: MirrorLink® the portable device on the Infotainment system screen. 1. Availability in a country To avoid distracting the driver while driving, 2. Third party applications only specially adapted applications can be For further information: used ››› in Full Link technology description on page 172. MirrorLink®: www.mirrorlink.com Requirements Apple CarPlay™: In order to use MirrorLink®, the following re- www.apple.com/ios/carplay quirements must be met: Android Auto™: www.android.com/auto ● The mobile device must be compatible Fig. 162 Function buttons in the general view of with MirrorLink®. compatible applications. Note ● The mobile device must be connected to the Infotainment system via USB. ● In order to use Android Auto™ technology it is necessary to download the Android ● Depending on the mobile device used, a Auto™ application, located on Google suitable application must be installed for the Play™. use of MirrorLink® on the device. ● Only compatible applications can be used, in accordance with the technology Initiating the connection connected. ● In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to connect it to the Infotainment system via the USB connection. Fig. 163 Other MirrorLink function buttons. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will request that you accept the device. MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables communication between a portable device and Function buttons and possible messages the Infotainment system via USB. Using it makes it possible to display and man- Function button: function age the content and functions displayed on Full Link To return to the Full Link main menu.

176 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Connectivity

Function button: function Apple CarPlay™* ● If you start the session using Apple CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible 3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele- Press to close the open apps. Then to pair another device via Bluetooth®. The phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones only press the apps to be closed or the following message will appear in the main CLOSE APPS support Apple CarPlay™ Close all function button to close all Phone menu: the open applications. Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables Press to change to the mobile de- communication between a mobile tele- Please disconnect Apple CarPlay 1 : 1 vice screen. phone and the Infotainment system via USB. first, before you can connect another mobile telephone. SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup This makes it possible to display and operate the mobile telephone on the Infotainment Holding down the steering wheel multifunc- Press to return to the MirrorLink®   ››› Fig. 163 1 system screen. tion button or the button of the Info- main menu. tainment system will start the Apple™ “voice engine”. Press to display all the function but- Requirements Fig. 163 2 tons in the lower or upper right- ››› To return to the basic contents of the Info- hand margin of the screen. In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following requirements must be met: tainment system, press the SEAT icon. ››› Fig. 163  /  Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be hid- ● Make sure that you do not have Apple den or shown. CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set- ››› Fig. 151 12 Android Auto™* tings > General > Restrictions > CarPlay > ON. 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones. MirrorLink® setup ● The mobile device must be compatible Android Auto™ is a protocol which enables Function button: function with Apple CarPlay™. communication between a portable device and the Infotainment system via USB.  Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror- ● The mobile device must be connected to Link® pop-up windows in applications that support it. the Infotainment system via USB. This makes it possible to display and operate the mobile telephone on the Infotainment Initiating the connection system screen. In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- Requirements nect it to the Infotainment system via the In order to use Android Auto™, the following USB connection. requirements must be met: » ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will request that you accept the device. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 177 Infotainment System

● The mobile device must be compatible tainment system will start the Android™ Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? with Android Auto™. “voice engine”. ● The mobile device must be connected to No. The USB cable supplied with the device should be To return to the basic contents of the Info- used. the Infotainment system via USB. tainment system, press the Return to SEAT ● The Android Auto™ application should al- button. Is there a navigation option? ready be downloaded and installed on the Note Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link tech- mobile device. nologies if the technology is available in your country Some mobile devices require a change in and if you have the Navigation app. Initiating the connection the USB connection mode in order to use What is the difference between using the Full Link Android Auto™. In order to initiate the connection with the system navigator (via telephone) instead of another mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- ● Make sure that your mobile is in “Media navigator? nect it to the Infotainment system via the Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is USB connection, and to be sure to follow the connected by USB to the Infotainment sys- Benefits: Daily updates. Issues: data consumption, reception problems. instructions of the device being paired. tem. Can I send voice messages? ● The first connection to Android Auto™ Note must be done while the vehicle is stationary. With certified apps, you can answer but not send voice Android Auto™ requires the use of Goo- ● Once the first pop-up window about ac- messages. gle™ services, as well as certain basic appli- cepting data transfer between the car and cations of the Android system. What apps are visible while driving? the device has been accepted, a message ● will appear requesting that you check your Make sure that you always have Google™ Depending on the technology: services updated in order to use this tech- ® mobile device for the confirmations needed – for MirrorLink : SEAT-certified apps and CCC, nology. – for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, to pair it with the Infotainment system. – for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™. ● If you are initiating the session using Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo- Where can I find compatible apps?

bile telephone connects automatically via Frequently asked questions about Full Compatible apps can be found on the following links: ® Bluetooth to the Infotainment system tele- Link www.mirrorlink.com/ phone and it will not be possible to pair an- www.android.com/auto/ other mobile telephone via Bluetooth®. What is the connection method? www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Holding down the steering wheel multifunc- USB Cable. tion  button or the  button of the Info-

178 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Connectivity

Where can I download apps? Where can I find more information about Full Link? WLAN > Share connection via WLAN > Configuration. On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and If you have any questions, please see our Innova- on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™. tion/Connectivity sections on our website: www.cu- Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- praofficial.com or e-mail customercare@cupraoffi- vated: If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re- cial.com paired? ● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-

fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to If the problem is in the car, you should go to the dealer. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should see activate/deactivate the function and a drop- your mobile telephone vendor. Media Control* down menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction be- Will WhatsApp be certified? tween the apps and the system . Select Menu Introduction > Settings > Transfer data from mo- This depends on the technology. The Media Control1) app can be used to re- bile devices. Is MirrorLink® available in my country? motely operate some partial functions in Ra- You can obtain information about the tech- dio mode, Media mode and Navigation Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all the countries and re- nical requirements in the CUPRA website, in mode. Information can be exchanged be- gions where CUPRA operates. specialised CUPRA dealers or any SEAT deal- tween a device and the Infotainment System. What are the differences between MirrorLink®, An- ership. Each one of the functions is operated by droid Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? Telephone functions are not part of the means of a Tablet or partially by means of a functions of this app. MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and mobile phone. Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies. They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is Operating requirements: designed for mobile devices with the Android™ operating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. ● A tablet or mobile phone.

Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous CUPRA ● The app must be available on the corre- model? sponding device. ● There must be a WLAN connection be- No, this is not possible. tween the Infotainment System and the device. Select Menu > Media > Settings >

1) Availability depends on the country. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 179 Infotainment System

Data transmission and control func- ● Location-specific information, for exam- Setting up WLAN connection sharing tions ple, POIs. The Infotainment System can be used to share a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de- WLAN access point* vices. Establishing the connection with the wire- Introduction less network (WLAN) ● Press the Infotainment  button and The Infotainment System can be used to then press the Settings menu. share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devices ››› page 180, Setting up WLAN con- ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on nection sharing. the Infotainment System. To do so, press the WLAN function button. Fig. 164 Media Control Main menu The Infotainment System can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the wireless device that is to be connected. If The Infotainment System can be operated to provide Internet to the devices connected necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in- from other seats in the vehicle as follows, to the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 181, struction manual. with the help of Media Control: Setting up Internet access. ● Activate the mobile device assignment on ● Radio remote control. Note the Infotainment System. To do so, press the ● Multimedia playback remote control. ● Data transmission may incur charges. Enable WLAN connection button and activate Due to the high volume of data exchanged, the checkbox. The following information can be exchanged CUPRA recommends the use of a flat rate ● Enter and confirm the network key dis- between a device and the Infotainment Sys- mobile phone deal for data transmission. played on the wireless device. tem, depending on the country and the Mobile phone operators can provide the equipment: relevant information. The following settings can also be made on the menu Share connection: ● Navigation destinations. ● The exchange of data packages over the internet may generate additional costs, de- ● Security level: WPA2 encryption automati- Traffic information. pending on your mobile phone rate, partic- cally generates a network key. ● Social media contents. ularly if you are abroad (for example, roam- Network key: Network key automatically ● Audio transmission. ing rates). generated. Press the function button to ● Vehicle data. manually change the network key. The

180 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Connectivity

network key must have a minimum of 8 ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on ● Press the WLAN menu and then enter In- characters and a maximum of 63. the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the ternet access settings on your phone and SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 router starts flashing. activate the checkbox. characters). ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN de- ● Press the Find function button and select Do not send network name (SSID): Activate vice. The wireless (WLAN) connection is es- the wireless device you want from the list. the checkbox to deactivate the visibility tablished. ● If necessary, enter the network key of the of the wireless (WLAN) network. wireless device in the Infotainment System Repeat this process to connect other wire- and confirm with OK. The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- less devices. lished. To complete the connection, it may Manual settings: To manually enter the net- be necessary to enter other data into the work settings of an external wireless wireless device. Setting up Internet access (WLAN) device. Repeat this process to connect other wire- The Infotainment System can use the WLAN The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab- less devices. hotspot of an external wireless device to es- lished. To complete the connection, it may tablish an internet connection. be necessary to enter other data into the wireless device. 1) Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Establishing the connection with the wireless network (WLAN) Note Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on Due to the large number of different wire- a ciphered local wireless network quickly and less devices in existence, it is not possible simply. the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction manual. to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions. ● Establish the connection with the wireless ● Press the Infotainment  button and network (WLAN) ››› page 190. then press the Settings menu; OR access the ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN rout- Media or Media Control mode and press the er2) until the warning light on the router SETTINGS menu. starts flashing.

1) This function depends on the equipment and the country in question. 2) If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured manually. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 181 Infotainment System

Operating modes RADIO main menu function buttons Information and possible icons Function button: function Display: Meaning

Radio To change the group of memory buttons View the frequency or the name of the 1 slide a finger over the memory buttons station and, where applicable, the radio RADIO main menu from left to right or vice-versa A text. The name of the radio station and the radio text will only be displayed if BAND Allows you to select the frequency band. equipped with RDS and if it is active.

STATION Opens the list of currently receivable ra- RDS Off The RDS radio data service is deactivated. LIST dio from the active frequency band. Traffic information can be retrieved: select Allows you to select the frequency man- MANUAL TP Radio > Settings > Traffic sta- ually. tion.

Allows you to select the information  No stations with traffic news are available. VIEW shown on the screen. Only available in DAB mode. The radio station is stored on a memory  button. Opens the setup menu of the active fre- SETTINGS quency band (FM, AM or DAB). The tracking of alternative frequencies is Fig. 165 RADIO main menu. AF off disabled. Selects the previous or next stored station or of the station list. This setting can  /  be changed in the Radio settings menu Note (FM, AM, DAB). ● The availability of AM and DAB bands depends on the country and/or equipment. In 1 to 18 Memory buttons ››› page 183. the event that the AM and DAB bands are Stops the scan function (only visible not available, the BAND function button when the function is under way). It can text will not be shown. SCAN be activated in the settings menu (FM, ● Bear in mind that being underground, in AM and DAB). tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or mountains can interfere with radio signals. Fig. 166 Radio mode: station list (FM). ● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- Press the infotainment button  to open cles with a window aerial. the Radio main menu ››› Fig. 165.

182 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

● Radio stations are responsible for the Functions of the memory buttons content of the information they transmit. Move your finger over the screen from left to right or vice-versa.

Memory buttons Change mem- OR: Press one of the function but- ory bank tons ››› Fig. 167 A The memory buttons are displayed in three memory banks.

Keep and hold the desired memory Storing the sta- button until an audible signal is tion on the heard, the station will be stored on memory but- this memory button. You can also tons store a station from a station list.

A station logo can be assigned to the stations stored on the memory buttons. Storing the sta- A logo is automatically assigned tion logo on Fig. 167 RADIO main menu. from the database if the Advanced the memory radio settings option is enabled. buttons In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- A logo can also be assigned manual- tions from all available frequency wave- ly from an external data source lengths on the numbered function buttons. (USB/SD card). These function buttons are called “memory buttons”.

Functions of the memory buttons

Press the memory button corresponding to the desired station. Selecting the station from The stored stations can only be the memory played by pressing the correspond- buttons ing memory button provided it can be received at your current location.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 183 Infotainment System

Media MEDIA main menu Function buttons of the main Media menu Function button: function Introduction Indicates the media source being played. Press to select another media source “Media sources” are audio sources containing audio files on various different data stor- ››› page 186. age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external JUKEBOX : Internal hard drive (SSD) MP3 player). These audio files can be played ››› page 189. by the Infotainment system via their corresponding drives or audio input sockets (in- CD/DVD : Internal CD and DVD drive ternal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN ››› page 186. multi-media socket etc.). SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 : SD memory card Fig. 168 MEDIA main menu. ››› page 187. Copyright Using the Media main menu, different media SOURCE Audio and video files on data storage devices USB 1 , USB 2 : External data storage de- sources can be selected and played.  are usually protected by intellectual property vice connected to the USB port rights, as per the corresponding national and ● Press the infotainment button  to ››› page 187. international laws. Be aware of the current open the Radio main menu ››› Fig. 168. AUX : External audio source connected legal provisions! to the AUX-IN multimedia socket It will continue playing the last media source ››› page 188. Note selected from the same point. BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio ● Do not use memory card adapters. The media source being played is indicated on the dropdown list when pressing the ››› page 188. ● CUPRA assumes no liability for any deterioration or loss of files on data storage de- SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 168. WLAN : External audio source connected vices. If there is no available media source, the Me- by WLAN ››› page 190 dia main menu is displayed. SELECTION Opens the track list.

Changes track in Media mode or fast for-  /  ward/rewind.

Playback stops. The  function button  changes to  .

184 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Function button: function Messages and symbols on the MEDIA main Display: Meaning menu Playback is resumed. The  function b) There is no traffic news station available.  button changes to  . Display: Meaning DAB not available. Play more like this. Displays information about the artist b) Creates a virtual playlist that includes name, album name and song title (CD text  tracks with a similar rhythm to the one , ID3 tag on compressed audio files). a) Gracenote® is a database available on the Infotain- being played if available using Grace- ment system hard drive that contains information on note®. A Audio CD: displays track information if the tracks of different artists and albums. For the available via Gracenote®a). If no data is user to benefit from the functions offered by Grace- SETTINGS Opens the Media Settings menu. available, it only displays Track and the note®, the tracks must contain the artist and/or al- number corresponding to the position it bum data. Repeat all tracks. occupies on the data storage device. b) Depends on the market and unit in question. Repeats all the tracks that are on the View of album cover: If there are various  same memory level as the track being covers within the same folder/album, the Note played at that moment. If in the Media system only displays one of them. REPEAT ● When the media source is inserted, play- Settings menu the It prioritizes displaying the covers in the  Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is following manner: ing will not start automatically; it is neces- enabled, it also includes the subfolders. 1. Cover embedded in the file(s). sary for the user to select the source. Nor B 2. Image in file folder. will the media source change when it is The current track will be repeated.  3. Image provided by the Gracenote®a) da- ejected. REPEAT tabase. ● In order to see the different covers inside 4. Default icon for the connected device. of the same album/folder, make sure that Random play. If playing a video file, by pressing the icon the tracks contain different information Includes all the tracks that are on the (cover) it can be played on full screen. about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If same memory level as the track being not, you will see the same cover for all of MIX  played at that moment. If in the Media The playing time so far and time remaining tracks contained in the same album/folder. Settings menu the in minutes and seconds. In the case of au- C  Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is dio files with variable bit rates (VBR) the enabled, it also includes the subfolders. remaining time may vary.

The RDS radio data service is deactivated. RDS The RDS can be activated in the FM setup Offb) menu.

The TP function is active and can be tuned TPb) in.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 185 Infotainment System

Changing the Media source Function button: media source Insert or eject a CD or DVD

Internal CD/DVD drive CD/DVD ››› page 186.

SD CARD 1 SD memory card ››› page 187. SD CARD 2

USB 1 External data storage device connected to the USB port  USB 2 ››› page 187. External audio source connected to AUX the AUX-IN multimedia socket Fig. 169 MEDIA mode: change media source. ››› page 188. Fig. 170 Slots for data storage devices in the glove compartment. BT AUDIO Bluetooth® audio page 188. ● From the Media main menu, press the ›››  Infotainment button repeatedly to cy- External audio source connected The driver should refrain from operating the WLAN * cle through the available media sources. by WLAN ››› page 190 unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or change the data storage device before mov- ● OR: From the Media main menu, press the ing off! SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 169 and se- Note lect the desired media source. The Media source can be changed in the The CD and DVD drive can play audio CDs Track list view: select Media > View. and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs. In the pop-up window, the Media sources not selected are shown as deactivated (in Insert a CD or DVD grey). ● Hold the CD or DVD with the printed side When a Media source that has already been facing up. played is selected again, playback is resumed ● Push the CD or DVD into the DVD slot from the point at which it was stopped. ››› Fig. 170 3 to the point where it is drawn in automatically. Optional Media playback sources

Function button: media source Eject a CD or DVD ●  Internal hard drive (SSD) Press button 1 . JUKEBOX ››› page 189. 186 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

● The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected card from the system, the function button playback modes) is described in the appro- and must be removed within approximately becomes inactive (grey colour). priate chapters of this manual ››› page 184. 10 seconds. ● Press the inserted memory card. The memory card “jumps” to the eject position. Instructions and restrictions ● Remove the memory card. Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other Insert or eject a memory card media players depends on the unit. Unreadable memory card Depending on the features and the country, The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD If a memory card is inserted and the data age of 5 volts for a USB connection. cards. cannot be read, the relevant warning ap- External hard disks with a capacity greater pears. than 32 GB must be reformatted for the Inserting a memory card FAT32 file system in some circumstances. Insert the compatible memory card, bevel- You will find the necessary software and in- led edge first and with the label face up External data storage device connec- formation on the Internet. (contacts face down), into slot ted to the USB port  Take into account all other instructions and ››› Fig. 170 2 , until properly inserted. limitations regarding requirements for media Depending on the features and the country, sources. If a memory card cannot be inserted, make the vehicle may have one or two USB con- sure it is positioned correctly and is compati- nections ››› page 212. ble with the unit. Disconnecting Audio files on an external data storage de- Any connected data storage devices must  Removing a memory card vice connected to the USB port can be be prepared before their disconnection in played and controlled via the Infotainment The inserted memory cards must be pre- order to remove them. system. pared for removal. ● From the main Media menu, press the Where this manual refers to external data SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- ● From the main Media menu, press the storage devices, this means USB mass stor- tings menu or press the infotainment but- SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- age devices containing supported audio ton  and then press Settings , to open tings menu or press the infotainment but- files, such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB menu System settings. ton  and then press Settings , to open sticks. menu System settings. ● Press the Remove safely function button. A Only supported audio files are displayed and dropdown menu appears with the following ● Press the Remove safely function button. A played. Other files are ignored. dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and » options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and Further operation of the external data medi- USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memory um (changing track, selecting tracks and https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 187 Infotainment System

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the data stor- The connection of an external audio source ● Press Search for new device in order to con- age device from the system, the function is indicated by AUX on the screen. nect an external Bluetooth® audio source for button becomes inactive (grey colour). the first time ››› page 207. ● Now the data storage device can be dis- ● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audio connected. Connecting an external audio source source from the list. via Bluetooth® ● Please refer to the instructions on the Note screen of the Infotainment system and on ® ● Do not connect an external media player Bluetooth Audio mode allows you to listen the Bluetooth® audio source regarding the ® at the same time to play music via Blue- to audio files being played on a Bluetooth rest of the procedure. tooth® and via the USB port  with the In- audio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) con- fotainment system, as this could cause nected via Bluetooth® (audio playback by You may still need to manually start playback playback limitations. Bluetooth®) over the vehicle speakers. on the Bluetooth® source. ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, When playback on the Bluetooth® audio it cannot be simultaneously connected by Conditions source is stopped, the Infotainment system ® USB and by Bluetooth . ● The Bluetooth® audio source must support remains in Bluetooth® Audio mode. ● If a connected device is not recognised, the A2DP Bluetooth® profile. disconnect all the connected devices and ● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Controlling playback try connecting the device again.  Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio ● Do not use memory card adaptors, USB be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue- source can be controlled via the Infotain- extension cords or USB hubs! tooth ment system depends on the connected Bluetooth® audio source. Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer The available functions will depend on the External audio source connected to ● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the exter- Bluetooth® Audio profile that the connected the AUX-IN multimedia socket  nal Bluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tel- external player supports. ephone). Depending on the equipment and country With media players that support the AVRCP ● Lower the base volume on the Infotain- ® there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket. Bluetooth profile, playback on the Blue- ment system. tooth® audio source can be automatically The connected external audio source is ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the started or stopped when the unit is switched played over the vehicle speakers and cannot SOURCE function button and select to Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different be controlled via the Infotainment system BT audio . audio source. In addition, it is possible to controls. view or change the track via the Infotain- ment system. 188 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Note Jukebox (SSD) ● Press the  IMPORT function button. ● ● Due to the large number of possible Blue- Select the desired source from the Select tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to source menu. guarantee fault-free operation of all de- The data storage device is prepared. This op- scribed functions. eration may take a few seconds. ● To play music, do not link the external media player simultaneously to Bluetooth® ● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the and the USB interface of the infotainment files or folders to be imported. system, as this can cause limitations during ● If Select all is activated, all files and folders playback. on the data storage device will be imported. ● Do not connect an external media player ●  to play music via Bluetooth® and via the Press the IMPORT function button.  Fig. 171 Manage Jukebox USB port ››› page 187 at the same time Depending on the selection, all files and with the Infotainment system, as this could folders will be imported with the indicated cause playback limitations. The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive of the Infotainment system (SSD1)). name to the Jukebox. ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, it cannot be simultaneously connected by Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) and If no track information is available, the audio USB and by Bluetooth®. some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be files will be placed in the following folders: imported from different data storage devices Audio data CD to the jukebox and this used to play them. ■ Album The files will only be copied when the engine ■ Unknown albums is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and ■ Track.mp32) DVDs is prohibited ■ Artists Importing files ■ Unknown artists ■ ● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- Unknown albums tion button and then select Manage jukebox . ■ Track.mp32) »

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD). 2) The name and extension of the file are examples. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 189 Infotainment System

Functions and progress display during the ● Press the DELETE  function button. The on the internal hard drive and check the copying operation files and folders will be deleted according to data storage device. the selection made. While copying, an animation is displayed ● Due to copyright laws, before any change along with the progress percentage on the ● When the files have been deleted, a mes- in ownership of the Infotainment system, all import screen. sage will appear. files stored on the jukebox must be deleted. Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and ● Press the BACK function button to close ● There are several possible reasons why play files at the same time. the menu. files may be shown as inactive (grey): files that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files ● Press the Cancel function button to end Opening stored audio and video files that are already stored in the Jukebox or the import of the whole track that is current- files that take up more space than available ● Change to Jukebox (SSD) content. ly being imported. in the internal memory. ● To obtain information on the status of the When storing the tracks, they are stored un- import, press the Information function but- der different categories and lists according ton. to the information available. Connecting an external audio source ● Press the BACK function button to close The tracks saved can be checked and through WLAN* the import screen with the progress informa- opened from these lists according to differ- tion. ent categories. WLAN allows wireless connection between an external audio source (for example a ● When the file import ends, a message will Jukebox smart phone) and the Infotainment system. appear. ● Playlist To use this connection, the device being Deleting files ● Artist connected must have an app compatible with the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) com- ● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- ● Album munication protocol, allowing the app to tion button and then select Manage jukebox . ● Music genre provide the system with the available media ● Press the DELETE  function button. ● Title content. ● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the ● Video files or folders to be deleted. Conditions ● Non-playable files (an unsupported file has ● If Select all is activated, all the files and been imported). ● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed folders on the data storage device will be de- on the mobile device. leted. Note ● Having the Enable WLAN connection op- ● If the Infotainment system cancels a tion active, which can be found in the wire- copying operation, check the storage space less connection configuration. 190 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain- tem can be guaranteed, its operation de- US and Canada) by so-called region “codes”. ment system using a password generated by pends on the application itself. These DVDs can only be played on units that the system. The pairing must be done from are coded for the same region. the mobile device that you wish to connect The unit's DVD drive is configured to read to the Infotainment system. DVD video mode the regional code for the region in which the vehicle was originally sold. Starting the WLAN audio transfer ● Lower the base volume on the Infotain- Starting the DVD mode ment system. ● Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive. ● Start the UPnP app or the app for the playback of the WLAN audio source. The reading of DVD data may take a few seconds. ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select WLAN . The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) is ● Please refer to the instructions on the played. Next, the different DVD menus are screen of the Infotainment system and on displayed. the WLAN audio source regarding the rest of Fig. 172 DVD main menu. the procedure. Controlling a DVD menu ● Briefly touch the screen to activate the Controlling playback function buttons in the DVD mode main The extent to which the WLAN audio source menu ››› Fig. 172. can be controlled via the Infotainment system depends on the connected WLAN audio Function button: function source and the application used. SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

Note DVD To display the control menu and return to ● The Infotainment system does not pro- MENU the main DVD screen ››› Fig. 173. vide an internet connection, it only estab- A Chapter display. lishes a wireless connection between the Fig. 173 DVD mode control menu. mobile device and said system. Displays play time duration and remaining B ● Via the WLAN, only the connection be- Regional code of video DVD play time. » tween the device and the Infotainment sys- Quite often, the playback of DVD video is limited to certain regions (for example, to the https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 191 Infotainment System

Function button: function ● The Infotainment system screen only dis- Function button: function plays the image when the vehicle is stop-  : Move the control menu window. ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon- SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source. nects (the image), but the audio remains  : Minimise the control menu window. SELEC- Opens a list of image files. C active. TION  : Maximise the control menu window. The image viewed was obtained via GPS  : Close the control menu.  localisation and upon pressing this func- Use the arrow buttons to browse the DVD Images tion button, the navigator menu opens to D menu. Confirm the selection by pressing start a route to this destination. OK . Rotate the view of the image to the left or  /  the right. E Press to open the DVD main menu.  Reset the view of the image.  /  To move to the next or previous chapter. To stop the playback of a slideshow. The Playback stops. The  function button   function button changes to  .  changes to  .  To continue the playback of a slideshow. Playback is resumed. The  function but- The  function button changes to  .  ton changes to  . To change to the PREVIOUS or NEXT im- SET- This menu contains the Video (DVD) set- Fig. 174 Images main menu. age. TINGS tings.  /  Using the Images menu, image files can be The same function can be performed by sliding your finger horizontally across the Note viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- screen. show. ● The visual appearance of the DVD film SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. menus and the menu options which it of- The image files must be stored on a compat- fers are the responsibility of the DVD man- ible data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD ufacturer. card). Enlarging or reducing the view ● The difference in behaviour of some films To enlarge or reduce the view of the image ●  when using the same mode is the responsi- Press the Infotainment button and displayed: bility of the DVD manufacturer. then select the Images context. ● Stretch or reduce the image on the screen ● You may not be able to play video DVDs ● Press the SOURCE function button to se- using 2 fingers. which you have burned yourself. lect the source where the pictures in question are located. 192 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Rotating the view/image The destination is defined by entering an ad- Navigation area and updating navigation To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- data provided for this ( / ), you can also press tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also Roads and streets are subject to constant on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and, be taken into account in the route calcula- change (e.g. new roads, changes to street while continuing to press with your thumb, tion (dynamic route guidance ››› page 200). names and building numbers). Therefore, if slide another finger (e.g. your index finger) Spoken instructions and visual guidance on the navigation data is not updated, then er- around it like a compass either clockwise (to the navigation unit and on the instrument rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid- rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock- panel will direct you to your destination. ance. wise (to turn the image to the left). This will CUPRA recommends updating navigation rotate the image 90° with respect to its cur- CAUTION data on a regular basis. The navigation infor- rent position. The navigation announcements played may mation can be obtained at a specialised CU- be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-date navi- PRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. Requirements for viewing images gation data). Image files Maximum resolution Updating and installing navigation da- BMP 4MP Instructions for navigation ta JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode) When the Infotainment system is unable to The Infotainment system is equipped with an JPG 64MP receive any data from GPS satellites (due to a internal navigation data memory. The re- GIF 4MP dense tree canopy, underground car park), quired navigation data are already installed navigation can still continue using the vehi- on the system. PNG 4MP cle sensors. The Infotainment system always requires the Possible limitations in navigation navigation data that is currently valid for this unit in order to allow all functions to be used Navigation In areas that are not or are only partially digi- in full. Using an old version may lead to errors tised on the data storage device (e.g. insuffi- during navigation. cient definition of one-way streets and road Introduction categories), the Infotainment system will still Updating navigation data attempt to provide route guidance. General information The navigation data must be installed after Using all the data available, the Infotainment downloading. Navigation is not possible from system calculates the optimum route to the the memory card. » destination. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 193 Infotainment System

Installing navigation data Note Opening the main Navigation menu The installation process takes about 2 hours. ● The navigation memory card may not be ● Press the Infotainment system button  to open the last menu that was open in navi- If the Infotainment system is switched off, used as memory storage for other files. The gation. the installation process is paused and will au- Infotainment system will not recognise the tomatically resume when switched back on. files saved on it. ● CUPRA recommends a CLASS 101) memo- Function buttons and messages on the ● Switch the ignition on. ry card for the use of navigation data. The main Navigation menu use of other memory cards could limit its ● Insert the memory card containing the Function button: function navigation data ››› page 187. operation. A The split screen is displayed page 199. ● Press the Infotainment  button and ››› then select the System context. Messages and function buttons on the map dis- Navigation main menu B ● In the System settings menu, press the play ››› page 200. System information function button. NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination ● Press Update software to import the stored ››› page 195. navigation data. ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 196. ● Follow the instructions displayed on the MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destinations screen. ››› page 196.

Once installed, the memory card can be re- POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- moved. The memory card must be prepared tions and restaurants) within a particular search area for removal ››› page 187. ››› page 198.

VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the split CAUTION Fig. 175 Navigation main menu screen and show POI ››› Fig. 175 A ››› page 198. Do not remove the memory card while the SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settings menu. navigation data is being installed. The The Navigation main menu allows you to se- memory card may be irreparably damaged! lect a new destination, call up a previously used or stored destination and search for points of interest.

1) The speed class of an SD card. 194 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

New destination (enter destination) egories. When necessary, enter the name of On the map the city to refine the search. ● Select the destination on the map or enter it using GPS coordinates and confirm with ››› Fig. 176 OK . Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), which A allow you to move within the text. Function button: function

Save : To save the selected point of interest in the des- Address tination memory ››› page 196.

After entering a country and a town, you can Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another destina- start navigating towards the centre of the se- tion. lected town. Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga- Fig. 176 Search screen. When narrowing down the destination ad- tion Settings > Route options. dress, please note that every entry restricts ● In the Navigation main menu, press the the available range of subsequent selections. Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point of interest. New destination function button. For instance, if the street you are looking for ● Press the Options function button and se- is not in the postcode area you have selec- lect the required type of destination ted in a previous window, you will not be able (Search, Address, POI on the route or On to find the street at the street selection After starting route guidance map). stage. ● Using voice control*, if you say Town, street and number, without pauses, and Function button: function then the instruction “Start Route Guidance” Country : To select the desired country. a route to the given destination will start. City : To enter the desired city or postcode. Search Street : To enter the desired street name. Search for addresses and Points of Interest House number : To enter the desired house number. using the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 176. Junction : To select the desired intersection. For cities, post codes and points of interest, the full details must be entered. You can also Last destinations : Open the My destinations menu Fig. 177 Route calculation. » search for points of interest by names or cat- ››› page 196.

Start : Start route guidance to the selected address. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 195 Infotainment System

After starting route guidance, the route to A navigation announcement informing you Route the first destination will be calculated. that you have reached the “destination area” is given if the exact destination cannot be In the Navigation main menu, press the The calculation will be performed in accord- reached because it is located in a non-digi- Route function button. ance with the data selected in the Route tised area. options menu. The Route function button is only displayed During dynamic route guidance, you re- with route guidance activated. After starting route guidance, three alterna- ceive information about reported traffic tive routes will be suggested depending on congestion on the route. An additional navi- the selected setup Fig. 177. These 3 Function button: function ››› gation announcement is given if the route is routes correspond to the selectable route recalculated due to traffic congestion. Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance. options: Economical, Fast and Short. During a navigation announcement, you can Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new Route criteria: Meaning change its volume using the button  stopover ››› page 195. ››› Fig. 151 3 . Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10 km Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculated in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoid conges- by taking into consideration economic factors. For other adjustments to the navigation rection. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route function ommendations, select Navigation > Set- Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if it is button and then Cancel congestion . tings > Navigation announcements necessary to make a deviation. a) settings. Change route : The map of the calculated route ap- Orange route: Shortest route to the destination, even pears and by holding a finger on the route and drag- ging the finger across said map, the route is changed to if it results in longer travelling time. The route may have Note unconventional sections such as secondary roads. the road(s) that you want and the new route is then re- ● If you miss a turning during route guid- calculated. ance and are currently unable to turn back, ● Select the desired route by pressing it. Route details : View route information for current route. keep on driving until the navigation system Once the route has been calculated, the sys- offers a new route. a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus tem gives the first navigation announce- ● The quality of the navigation recommen- ment. Up to 3 navigation announcements dations given by the Infotainment system are given before a turn. depends on the navigation data available My destinations (destination memory) and any reported traffic problems. ● Press the adjustment knob Fig. 151 12 ››› The stored destinations can be selected to listen to the last audible navigation in- from the My destinations menu. struction. ● Press the My dests. function button in the A navigation announcement informs you main Navigation menu. when you have reached your “destination”. 196 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

● Select the desired function button. If you have not stored any routes or want to  Delete destination. Store position , Routes , Destinations , create a new route, press the New route Last destinations or Home address . function button and then follow the instruc- To start guidance direct to the selected tions as for a new destination, before press- destination. Destinations that come be-  fore the selected destination are ignor- Store position ing Store . ed. ● By pressing the Store position function but- Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol- To open the detailed view of the desti- ton, the vehicle's current position is stored as lowing function buttons:  nation in question. a Flagged destination in the destination memory. Function button: function Available function buttons. ● Mark the Flagged destination in the Delete : To delete a stored route. New dest. To add a new destination to the tour. destination memory. Destina- To add a new destination from My des- ● Edit : To edit and store a route. Press the Store function button. tions tinations to the tour. Start : To start route guidance. The name can be changed in the following Storing To store the created tour in the tour input window. Press the  function button memory. to store the destination. Function buttons and indications in the New route or Edit route menu Start To start route guidance.

Routes Function button or message: function or meaning Calculate To update calculated distance and estimated arrival time.a) In the Route mode, you can define various  Stopover. destinations (final destination and stop- Stop To stop route guidance to the active overs).  Destination. destination.b) The starting point of a route is always the To move a stopover or a destination to Estimated time of arrival at destination. current vehicle position determined by the ...  another position on the list. Press and Infotainment system. The destination is the drag to move the destination. Calculated distance to destination. end point of a route. Stopover destinations ... a) This function button is only displayed with route are driven to before the destination. guidance activated and when a destination has been ... Travelling time.  added to the tour. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the b) This function button is only displayed with route My Dests. function button. ... Distance to the next stopover.  guidance activated. » ● Press the Routes function button. The Press on the destination to display the function but- routes stored previously will appear. tons.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 197 Infotainment System

Last destinations Assigning the home address for the first time: ››› page 202, Importing Personal POI the category Personal POI is also shown. View of destinations for which a route has al- Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position as ready been started. the home address. In the Map settings menu, the categories of points of interest to display on the map Address : Press to enter the home address manually. My destinations can be configured. Up to 10 categories of Editing the home address: ● Press the Options function button and se- points of interest can be selected. lect the desired function button. The home address can be edited in the Navigation settings > Manage memory menu . Selecting a point of interest on the map Function button: function Function button: function Destination memory : View of destinations stored man- There are several points of interest in the area. ually and from imported vCards page 201, Import- Points of interest (POI) ››› 1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of inter- ing vCards (electronic business cards). est. Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites. The only point of interest in this zone. Press the Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have 2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of a stored address (postal address). interest.

Home address Quick POI search Only one address or position can be stored In the Navigation main menu, press the POI as the home address at any one time. The function button and the three main catego- stored home address can be edited or over- ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name written. of the point of interest to be searched using Fig. 178 Points of interest on the map. the new destination keypad, or press If a home address has already been stored, Search nearby on the map ››› table on route guidance will be started to the stored The points of interest saved in the navigation page 199. home address. data memory are divided into different point If a home address has not yet been stored, of interest categories. Each point of interest an address can be assigned as the home ad- category is assigned a symbol for display on View dress. the map. If a database of points of interest has been In the Navigation main menu, press the View imported into the Infotainment system, function button.

198 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Function button: function Split screen Function button: function

Map display in two dimensions (conven- Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and 2D  tional). GPS status (satellite reception).

Map display in three dimensions (bird's a) This function button is only shown when route eye view). guidance is not active or when predictive route guidance is active. 3D  Buildings are also displayed in three dimensions. The places of interest and Press the  function button to close the well-known buildings are shown in detail split screen. and in colour. At any moment during navigation, pressing a) To display the destination on the map. inside the map will make a pop-up menu appear with the following functions: Fig. 179 Split screen displayed. a) To display the route on the map. The split screen Fig. 179 A may display Function button: function Auto / Day / To change between day and night for- ››› Night mat. any of the information described below: Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the point selected on the map. Press to display the split screen ● Press on the name of the split screen to se- Split screen ››› page 199. lect a display option. Only when you press on an icon on the map:

POI Display points of interest on the map. POI : name of the point of interest (when only one Function button: function appears on the map). a) This function button is only displayed with route Audio : Indicates the selected audio source. Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you guidance activated. press on the map on various POIs grouped togeth- Compass : Displays a compass with the current travel- er). ling direction and indicates the current position of the vehicle (street name). Favourite : name of the favourite.

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres, Home : Home address. POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings up additional information Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

a) Most frequent routes : Information on the user's most Add stopover destination : only when you have an active frequent routes. route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only for the area around the point selected on the map. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 199 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function button: function Traffic reports and dynamic route guidance to the destination (TRAFFIC) Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active) To change the orientation of the map  (north-facing or direction of travel). This function is only available in 2D mode. Map display View map scale. Turn the setup button or move your fingers together/apart on the  touchscreen to change the scale of the map.

To select automatic scaling. If the function  is active, the symbol is displayed in blue.

Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few  seconds, it automatically returns to the last selected scale. Fig. 181 Traffic reports It can mute or repeat the last announce-  ment, or can change the announcement The Infotainment system constantly receives volume. traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back- Fig. 180 Messages and function buttons on the ground, provided a TMC traffic news station map display. Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equipment, can be received at the current location. The the road signs stored in the navigation data are displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > Map > station being listened to does not have to be Function buttons and messages on the Show road signs. the traffic news station. map display. To activate function buttons  and , press List of available traffic reports function button . ● Press the Infotainment  ››› Fig. 151 9 button and then select the Traffic context. Function button: function Dynamic route guidance  Current altitude indicator. In order for dynamic route guidance to func-  To centre the vehicle position on the map. tion, Dynamic route must be activated in To centre the destination on the map. This the route options. function button is only displayed if either If during route guidance a traffic report is re-  Display destination on map or Display ceived that affects the route being travelled, route on the map is selected ››› page 198. 200 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes an alternative route will be searched for if the Predictive navigation Importing vCards (electronic business Infotainment system calculates that time can cards) be saved. Importing vCards to the destination mem- Traffic reports on map (selection) ory Symbol: Meaning ● Insert the data storage device with the stored vCards or connect it to the Infotain-  : Slow traffic ment system ››› page 184. ● Press the SETTINGS function button in the  : Traffic jam main Navigation menu. ● In the Navigation settings menu, press  : Accident Fig. 182 Predictive navigation the Import destinations function button.  : Slippery road surface (ice or snow) ● Select the data carrier with the vCards When you activate Predictive navigation, the saved in the list. system detects and stores in the background  : Slippery road surface ● Press Import all vCards from this folder . routes that are frequently followed, without them being active destination routes. This ● Confirm the import notice with the OK  : Danger function has no navigation announcements function button. unless the user requires them, getting them  : Road works The saved vCards will now be in the destina- by pressing the adjustment knob tion memory ››› page 196 and may be used ››› Fig. 151 12 .  : Strong wind for navigation. ● On the main screen of the Navigation  : Road closed to traffic menu, in the pop-up window, press the Note Frequent routes button. To display frequently Only one address per vCard can be impor- During route guidance, traffic congestion followed routes press the Show on map but- ted. In the event any vCards have multiple that does not affect the route calculated is ton ››› Fig. 182. addresses, only the main address will be im- displayed in grey. ported.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 201 Infotainment System

Importing Personal POI Navigation with images ● If the image displayed was taken using GPS localisation, the  function button will ap- Importing the Personal POI to a points of pear. Press to start guidance to a destination. interest destination memory ● Insert the data storage device with the stored Personal POI or connect it to the Info- Route guidance in Demo mode tainment system ››› page 184. If demo mode is activated in the Navigation ● Press the Infotainment button  and Settings menu, an additional pop-up win- then select Settings. dow opens when you start route guidance. ● In the Settings menu, press the Manage memory function button. ● Pressing the Demo mode function button starts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti- ● Press Update my POIs and then press Fig. 183 Images main menu. nation you have entered. Update and Next to import the Personal POIs. Selecting an image and starting route ● If you press the Normal function button, a “real route guidance” starts. ● Confirm the import notification with the guidance OK function button. Bear in mind the requirements and formats of the compatible images. The stored Personal POI are now in the 1) points of interest destination memory ● Insert the data storage device with the Navigation in Offroad mode* ››› page 198 and can be used for navigation stored images or connect it to the Infotain- purposes. ment system. Introduction ● Press the Infotainment  button and The stored Personal POI can be deleted in Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad then select the Images context. the Navigation Settings menu. driving that provides directions in “non-digi- ● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 183 function tised areas” at low speeds. button and select the data storage device where the images are stored. Non-digitised areas are areas about which the system does not have information for the ● Select the desired image. streets or terrain. It does not detect streets, buildings or natural limits such as mountains

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus 202 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes or rivers, although they may be shown on the Function buttons in the Offroad Naviga- ● In the pop-up window, the user is able to map. tion menu plot the tour with a given destination or start plotting the route without giving a final desti- Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving Function button: function nation. on conventional roads as it does not detect one-way streets, motorway entries or similar. RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour. ● Starts plotting the route. MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a stor- The offroad markers can be recorded by in- ed Offroad tour. dicating a manual waypoint. Offroad Navigation Menu EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation. ● In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the ADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour waypoints defined manually are shown on Recording an Offroad tour the map by a marker.

Ending recording ● Press the STOP RECORDING function button in the main Offroad Navigation menu.

Managing stored Offroad tours Fig. 184 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function button in the main Navigation menu. Fig. 185 Recording an Offroad tour ● In the menu, press the Waypoint mode function button. An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor- ● The Offroad Navigation menu opens ed waypoints. ››› Fig. 184. Starting recording ● In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-up window press the RECORD pop-up button. Fig. 186 Offroad Navigation menu, stored tours »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 203 Infotainment System

● Press the MEMORY function button in the Creating an Offroad tour Stopping route guidance Offroad Navigation menu. ● Press the Options button on the screen ● A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if there and then press Stop . are any. End waypoint navigation When a tour is selected, the following icons will appear ››› Fig. 186: ● Press the EXIT function button in the Off- road Navigation menu.  Export the tour to an SD card.  Edit the name of the tour. WARNING  Delete the tour. Terrain features are disregarded during route guidance Drive slowly and following  Load tour the instructions in order to perform the Fig. 187 Offroad route guidance mode manoeuvre as far as possible! Function button: function Start route guidance ● The general direction of travel is indica- IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in ted straight ahead by direction arrows in ● Loads the stored Offroad tour. “.GPX” format. the Infotainment System pop-up window ● Starting off in a stored route is not detec- ››› Fig. 187 A . ted by the system automatically. Loading an Offroad tour Note When the Offroad tour is selected, press Play Settings  and the selected tour will be loaded onto If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is the Navigation system. Function button: function automatically stored if Offroad navigation is discontinued. Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad tour.

Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest point.

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the system switches to the map view.

204 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Vehicle Menu – Classic Display: the entire lengths of Only 3 of these items of information can be the revolutions per minute and speed- displayed at the same time, but the user ometer needles are shown. chooses which to display, and in what order, Introduction to using the Vehicle – Views 1, 2, 3: customise the information by moving the finger vertically over the dials. menu that appears in the digital cockpit. Only Press the Next  button to display the Lap 2 of these items of information can be 1) By pressing button  of the infotainment timer menu . displayed at the same time, but the user system you will access its main menu with chooses which to display, and in what the following options: Offroad* order, by moving the finger vertically If the corresponding equipment is available, ● VIEW over the dials. Depending on the ver- the information that appears is the following: sion, the Views can be memorised by ● MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio exiting the menu or keeping the View or Media function if the HDC descent con- 1. Compass. button pressed. trol* is not active). 2. Altimeter: altitude above sea level. ● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) Sport* 3. Turning angle of steered wheels. ● SETTINGS ›››  page 33 If the corresponding equipment is available, 4. Coolant temperature. the information that appears in the Sport With the function button VIEW you can ac- 5. Lubricating oil temperature cess the following information: option is the following: Only the altimeter and 2 more of these items 1. Instantaneous power expressed in kW of information can be displayed at the same Instrument panel 2. G forces time, but the user chooses which to display, Press the Instrument Panel button to choose and in what order, by moving their finger ver- 3. Turbo pressure, expressed in bar from the various display options and cus- tically over the dials. (“bar”), kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds tomise the information that appears in the per square inch (“psi”). Press the Setup Digital Cockpit page 95: Consumers ››› button to change the units of pressure. By pressing the CONSUMERS button, infor- – Automatic Display: default information 4. Coolant temperature depending on the selected Driving mation on the status of the vehicle's main 5. Oil temperature Mode. consumption devices is obtained. It is shown »

1) This lap timer is independent of the one that appears on the instrument panel. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 205 Infotainment System

via a consumption indicator bar in l/h Telephone system, restart your mobile by switching it off (gal/h)1). and on again. Some functions and setup can only be per- Driving data General information formed when the vehicle is stopped and are The onboard computer is equipped with 3 The Telephone functions described below not available on all mobile telephones. memories that work automatically. In these can be used through the Infotainment sys- memories you can see the distance travel- tem if there is a mobile telephone connected WARNING led, average speed, time passed, average ® to it via Bluetooth ››› page 208. General, mandatory, legal and country- consumption and autonomy of the vehicle. In order for the mobile telephone to be able specific instructions and laws for the use of to connect to the Infotainment system the mobile phones inside the vehicle must al- Ecotrainer* telephone must be equipped with Blue- ways be considered. If the corresponding equipment is available, tooth®. the ECOTRAINER will provide information on WARNING driving style. The information on driving style If there is no mobile telephone connected to Speaking by telephone and using the mo- is only evaluated and displayed when moving the Infotainment system, the telephone bile telephone management system whilst forward. management system will not be available. driving can distract you from the road and The instructions shown on the screen for the cause an accident. Vehicle status telephone menus will depend on the mobile ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. Press the Vehicle status button to access in- telephone used. There may be variations. ● Select volume settings that allow you to formation on the Vehicle status messag- ® Only use compatible Bluetooth devices. For easily hear signals from outside the vehicle es and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle further information on compatible Blue- at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens status messages are displayed, in addition to tooth® products, ask your nearest special- and horns). being specified on the corresponding but- ised CUPRA dealer, any SEAT dealership or ● In areas of little or no coverage or, in ton. check on the internet. some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under- Use the instruction manual of the mobile tel- pass, your call may be cut off and you may ephone and of any accessories. not be able to make even emergency calls. If you detect any operating issues between your mobile telephone and the Infotainment

1) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are in kg/h. 206 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

WARNING Note WARNING If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in- ● Restrictions on the use of devices using Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a correctly secured in the vehicle, it could Bluetooth® technology may apply in some risk of explosion! The mobile telephone move around the passenger compartment countries. For further information, contact can automatically connect to the mobile in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre the local authorities. telephone network again if it loses the ® or emergency stop, resulting in injury. ● If you wish to connect a device to the tel- Bluetooth connection to the telephone ● While the vehicle is in motion, always se- ephone management system via Blue- management system. cure the mobile telephone properly outside tooth® technology, consult the safety warn- the airbag deployment zone. ings in its instruction manual. Only use CAUTION compatible Bluetooth® devices. In areas where special regulations apply or WARNING the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, Mobile telephones may interfere with and both the telephone and the telephone alter the correct operation of pacemakers Places with special regulations management system must be switched off. if they are carried directly over them. The radiation produced by the mobile tele- Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo- phone when switched on may interfere with ● Maintain a minimum distance of at least bile’s Bluetooth® function in places with a sensitive technical and medical equipment, 20 centimetres between the aerials of the risk of explosion. In the majority of cases, possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam- mobile telephone and the pacemaker. these places are signposted, but not always age to the equipment. ● Do not carry your switched-on mobile clearly ››› in General information on telephone in your breast pocket directly page 206. They include, for example: over the pacemaker. Bluetooth® ● If you suspect interference, switch off the ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks mobile telephone immediately. ● The lower decks of boats and ferries. Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele- ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq- phone to be connected to your vehicle's tel- CAUTION uid gas (such as propane or butane). ephone management system. In order to use the telephone management system with a High speeds, poor weather or road condi- ● places where the air is laden with chemi- mobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo- tions and the quality of reception can all af- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal gy, it is first necessary to pair them. fect the audio quality of a telephone con- powder. versation in the vehicle. ® ● all other places where the vehicle engine Some Bluetooth mobile telephones detect must be switched off. and automatically connect when turning on the ignition if a connection has been previously established. For this to take place the telephone must be switched on and its » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 207 Infotainment System

® Bluetooth function activated, and there Note Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- must be no active Bluetooth® connection bile telephone. with other devices. To prevent them from being heard through the speakers, the button and mobile tele- During the pairing process, it is necessary to Bluetooth® connections are free. phone alert tones must be disconnected. enter data via the mobile telephone's key- Where necessary, disconnect the headset pad. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- from the mobile telephone you wish to tooth® SIG, Inc. connect to the system. Pairing a mobile telephone Bluetooth profiles® ● Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth® function is activated and visible. When a mobile phone is connected to the Pairing and connecting a mobile tele- telephone management system, a data ex- ● Press the infotainment  button. ® phone to the Infotainment system change takes place via one of the Bluetooth ● Press the Find telephone > Results function profiles. button. In order to manage a mobile telephone via ● Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When con- the Infotainment system, it is necessary to OR: necting a mobile telephone to the phone pair both devices once. ● Press the infotainment  button. manager through the HFP the calls can be For your safety, we recommend you make managed via the Infotainment system. the link when the vehicle is stationary. In ● Press the function button Setup > ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it some countries it is not possible to perform Select mobile phone > Results . easier to transmit audio to the infotainment the pairing with the vehicle running. OR: system with stereo quality. This function may require connecting additional profiles for Conditions ● Press the infotainment  button. managing and controlling audio playback. You must guarantee the following setup in ● Press the Settings > Bluetooth > ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): the mobile phone and the Infotainment sys- Find devices > Results button. Serves to download phone book contacts tem: from the mobile telephone to the Infotain- The name of the Bluetooth® function of your ment system. ● The ignition must be switched on. Infotainment system will be displayed on the ● Message profile (MAP): Serves the down- ● The Bluetooth® function of the mobile main Telephone screen and you can edit this load and synchronise short messages (SMS) telephone and the Infotainment system must name via the Bluetooth settings menu of the mobile telephone to the Infotainment be active as well as visibility. The search process can take up to 1 minute. system. ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone On the screen, the system will dynamically must be deactivated. update the names of the Bluetooth® devices found. 208 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

As soon as the search is completed, the Pairing and connection of mobile tele- ● Check that there are no requests pending ® names of the Bluetooth devices found are phones acceptance in your mobile phone. If there displayed on-screen. You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to are, this could block some of the functions in the Telephone menu. ● Select the Bluetooth® device you want to the Infotainment system, but there can only connect on the infotainment system. In cer- be two mobile phones simultaneously contain circumstances, it is possible that to finish nected as hands-free, and a third device ® the connection between the two devices, connected to the Bluetooth audio profile at Telephone main menu you must enter additional data in the mobile any time. telephone and Infotainment system. When the Infotainment system is switched ● Use your mobile telephone to enter and on, it automatically connects to the last con- confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the nected mobile telephone. If it is not possible display of the infotainment system. to connect to this mobile telephone, the telephone management system will try to auto- ● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requests matically connect to the next mobile tele- are received on the mobile telephone, make phone on the list of paired devices. sure to reply to them. The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con- OR: nection is approx. 10 meters. The active Bluetooth® connection disconnects if this ● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis- Fig. 188 Phone main menu. distance is exceeded. The connection is au- play of the Infotainment system with that tomatically re-established as soon as the shown on the mobile telephone. If they Assign a user profile device is once again within Bluetooth® range. match, confirm on both devices. The data from the phonebook, the call lists and the stored speed dial buttons are as- When the pairing has been finalized correct- WARNING signed to a user profile and remain stored on ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. Do not perform the pairing and connection the telephone management system. This in- The phone book, call list and SMS messages process while driving. This may cause an formation will be available every time the stored in the mobile phone will be loaded accident! mobile telephone is connected to the tele- once the requests have been accepted in phone management system. the mobile phone. After downloading, the Note data will be available on the Infotainment After the first connection, it will take a few system. ● It may be necessary to confirm the phone minutes for the data from the phonebook of book data and SMS transfer request on the the linked mobile phone to be available in mobile telephone. the Infotainment system. The next time that the mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 209 Infotainment System

the next journey) the phonebook is updated Function button: function Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 189 automatically. DIAL NUM- To open the number pad and enter a Name of the mobile network operator (pro- If any entries in the mobile phonebook have BER telephone number ››› page 211. A vider) to which the mobile telephone is con- been modified while connected, a manual nected. To open the phonebook of the connec- update of the phonebook data can be initi- CONTACTS ated from the User profile settings ted mobile telephone. View of stored telephone number or name. If the name stored in the phonebook has an as- menu . SMS To open the menu for SMS messages. B signed photo, it can be displayed: select Tel- ephone > Settings > User profile > Telephone management can store a maxi- To open call lists of the connected mo- CALLS Show pictures for contacts*. mum of 4 user profiles for mobile tele- bile telephone ››› page 211. phones. If you wish to link/connect another  Press to accept a call. To open the Telephone settings mobile phone, the oldest user profile will au- SETTINGS menu. Press to end a call. tomatically be replaced.  OR: Press to reject an incoming call. Telephone management system function buttons Display and symbols of the telephone Press to mute or to reactivate the ring tone  during an incoming call. ● Press the infotainment button  to management system open the Phone main menu. Press to mute the microphone during an ac-  tive call and to reactivate it.

Function button: function This button keeps the call active. While the call is on hold the listener will not hear the Name of connected mobile telephone.  conversation. To reactivate it, press the call 1 Press the icon to the left to connect or accept button . To reject it, press the reject pair with another mobile telephone. button . Speed dial buttons, to which telephone  Press to add a participant to the active call. 2 numbers from the phonebook may be assigned respectively. Charge status of a mobile telephone connec-  ted via “Hands-free profile” (HFP) Bluetooth®. To change to another telephone connected to the hands-free profile. This Fig. 189 Active call. Strength of coverage signal received by the button will only be visible when there  mobile telephone. 3 are two telephones connected as hands-free. The active user profile cor- responds to the telephone appearing on the screen.

210 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Operating modes

Enter telephone number menu Possible functions ● The Roadside Assistance and Information services might not work properly, for ex- To enter a country code, instead ample, if the vehicle and the operator of of the first two digits (internation- the connected mobile telephone are in dif- al access code e.g. “00”) you can Enter the coun- ferent countries. If you are not able to use enter the character “+”. try code these services contact an authorised CU- Press the function button 0 for PRA workshop. approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Breakdown serv- Press the function button to ob- ice call  tain help in the event of break- Call Menu (call lists) down. The Mobile Service in the network of specialised CUPRA Possible displays in the Calls menu dealers or the network of SEAT Fig. 190 Enter telephone number menu. dealerships is available for this Display: Meaning purpose. Open the Enter telephone number menu Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed Information call Press the function button to ob-  and unanswered calls. Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from  tain information on the CUPRA the PHONE main menu. brand and the additional services Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled contracted related to traffic and  on the mobile telephone and on the Infotain- Possible functions travel. ment system telephone management system. Press the  Voicemail function Entering a phone number with Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the button to make the call. calls received on the mobile telephone and on Enter telephone the keypad.  OR: Press the  function button the Infotainment system telephone manage- number Press the  function button to for about 2 seconds to make a ment system. make a call. Call mailbox  call.

Enter the first letters of the con- If the number for the mailbox has Note tact to find using the keypad. The not yet been stored, enter it and The availability of the call lists will depend available entries appear in the Select a contact confirm with OK . on the mobile phone used. from the list phonebook. Select the desired contact from Note the phonebook to make the call. ● Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your telephone bill.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 211 Infotainment System

Multimedia Depending on the special characteristics Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port. USB/AUX-INPort The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre console ››› Fig. 191. The operating description is located in ››› page 184. Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power socket. Fig. 193 Centre console: slot for mobile phone connection. These USB ports are located at the rear of Fig. 191 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input. the console, between the front seats The Connectivity Box includes different ››› Fig. 192. functions that will help to use your mobile device. They are the “Wireless Charger” and the “Mobile Signal Amplifier”. The Wireless Charger only features the “Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger” The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged with- Fig. 192 Centre console, rear section: USB con- out a cable. nectors. To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 212 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Multimedia

● Place your mobile device with Qi technolo- When you do so, make sure there are no ob- ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. gy1) in the middle of the pad with the screen jects between the pad and the mobile ● Qi technology does not allow you to facing up Fig. 193. phone. ››› charge more than one mobile device simul- When you do so, make sure there are no ob- Your mobile phone will automatically be taneously. jects between the pad and the mobile ready to make use of the external aerial. ● No improvement in the transmission phone. quality can be guaranteed if there is more WARNING than one mobile phone on the pad. The mobile phone will start charging auto- ● matically. For further information about The mobile phone may heat up due to the You are advised to keep the engine run- wireless charging. Think about the temper- ning to guarantee proper wireless charging whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- ature of your device before you pick it up, of your device. ogy, please check your mobile phone's user and take care when removing it. manual or visit the CUPRA website. ● When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, the charging will be performed through the medium specified by “Mobile Signal Amplifier” Note each mobile device manufacturer. The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to ● Your mobile device must support the Qi reduce the radiation in your vehicle and en- wireless inductive charging interface stand- joy better reception. ard for proper operation. ● If your mobile phone has a cover or a pro- For safety reasons, it is recommended that tective casing, this may affect the Connec- you pair the radio and the mobile device us- tivity Box functions. ing Bluetooth® and place the mobile phone ● There must be no metallic objects be- on the Connectivity Box pad, so as to have tween the pad and the mobile device that better reception without having to handle might affect the wireless charging or the the mobile phone. connection with the external aerial. To establish a connection with the vehicle's ● The charging time and the temperature external aerial: vary in accordance with the device used. ● ● Place your mobile device in the middle of To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mobile phone is correctly placed on the the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 193. ››› pad.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 213 Driving

The starter button text START ENGINE STOP Driving flashes like a heartbeat when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off. Start and driving Automatic ignition switch-off Starting and stopping the en- If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the vehicle key with them but leaving the ignition gine on, the ignition is not switched off automatically. The ignition is switched off automati- Starter button cally by pressing the lock button on the re- Fig. 195 On the right of the steering column: mote control  or manually by pressing the emergency start. sensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 110

Read the additional information carefully Emergency starting function ›››  page 30 If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, The vehicle engine is started with a starter an emergency start-up will be required. The button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must relevant message will appear in the dash be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of panel display. This may happen when, for ex- the front or rear seats. ample, the battery of the vehicle key button In vehicles with the Keyless Access is very low or flat: page 112 system, the engine can also be ››› ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- Fig. 194 In the lower part of the centre console: started with the key in the luggage compart- ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right start button. ment. trim of the steering column ››› Fig. 195, as Opening the driver's door when exiting the close as possible to the Kessy logo. vehicle activates the electronic lock on the ● The ignition connects and the engine steering column if the ignition is disabled. starts automatically.

Switching the ignition on/off manually Emergency disconnection Briefly push the starter button without If the engine does not switch off after briefly touching the brake ››› . pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

214 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- Instructions for the driver on the instru- Ignition is switched on onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ment panel display This driver message is displayed and a buzzer ond . ››› Press the brake is sounded when the driver door is opened ● The engine turns off automatically. This message appears on vehicles with an with the ignition switched on. automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start Engine restart feature the engine without having the brake pedal WARNING If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle pressed. Any accidental movement of the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 could result in serious injury. Select N or P seconds to restart it. A warning will display on ● When switching on the ignition, do not the dash panel screen. This message appears if you try to start or press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise stop the engine when the selector lever of After this interval, it will not be possible to the engine could start immediately. the automatic gearbox is not in position P or start the engine without a valid key inside the N. The engine can only be started and stop- vehicle. WARNING ped in those positions. If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- Automatic deactivation of the ignition on Engage position P; the vehicle can out due care, this may cause accidents and vehicles with the Start-Stop system move; doors can only close in po- serious injury. sition P. The ignition is switched off automatically ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- For safety reasons, this driver message ap- when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau- matic engine shutdown is active, if: pears and an audible warning sounds if the thorised person could lock the vehicle, selector lever of the automatic gearbox is start the engine or connect the ignition ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, not in position P after you switch off the igni- and, in this way, operate electronic equip- ● the driver does not step on any pedal, tion. Move the selector lever to the P posi- ment (e.g. the windows). ● the driver door is opened. tion, otherwise the vehicle could roll away. Gear change: selector lever in the Note After automatically turning off the ignition, if drive position! ● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- This driver message is displayed when the ate, take into account the instructions on tery has enough charge). If the driver locks selector lever is not in the position P when the screen of the dash panel. the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the driver door is opened. Additionally, a ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time the side light goes out. buzzing sound is emitted. Put the selector with the ignition on, the vehicle battery lever in position P, otherwise the vehicle might be discharged and it might not be could roll away. possible to start the engine. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 215 Driving

● If during the STOP phase you press the WARNING driving immediately. This helps the engine START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is reach operating temperature faster and re- ● Never run the engine in confined spaces, switched off and the button flashes. duces emissions. as the exhaust gases are poisonous. ● If the indication is displayed on the in- ● Electrical components with a high power ● Never leave the vehicle with the engine strument panel display “Start-Stop system consumption are switched off temporarily running, especially if a gear or gear range is deactivated: Start the engine manually”, when the engine starts. engaged. The vehicle could then suddenly the START ENGINE STOP button will blink. move or something strange could happen ● When starting with a cold engine, noise that would cause damage, fire or serious in- levels may briefly increase. This is quite jury. normal, and no cause for concern. Starting the engine ● When the outside temperature is below WARNING +5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some Starting the engine with the starter smoke may appear under the vehicle when Step Cold start sprays could explode or cause a the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. button ››› page 214 (Press & Drive). sudden increase in the engine speed. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 ● Never use sprays to cold start the engine. 1. is performed. Stopping the engine Move the selector lever to the P or N posi- CAUTION 2. tion. ● The starter motor or the engine may be Switch off the engine with the Step Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 194 damaged if you try to start the engine while starter button ››› page 214. without pressing the accelerator. For the driving or if you restart it immediately after engine to start there must be a valid key in switching it off. 1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› . the vehicle. 3. ● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine Press and hold the brake pedal until the After starting the engine, the light of the 2. speeds, pushing the engine too hard and step 4 is performed. START ENGINE STOP button changes to a rapid acceleration. fixed light indicating that the engine has 3. Move the selector lever to the P position. started. ● Do not start the engine by pushing the vehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en- Connect the electronic parking brake If the engine does not start, stop and wait 4. ter the catalytic converter and damage it. ››› page 217. for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If 4. necessary, carry out an emergency start Briefly press the start-up button ››› page 214. Note ››› Fig. 194. The START ENGINE STOP button 5. blinks again. If the engine fails to switch off, Disconnect the electronic parking brake ● Do not wait until the engine warms up perform an emergency disconnect 5. when you are about to start driving with the vehicle stationary; if you have ››› page 214. ››› page 217. good visibility through the windows, start

216 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

WARNING When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening Braking and parking the doors with the remote control, the Never switch off the engine while the vehi- START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- tention to the relevant starter system button. Information on the brakes trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious injury. Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light New brake pads of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brake With the engine switched off, after a few work when the ignition is switched off. pads have not yet reached their maximum seconds, the STOP ENGINE START button ● The brake servo does not work with the braking capacity, and need to be “run in” stops flashing and goes out. engine off. Therefore, you need to press first. However, you can compensate for the the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. With the engine running, the slightly reduced braking effect by applying ● Power steering does not work when the START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, in- more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid engine is not running. You need more dicating that the engine is running. The time overloading the brakes while running them strength to steer when the engine is switch- that lapses between the moment the user in. ed off. starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering button and the lighting changes from flash- Wear column could be locked, making it impossi- ing to fixed will depend on specific engine The rate of wear on the brake pads depends ble to control the vehicle. size characteristics. Upon switching the igni- a great deal on how you drive and the condition off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is CAUTION starts flashing again. a particular problem in urban traffic and short stretches, or with very sporty driving. If the engine is made to work hard for a long In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the time, it may overheat after being switched “My Beat” function also offers additional in- Depending on the speed, the braking force off. To prevent damage to the engine be- formation: and the environmental conditions (for exam- fore switching it off, leave it idle for approx. ● ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) 2 minutes in neutral. When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP noises may be produced on braking. button stays on, since, even though the engine is off, the Start-Stop system is active. Wet roads or road salt “My Beat” Function ● When the engine cannot be stated again In certain situations (for example, on driving with the Start-Stop system, page 238, and through flooded areas, in severe downpours For vehicles with a convenience key there is ››› needs to be started manually, the or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- the “My Beat” function. This feature provides START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate tion could be delayed if the discs and pads an additional indication of the vehicle igni- this fact. are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the » tion system.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 217 Driving

brakes should be “dried” by pressing the member that you will have to apply more sulting in longer stopping distances and brake pedal several times. pressure on the brake pedal and allow for greater wear. longer stopping distances. At high speed and with the windscreen wip- ● Before driving down a long, steep gradi- ers activated, the brake pads will briefly ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- Low brake fluid level touch the brake discs. This takes place, al- lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine though unnoticeable to the driver, at regular Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if braking and relieves the brakes. If you still intervals to improve the response time of the the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid have to use the brakes, it is better to brake brakes when they are wet. level is monitored electronically. firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously. The effectiveness of the brakes can also be Brake servo temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven Note for some distance without using the brakes The brake servo increases the pressure you when there is a lot of salt on the road in win- apply to the brake pedal. It works only when ● If the brake servo is out of action, for exter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the the engine is running. ample when the car is being towed, you will discs and pads can be removed by gently ap- have to press the brake pedal considerably plying the brakes a few times. WARNING harder than normal to make up for the lack of servo assistance. ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the Corrosion brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- ● If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or wheel There may be a tendency for corrosion to tion. Do not put other road users in danger: there is risk of causing an accident. covers, it is important that the flow of air to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the the front wheels is not obstructed, other- ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently wise the brakes can overheat. or the brakes are not used very often. neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an If the brakes are not used frequently, or if accident. rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is Control lamps clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can a few times at a moderately high speed . ››› form in the brake system. This reduces the  It lights up red efficiency of the brakes. Fault in the brake system Brake fluid level too low ››› page 317 or fault in the brake system. If the brake pedal travel should ever increase CAUTION  Do not carry on driving! suddenly, this may mean that one of the two ● brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- the nearest specialised workshop and have sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- 218 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

 It lights up red Electronic parking brake Releasing the electronic parking brake ● Switch the ignition on. Electronic parking brake ››› page 219. The warning lamp turns off when the electronic park- ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 196. At the ing brake is released. same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator  It lights up green pedal slightly. ● The control light of the Fig. 196 button Auto Hold function activated page 241. ››› ››› (arrow) and the red  control light of the display in the dash panel go out.  It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn. Automatic release of the electronic parking brake on starting the engine Fig. 196 Centre console, lower part: electronic WARNING parking brake button. The electronic parking brake is automatically switched off when starting if, after the driv- ● If the brake warning lamp does not go out The electronic parking brake replaces the or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid er's door is closed and the driver's seat belt handbrake. level in the reservoir is too low so there is a fastened, any of the following situations take risk of an accident ››› page 317, Brake fluid. place: Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob- Activating the electronic parking brake ● A gear range is engaged or switched to an- tain technical assistance. The electronic parking brake can be activa- other one and the accelerator pedal is lightly ●  ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, If the brake warning lamp lights up to- pressed. gether with the ABS lamp  this could be even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- due to an ABS fault. This could cause the vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- ● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. cle. exceptions that allow the automatic parking This could cause the rear to break away. brake to be released without the driver's seat Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek ● Pull and hold the  ››› Fig. 196 button. belt being fastened. technical assistance. ● The parking brake is activated when the The parking brake can be prevented from control light of the Fig. 196 button (arrow) ››› being automatically released by continuously and the red  control light of the display in pulling up the  Fig. 196 switch when the dash panel are on. ››› starting off. ● Release the button. The electronic parking brake is not disconnected until the  button is released. This »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 219 Driving

can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is ● Never use the electronic parking brake to Parking towed ››› page 296. stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Braking distances can be considerably lon- The electronic parking brake should always Automatic activation of the electronic ger, since, under certain circumstances, be applied when the vehicle is parked. parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- only the rear wheels brake. Always use the Always note the following points when park- correctly foot brake. ing the vehicle: In vehicles with automatic transmission, the ● Never accelerate from the engine when a – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. electronic parking brake is activated auto- gear range or a gear is engaged and the en- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly gine is running. The vehicle could move, – Apply the electronic parking brake. if: even if the electronic parking brake is activated. – Put it in 1st gear. ● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi- – Switch the engine off and remove the key tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. CAUTION from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel ● AND: the vehicle is stationary. To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally slightly to engage the steering lock. ● AND: the driver door is open. moving when parking it, first apply the – Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle. electronic parking brake and then remove Emergency braking function your foot from the brake pedal. Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients: Only use the emergency brake function if you are unable to stop the vehicle with the Note Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle foot brake ››› . ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. possible to disconnect the electronic park- ●  ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 196 button in ing brake. Use the jump-start turn the front wheels so that they point to- this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At ›››  page 52. the same time, an acoustic warning can be wards the kerb. ● When the electronic parking brake is ap- heard. ● plied or released, noises may be heard. If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn ● To stop the braking process, release the the front wheels so that they point away from ● The system performs automatic and au-  the kerb. button or press the accelerator. dible tests sporadically in the parked vehicle if some time elapses without the elec- ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the WARNING tronic parking brake being used. electronic parking brake firmly and putting it The improper use of the electronic parking in 1st gear. brake can cause accidents and serious injury.

220 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

WARNING Braking and stability systems Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury Electronic Stability Control (ESC) when you leave your vehicle unattended. Control lamps The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces ● Never park where the hot exhaust system the tendency to skid and improves the stabil- could ignite inflammable materials, such as  It lights up dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys- detects critical handling situations, such as ● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain tem. vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheel- in the vehicle when it is locked. They would As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the spin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the be unable to open the vehicle from the in- ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by re- side, and could become trapped in the ve- ABS. hicle in an emergency. In the event of an ducing the engine torque. The warning lamp emergency, locked doors will delay assis- will flash on the instrument panel when the  Flashes tance to vehicle occupants. ESC is intervening . ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. ESC or ASR activated. The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system They could set the vehicle in motion, for (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the example, by releasing the electronic park-  It lights up traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- ing brake or the gearshift lever, which ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque con- would cause the vehicle to move, but un- ESC in Sport mode. trol (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitiga- controllably. Or: ESC deactivated ››› page 223. tion*. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by ● Depending on weather conditions, it may changing the torque. become extremely hot or cold inside the  It lights up vehicle. This can be fatal. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS faulty or does not work. ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking until the vehicle has reached a The control lamps light up together when virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the ignition is switched on and should turn the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do time taken for the function check. not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is working. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 221 Driving

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) matically brake the towing vehicle within the Multi-collision Brake The brake assist system can reduce the re- limits of the system and mitigate the sway. In an accident, the multi-collision brake can quired braking distance. The braking force is Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of automatically boosted if you press the brake in all countries. skidding during the accident, which could pedal quickly in an emergency. You must lead to further collisions. keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- Electronic torque management (XDS) The multi-collision brake works for front, ger has passed. When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- side or rear accidents, when the airbag con- tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to trol unit records its activation level and the Traction control system (ASR) turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. accident takes place at a speed of over In this way, the wheel that is turning faster In the event of wheelspin, the traction con- 10 km/h (6 mph). The ESC automatically (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than trol system reduces the engine torque to brakes the vehicle, as long as the accident the inner wheel. This may mean that in cer- match the amount of grip available. This has not damaged the ESC, the brake hy- tain situations the torque delivered to the in- helps the car to start moving, accelerate or draulics or the on-board network climb a gradient. ner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is The following actions control automatic receiving a lower drive torque than it could braking during the accident: Electronic differential lock (EDL) transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral ● When the driver presses the accelerator, When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer the automatic braking does not take place. the spinning wheel and directs the power to or “lengthening” of the trajectory. the other driven wheel. This function is ac- ● When the braking pressure through press- The XDS system can detect and correct this tive up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. To prevent the disc brake of the braked tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside automatically. automatically if subjected to excessive loads. wheel and counter the excess driving torque ● Multi-collision braking will not be available The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL will of that wheel. This means that the driver's if ESC is malfunctioning. switch on again automatically when the desired trajectory is much more precise. brake has cooled down. The XDS system works in combination with WARNING the ESC and is always active, even when ASR ● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron- Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* traction control is disconnected, or the ESC ic torque control system cannot exceed the If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control in Sport mode or disconnected. limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al- the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the slippery roads. If you notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- 222 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

immediately to suit the road and traffic Connecting/disconnecting the ESC Disconnection of the ESC conditions. Do not be encouraged to take In some versions of the model, besides the risks by the presence of more safety sys- The ESC is switched on automatically when traction control system (ASR), the electronic tems. If you do, an accident may occur. the engine is started, and only works when stability programme (ESC) can also be ● Please remember that the accident risk the engine is running and includes the ABS, switched off. always increases if you drive fast, especially EDS and ASR systems. in corners or on a slippery road, or if you ● Deactivate the ESC function in the Easy follow too close behind the vehicle in front ESC in “Sport” mode Connect system using the  button and the SETTINGS > ESC System function but- of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and Sport mode can be connected via the Easy the electronic torque control system can- ton. Connect ›››  page 33 system menu. ESC is not prevent accidents: risk of accidents! restricted and the ASR is completely deacti- The electronic stability control (ESC) is dis- ● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- vated. connected, as well as the ASR function. The faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).  control lamp lights up and the ESC OFF Despite the control systems, the driven The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles wheels could spin, affecting the stability of with a driver information system* the driver message is displayed permanently on the in- the vehicle: risk of accident! will be informed that: strument panel display.

Electronic Stability Control Connecting the ESC Note (ESC): sport. Warning! Limited ● Activate the ESC function in the Easy Con- ● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- stability nect system using the  button and the rectly if the four wheels have identical SETTINGS > ESC System function button. tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius Disable ESC “Sport” mode of the tyres can cause the system to reduce Through the Easy Connect system menu The  control lamp and the ESC OFF mes- engine power when this is not desired. ›››  page 33. The warning lamp  will sage on the instrument panel switch off. ● The regulating processes of the systems switch off. For vehicles with a driver informa- can make noises when they intervene. tion system* the driver will be informed that: ESC in “Offroad” mode1) ●   If the warning lamp lights up, or al- Turn the Driving Experience button to select ternatively, there could be a fault Electronic Stability Control the Offroad mode and connect it ››› page 109. (ESC): on ››› page 272. The interventions of the ESC, as well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to irregular terrain. »

1) Only for 4Drive models. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 223 Driving

In the following exceptional situations it may Disable the ESC “Snow” mode Note make sense to activate the Offroad mode to Turn the Driving Experience button to select allow the wheels to spin: ● If the ESC Sport mode is selected, cruise a different driving mode ››› page 272. control* will be switched off. ● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un- ● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo- WARNING stuck. rarily reactivated to assist the driver during ● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. You should switch on the ESC Sport mode braking and will then switch back to passive only if the traffic conditions and your driv- mode when the brake pedal is released (de- ● When driving on rough terrain with much ing ability allow you to do so safely: risk of pending on the model version). of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels skidding! (axle articulation). ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ● Steep descents with braking on unpaved function will be limited to allow for a sporti- terrain. er drive. The driving wheels could spin and DSG automatic gearbox the vehicle could “skid”. For your safety we recommend that you turn ● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta- Introduction off the Offroad mode when it is not abso- bilisation function is not available. lutely necessary. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- WARNING Disable the ESC Offroad mode tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- Turn the Driving Experience button to select You should only activate the Offroad Mode mitted via two independent clutches. They a different driving mode ››› page 272. or disable the ASR if the experience of the replace the torque converter found on con- driver and traffic conditions allow it. Dan- ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for ger of skidding! ESC in “Snow” mode1) smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ● With the Offroad mode activated, the vehicle. Turn the Driving Experience button to select stabilisation function is limited. In particu- the “Snow” mode and connect it. lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery, The tiptronic system allows the driver to ››› page 272 Traction control system (ASR) the driving wheels could spin and the vehi- change gears manually if desired interventions adjust to the adhesion of cle could skid. ››› page 227, Engaging gears with the tip- snowy roads. tronic mode.

1) Only for 4Drive models. 224 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

Control lamps pressed before moving the selector lever ei- Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty ther in or out of position P. driving style. This setting makes use of the  It lights up green engine's maximum power output. When ac- R – Reverse gear celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable. The brake pedal is not engaged. Reverse gear must be engaged only when Press the brake pedal to move the selector To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal. the vehicle is stationary and the engine is lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- idling ››› . tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)  Flashes green . To move the selector lever to position R, the ››› The interlock button on the selector lever is not press- interlock button must be pressed in and at Under certain circumstances (e.g. when ed. the same time the brake pedal must be de- driving in mountains) it can be advantageous Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the selector lever lock. pressed. The reverse lights come on when to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode the selector lever is in the R position with the ››› page 227, in order to manually select gear ignition on. ratios to suit the driving conditions.

Selector lever positions N – Neutral (idling) WARNING

Read the additional information carefully With the selector lever in this position, the ● Take care not to accidentally press the ›››  page 38 gear is in neutral. accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehicle could otherwise start The selector lever position engaged is high- D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position moving immediately (in some cases even if lighted on the display in the instrument clus- the parking brake is engaged) resulting in ter. With the selector lever in the manual The selector lever in the D/S position ena- the risk of an accident. bles the gears to be controlled in normal gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged ● Never move the selector lever to R or P mode (D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode gear is also indicated on the display. when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- (S), move the selector lever backwards. Mov- tion could result in an accident. ing the lever again will select normal mode P – Parking lock (D). The selected driving mode is shown on ● With selector lever in any position (except P) the vehicle must always be held When the selector lever is in this position, the instrument panel display. the driven wheels are locked mechanically. with the foot brake when the engine is run- The parking lock must be engaged only In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati- ning. This is because an automatic gearbox when the vehicle is stationary ››› . cally selects the best gear ratio. This de- still transmits power even at idling speed, pends on the engine load, the road speed and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac- The interlock button (the button on the se- and the dynamic gear control programme celerator pedal must on no account be lector lever handle) must be pressed in and (DCP). pressed inadvertently when a gear is en- simultaneously the brake pedal must be de- gaged with the vehicle stationary. The »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 225 Driving

vehicle could otherwise start moving im- Selector lever lock When stationary, apply footbrake mediately (in some cases even if the park- while selecting a gear. ing brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- an accident. tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h ● While you are selecting a gear and the ve- (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) hicle is stopped with the engine running, do the lever lock is automatically deactivated in not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- position N. struction could result in an accident. The selector lever lock is not engaged if the ● As a driver you should never leave your selector lever is moved quickly through posi- vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is the handbrake and engage the parking lock Fig. 197 Selector lever lock. (P). stuck. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not depressed ● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake The selector lever lock prevents gears from and the lever is in position N for more than and put the selector lever in position P be- being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- fore opening the bonnet and working on hicle is not set in motion unintentionally. about two seconds. the vehicle with the engine running. Please The selector lever lock is released as follows: always observe the important safety warn- Interlock button ings ››› page 310, Working in the engine – Switch the ignition on. The interlock button on the selector lever compartment. – Press the brake pedal and, at the same handle prevents the driver from inadvertent- time, hold the lock button in the direction ly engaging certain gears. Press the button in Note of the arrow ››› Fig. 197. to disengage the selector lever lock. ● If the selector lever is moved accidentally Note to N when driving, release the accelerator Automatic selector lever lock and let the engine speed drop to idling be- With the ignition switched on, the selector ● If the selector lever lock does not engage, fore selecting gear range D or S again. lever is locked in the positions P and N. The there is a fault. The transmission is inter- ● Should the power supply to the selector brake pedal must be pressed to release the rupted to prevent the vehicle from acci- lever be interrupted in position P, the selec- lever while pressing the release button if the dentally moving. To lock the selector lever tor lever will be locked. If this should hap- selector lever is in the position P. As a re- again, press the brake pedal, place the se- pen the manual release can be used minder for the driver, with the lever in posi- lector lever in the P or N position and then ›››  page 38. tions P or N the following message will be engage a gear. shown on the display:

226 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle Changing gear manually with the gearshift does not move forwards or back. Proceed paddles to the next mode: The gearshift paddles can be used when the – When the vehicle does not move in the selector lever is in the position D/S or M. required direction, the system may not – Press the gearshift paddle + to select a have the gear range correctly engaged. higher gear Fig. 199. Press the brake pedal and engage the ››› gear range again. – Press the gearshift paddle – to select a – If the vehicle still does not move in the lower gear. required direction, there is a system – With the selector lever in position D/S, if malfunction. Seek specialist assistance Fig. 199 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers no paddle is operated during a short peri- and have the system checked. od of time, the gearbox control system The tiptronic gives the driver the option to switches back to automatic mode. To change gears manually. switch to permanent manual gear change Engaging gears with the tiptronic using the gearshift paddles, move the se- Changing gear manually with the selector lector lever from position D/S to the right. mode lever It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, When accelerating, the gearbox automati- both when the vehicle is stopped and while cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be- driving. fore the maximum engine speed is reached.

– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se- If you select a lower gear, the automatic lector lever from position D/S to the right. gearbox will not shift down until there is no As soon as the change is made the selector risk of over-revving the engine. level will be shown in the position M on the When the kick-down feature is used, the instrument panel display (for example M4 gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, de- means that the fourth gear is engaged). pending on road speed and engine speed. – Move the selector lever forwards + to se- Fig. 198 Centre console: changing gear with tip- lect a higher gear Fig. 198. Gear recommendation tronic ››› – Move the selector lever backwards – to A gear change will be recommended if the select a lower gear. gear you are in is not the most economical choice. If no gear-change is recommended, »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 227 Driving

it means that you are already in the most – Press and hold the interlock button (the Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” economical gear. button on the selector lever handle), move by increasing the engine speed when a the selector lever to the desired position, gear is engaged (pressing the accelerator) The display is only visible in tiptronic mode for instance D page 225, and release . page 227. ››› ››› ››› the interlock button. The following display symbols mean: Driving downhill: in some situations (on – Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a mountain roads or when towing a trailer or ●  Shifting up a gear slight movement can be felt). caravan) it can be advantageous to switch ●  Shifting down a gear – Release the brake and press the accelera- temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- tor ››› . gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- CAUTION ted manually to suit the driving conditions ››› . The gear-change indicator is intended to Stopping briefly help save fuel, but it is not intended to rec- – Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle On level ground it is sufficient to move the ommend the right gear for all driving situa- briefly when stationary (for instance at selector lever to position P. On slopes, first tions. In certain situations, only the driver traffic lights). Do not press the accelerator. engage the parking brake and then put the can choose the correct gear (for instance selection lever into the P position. This when overtaking, driving up a steep gradi- Stopping/Parking avoids overloading the locking mechanism ent or towing a trailer). and it will be easier to move the selector lev- If the driver door is opened and the selector er from position P. lever is not in position P, the vehicle could  move. The driver message will be: Gear WARNING Driving tips change: selector lever in the drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer will Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec- The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- sound. tor lever positions on page 225. cally as the vehicle moves. ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not – Press and hold the brake pedal . The engine can only start with the selector ››› use the brake pedal too often or for long lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, – Apply the handbrake. periods. Constant braking causes over- below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only heating in the brakes. This could signifi- – Move the selector lever to position P. start with the selector lever in position P. cantly reduce braking power, increase braking distance or even result in the total Holding the car on a hill failure of the brake system. Starting the vehicle – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- ● To avoid rolling back on gradients always – Press and hold the brake pedal. vent the vehicle from “moving backwards; hold the vehicle with the footbrake or if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› . handbrake if you have to stop.

228 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

CAUTION When the accelerator pedal is pressed right the launch-control you must disconnect the down past the point of resistance at full anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a low- Connect system menu ›››  page 33. The not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- er gear, depending on road speed and en- warning lamp  will stay switched on or will pressing the accelerator when a gear has gine speed. The upshift to the next higher flash slowly depending on whether or not been selected. This could cause overheat- gear is delayed until the engine reaches the vehicle has a driver information system*. ing and damage the automatic gearbox. maximum rpm. Apply the handbrake firmly or press the On vehicles with the driver information sys- brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and WARNING from rolling back. the corresponding text message Stability ● If you allow the car to roll with the selec- Please note that if the road surface is slip- control deactivated (temporary) appears tor lever in position N with the engine pery or wet, the kick-down feature could on the instrument panel to indicate the de- switched off, the automatic gearbox will be cause the driving wheels to spin, which activation status. damaged as it will not be lubricated. could result in skidding. ● When the engine is running, switch off the ● In certain driving situations or traffic con- 1) ditions, such as frequently starting, pro- traction control (ASR) . longed “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic Launch control program ● Turn the selector lever to the “S” or tip- jams with continuous stoppages, the gear- tronic position, or else select the sport driv- 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6- box could overheat causing damage! If the ing mode from the Drive Profile* Speed DSG with petrol engines superior to 140 warning lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle kW. ››› page 271. as soon as possible and wait for the gearbox ● Press the brake pedal firmly with your left to cool ››› page 230. The Launch control programme enables foot and hold it down for at least one sec- maximum acceleration. ond. Condition: the engine must have reached ● With your right foot, press the accelerator Kick-down feature operating temperature and the steering down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- wheel must not be turned. tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about celeration to be reached. The engine speed for launch-control is dif- 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). ferent on petrol and diesel engines. To use »

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver information system: the warning lamp stays on. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 229 Driving

● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Downhill speed control* maintained constant in all situations. Al- ways be prepared to use the brakes! WARNING The downhill speed control function helps ● Always adapt your driving style to the the driver when driving down steep gradients. traffic conditions. Emergency program ● Only use the launch control programme Downhill speed control is activated when the when road and traffic conditions permit, selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies A backup programme is in place if a fault and make sure your manner of driving and the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- should occur in the control system. accelerating the vehicle does not incon- matically engages a lower gear that is suita- If all the positions of the selector lever are venience or endanger other road users. ble for the slope. The downhill speed control shown over a light background on the instru- ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched function attempts to maintain the speed at ment panel display, there is a system fault on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC which the vehicle was travelling when the and the automatic gearbox will operate in are deactivated, the wheels may start to foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of with the backup programme. When the spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of physics and technical drive limitations). It backup programme is activated, it is possible accident! may be necessary to adjust the speed again to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds ● After putting the vehicle into gear, the using the foot brake in certain situations. and within a selected range of gears. In some “sport” mode of the ESC should be deacti- Given that the downhill speed control can cases driving in reverse gear may not be vated again by briefly pressing the OFF only change down to 3rd gear, on very steep possible. button. descents the tiptronic mode may be required. In this case, manually reduce the tip- CAUTION Note tronic to 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and reduce the charge on the brakes. If the gearbox operates with the backup ● After using the Launch control pro- programme, take the vehicle to a special- gramme, the temperature in the gearbox Downhill speed control is deactivated as ised workshop and have the fault repaired may have increased considerably. In this soon as the road levels out again or you press without delay. case, the programme could be disabled for the accelerator pedal. several minutes. The programme can be used again after the cooling phase. On vehicles with cruise control system* ››› page 242, downhill speed control is acti- ● Indications on the instrument panel Accelerating with the Launch control vated when you set a cruising speed. programme places a heavy load on all parts display of the vehicle. This can result in increased WARNING wear and tear. Clutch The downhill speed control cannot defy the  Clutch overheating! Please stop! laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be

230 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

The clutch has overheated and could be Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away Driver lamps and indications damaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- gearbox to cool with the engine at idling tance.  It lights up red speed and the selector lever in position P.  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your When the warning lamp and the driver mes- Faulty steering! Parking the vehicle driving accordingly sage switch off, have the fault corrected by a If the warning lamp remains on and the driver indica- specialised workshop without delay. If the Continue driving at moderate speeds. When tion appears, the power steering could be faulty. Do not keep driving. Seek specialist assistance. warning lamp and the driver message do not the warning lamp switches off, you can con- switch off, do not continue driving. Seek tinue driving in a normal manner. specialist assistance.  It lights up yellow  Gearbox: press the brake and engage a gear again. Address: System fault! You can keep driving Gearbox malfunctions If the warning lamp comes on, the steering could react If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle with more difficultly or more sensitivity than normal. In high temperature, this driver message will be addition, when driving in a straight line the steering and place the lever in the posi- displayed when the gearbox has cooled wheel may be off-centre. tion P. again. Drive slowly to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not continue driv- Steering lock: fault! Go to an Official ing. Seek specialist assistance. Service Address The electronic steering lock is malfunctioning.  Gearbox: System fault! You may Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as continue driving. Introduction to the subject possible and have the fault repaired. Have the fault corrected by a specialised The control lamp should light up for a few workshop without delay. Electro-mechanical power steering assists seconds when the ignition is switched on. It the driver when steering.  Gearbox: System fault! You can should go out once the engine is started. continue driving with restric- Electro-mechanical power steering adapts tions. Reverse gear disabled electronically to the speed of the car, torque WARNING and turning angle. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop If the warning lamps and the corresponding and have the fault repaired without delay. If the power steering should fail at any time messages are ignored when they light up, or the engine is switched off (for instance the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause ac-  Gearbox: System fault! You can when being towed), the car can still be cidents and severe injuries. continue driving in D until steered. However, more effort than normal ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- switching off the engine will be required to turn the steering wheel. sages. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 231 Driving

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity During its first few hours of running, the in- ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in and in a safe place. ternal friction in the engine is greater than accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and later on when all the moving parts have bed- ISO 1629. ded down. WARNING Choice of materials How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 Take it immediately to a specialised work- km influences the future engine perform- ● Use of recycled materials. shop and have the fault repaired: risk of ac- ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderate cident! ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part rate, especially when the engine is still cold: if its components are not easily separated. this will lead to less engine wear and tear and ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials CAUTION will prolong its useful life. originating from renewable sources. Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- You should also avoid driving with the engine responding text messages when they light ● Reduction of volatile components, includ- speed too low. Change down to a lower gear up may result in damage to the vehicle. ing odour, in plastic materials. when the engine no longer runs “smoothly”. If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injec- ● Use of CFC-free coolants. Note tion to protect the engine. Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions If the lamp  (in red yellow) lights up brief- dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive ly, you may continue driving. 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, Environmental compatibility hexavalent chromium.

Environmental protection is a top priority in Manufacturing methods Run-in and economical driving the design, choice of materials and manu- ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the facture of your new vehicle. protective wax for cavities. Running in the engine Constructive measures to encourage recy- ● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- A new vehicle should be run in over a dis- cling hicle transport. tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first ● Joints and connections designed for easy ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. 1,000 km the engine speed should not ex- dismantling. ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible en- tems. gine speed. In doing so, do not accelerate at ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- full throttle and do not drive with a trailer! tling. ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- From 1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) ● Increased use of single-grade materials. dues (RDF). you can gradually increase the engine rpm ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. and road speed. 232 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

● Use of systems for the recovery of residual Changing gear to save energy gine. Avoid running the engine at high heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, An effective way of saving is to change in ad- speed. etc.). vance to a higher gear. Running the engine ● The use of water-soluble paints. at high rpm in the lower gears uses an un- Regular maintenance necessary amount of fuel. Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced ● Accelerate gradually and without reaching Economical and environmentally- engine gives you the benefit of improved the “kick-down” position. friendly driving fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serv- Avoid driving at high speed Fuel consumption, environmental pollution iced engine can consume up to 10% more and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos- fuel than necessary. pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump- sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco- gases and noise pollution multiply dispropor- Avoid short journeys nomical driving style and proper anticipation tionately as speed is increased. Driving at The engine and catalytic converter need to of traffic conditions. The following section moderate speeds will help to save fuel. reach their optimal operating temperature gives you some tips on lessening the impact in order to minimise fuel consumption and on the environment and reducing your oper- Reduce idling time emissions. ating costs at the same time. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling A cold engine consumes a disproportionate is automatically reduced. In vehicles without amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- Foresight when driving the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off ing temperature after about four kilometres the engine, for example, at level crossings Acceleration causes the vehicle to consume (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re- and at traffic lights that remain red for long more fuel. If you think ahead when driving, turn to a normal level. you will need to brake less and thus acceler- periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and de- ate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll Check tyre pressure slowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in- pending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the stance when you can see that the next traffic switched off for a minimum of about 5 sec- correct pressures page 322 to save fuel. If lights are red). This takes advantage of the onds already saves more than the amount of ››› the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- engine braking effect, reducing wear on the fuel necessary for restarting. tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con- The engine takes a long time to warm up rolling resistance, under-inflation also in- sumption will drop to zero due to the overrun when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- creases tyre wear and impairs handling. » fuel cut-off. tant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the en- https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 233 Driving

Do not use winter tyres all year round as Power management sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur- they increase fuel consumption by up to rent and battery temperature. This enables 10%. the system to calculate the current power This system helps to ensure reliable level and charge condition of the battery. Avoid carrying unnecessary loads starting Residual current management Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- The power management controls the distri- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable bution of electrical energy and thus helps to The residual current management reduces to always check the luggage compartment to ensure that there is always enough power power consumption while the vehicle is make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- available to start the engine. parked. It controls the supply of power to the ing transported. various electrical devices while the ignition is If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- switched off. The system takes the battery Since the luggage rack increases the aero- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery diagnosis data into consideration. dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- will gradually lose its charge because certain move it when not needed. At speeds of electrical devices, such as the electronic Depending on the power level of the battery, 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save gearbox lock continues to draw current even switch off the individual electrical devices 12% of fuel. when the ignition is off. In some cases there one after the other to prevent the battery may not be enough power available to start from losing too much charge and to ensure Save electrical energy the engine. that the engine can be started reliably. The engine drives the alternator, thereby Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent generating electricity. This implies that any Dynamic power management power management system to control the increase in power consumption also increa- While the vehicle is moving, this function distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch distributes the available power to the various cantly improves reliability when starting the off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices electrical devices and systems according to engine, and also prolongs the useful life of that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- their requirements. The power management the battery. er at a high setting, the rear window heating ensures that on-board systems do not con- or the seat heating*. The main functions incorporated in the pow- sume more electrical power than the alter- er management system are battery diagno- nator can supply, and thus maintains the sis, residual current management and dy- maximum possible battery power level. namic power management. Note Battery diagnosis ● Neither is the power management system The battery diagnosis function constantly able to overcome the given physical limits. registers the condition of the battery. Sen-

234 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

Please remember that the power and use- riod. Some convenience functions, such as instance, that the seat heating* or the rear ful life of the battery are limited. remote vehicle opening, may not be availa- window heater is not working, they may have ble under certain circumstances. These been temporarily switched off or regulated ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will functions will be restored when you switch to a lower heat output. These systems will be not start, the alternator power failure or low battery charge level warning lamp will be on the ignition and start the engine. available again as soon as sufficient electrical shown  ››› page 109. power is available. With the engine switched off You may also notice that the engine runs at a For example, if you listen to the sound sys- slightly faster idling speed when necessary. Flat battery tem with the engine switched off the battery This is quite normal, and no cause for con- will run down. cern. The increased idling speed allows the alternator to meet the greater power re- Starting ability has first priority. If the energy consumption means there is a quirement and charge the battery at the risk that the engine will not start, a text will Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures same time. all place a heavy load on the battery. In these appear in vehicles with a driver information conditions a large amount of power is con- system*. sumed, but only a small amount is supplied. This driver indicator tells you that you must The situation is also critical if electrical devi- start the engine so that the battery can re- Engine management and emis- ces are in use when the engine is not run- charge. ning. In this case power is consumed when sion control system none is being generated. When the engine is running Introduction In these situations you will be aware that the Although the alternator generates electrical power management system is intervening to power, the battery can still become dis- WARNING control the distribution of electrical power. charged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being ● Because of the high temperatures which When the vehicle is parked for long peri- consumed but only a small amount supplied, can occur in the exhaust purification sys- ods especially if the battery is not fully charged tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil- initially. ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- If you do not drive your vehicle for a period haust can come into contact with flamma- of several days or weeks, the power manage- To restore the necessary energy balance, the ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- system will then temporarily shut off the at the forest edge). Fire hazard! vices one by one or reduce the amount of electrical devices that are using a lot of pow- ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle current they are using. This limits the er, or reduce the current they are consum- around the area of the exhaust system: Fire amount of power consumed and helps to ing. Heating systems in particular use a large hazard! ensure reliable starting even after a long pe- amount of electrical power. If you notice, for https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 235 Driving

Control lights Catalytic converter For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is To maintain the useful life of the catalytic  It lights up working perfectly, there may be a smell of converter sulphur from the exhaust gas under some Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty lamb- ● Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- conditions. This depends on the sulphur da sensor). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- gines, as lead damages the catalytic convert- content of the fuel used. Quite often the alised workshop to have the engine checked. er. problem can be solved by changing to another brand of fuel. ● Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.  Flashes ● For engine oil changes, do not replenish Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic with too much engine oil ››› page 315, Top- converter. ping up engine oil. Driving tips Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci- ● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump alised workshop to have the engine checked. leads if necessary ›››  page 52. Driving on flooded roads

 It lights up If you notice misfiring, uneven running or To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re- ing through water, for example, along a floo- Fault in the management of the gasoline engine. duce speed immediately and have the vehi- Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop as ded road, please observe the following: cle inspected at the nearest specialised soon as possible. workshop. In general, the exhaust warning ● The water should never come above the The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Control) lights lamp  will light up when any of the descri- lower edge of the bodywork. up when the ignition is switched on while system oper- bed symptoms occur . If this happens, un- ● Drive at pedestrian speed. ation is being verified. It should go out once the engine burnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and is started. escape into the environment. The catalytic WARNING converter can also be damaged by overheat- Note ing. After driving through water, mud, sludge, etc., the braking effect can be delayed While the  or  control lamps are on, slightly due to moisture build-up on the there may be faults in the engine, fuel con- CAUTION discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes sumption may go up and the engine might Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- carefully several times will remove the lose power. cause the irregularity of the fuel supply moisture and restore the full braking effect. may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter. 236 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Start and driving

CAUTION cally according to your driving style and the Off-roader? road conditions. Also see ››› page 221. ● Driving through flooded areas may se- Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-roader: it verely damage vehicle components such as The four-wheel drive is specially designed to does not have enough ground clearance to the engine, transmission, running gear or complement the superior engine power. be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid electrical system. This combination gives the vehicle excep- rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as ● Whenever driving through water, the tional handling and performance capabili- possible. Start-Stop system* must be switched off ties, both on normal roads and in more diffi- ››› page 238. cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even WARNING so (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should important to observe certain safety points Note always adjust your speed to suit the condi- ››› . tions. Do not let the extra safety features ● Check the depth of the water before en- tempt you into taking any risks when driv- tering the flooded zone. Winter tyres ing. Risk of accident! ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will ● The braking capability of your vehicle is or stop the engine in any situation. have plenty of traction in winter conditions, limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no ● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo- even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, different from a car without four-wheel site direction may splash water that could we still recommend that winter tyres or all- drive. So do not be tempted to drive too exceed the maximum permitted water season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in height for your vehicle. give even better braking response. these conditions. Risk of accident! ● Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion). Snow chains ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose On roads where snow chains are mandatory, contact with the road if the car is driven too this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive fast. If this should happen, there will be no Total traction (4Drive) ›››  page 50. sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel On four-wheel drive models, the engine Changing tyres drive car. For this reason you should always power is distributed to all four wheels choose a driving speed suitable for the road On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four conditions. Risk of accident! General notes tyres must have the same rolling circumference. Also avoid using tyres with varying On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine tread depths ››› page 324. power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automati-

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 237 Driving

Driver assistance systems Description and operation the Auto Hold* system, when the system is active, the engine will not start if you remove The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and your foot from the brake pedal. The car

Start-Stop system reduce CO2 emissions. starts when you press the accelerator pedal. In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automat- Basic requirements for the Start-Stop Control lamps ically switch off when the vehicle stops or is mode stopping; for example when stopping at traf-  It lights up fic lights. The ignition remains switched on ● The driver door must be closed. during the stopping phase. The engine auto- ● The driver must have their seat belt fas- The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- matically switches back on when required. In gine shutdown is active. tened. this situation, the light of the ● The bonnet must be closed. START ENGINE STOP button stays on. . It lights up ● The engine must have reached a minimum As soon as the ignition is switched on, the service temperature. The Start-Stop system is not available. Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. ted. Instructions for the driver on the instru- ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep Further information about the Start-Stop ment panel display slope. system can be found on the Easy Connect Start-Stop system deactivated. system: by pressing the button  in the Ve- The system can interrupt the Start-Stop Start the engine manually hicle status menu. mode frequently for different reasons. This driver message is displayed when certain conditions are not met during the stop- Stopping and starting the engine The engine does not switch off ping phase and the Start-Stop system can- ● Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a Before the stopping phase, the system veri- not restart the engine. The engine must be stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down fies whether certain conditions are met. The started manually. with your foot. The engine will switch off. engine does not switch off, in the following The warning lamp  will appear in the dis- Start-Stop system: Fault! Function situations for example: play. The engine may stop before the vehicle not available comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at ● The engine has not yet reached the mini- There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehi- mum required temperature for the Start- the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault cle’s gearbox). Stop mode. repaired. ● When you take your foot off the brake ● The interior temperature selected for the pedal the engine will start up again. The air conditioner has not yet been reached. warning lamp will switch off. In vehicles with ● The interior temperature is very high/low. 238 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

● Defrost function button activated Additional information related to the au- may also be needed to turn the steering ›››  page 39. tomatic gearbox wheel or to brake. As you cannot steer and ● The parking aid* is switched on. The engine stops with the selector lever in brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk of accidents and serious injury. ● The battery is very low. the P, D and N positions. If the selector lever is in P, the engine will also remain off when ● Never remove the key from the ignition if ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is the foot is removed from the brake pedal. In the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the being turned. order to start the engine up again the accel- steering could lock making it impossible to ● If there is a danger of misting. erator must be pressed, or another gear en- steer the vehicle. ● After engaging reverse gear. gaged or the brake released. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in ● In case of a very steep gradient. If the selector lever is placed in position R the engine compartment page 240. during the stopping phase, the engine will ››› . The indication is shown on the instrument start up again. panel display, and in addition, the driver in- CAUTION formation system* shows, . When you place the selector lever in the S position or in the Tiptronic mode, the The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded The engine starts by itself Start/Stop system will prevent the engine from switching off. areas ››› page 240. During a stopping phase the normal Start- Change from position D to P to prevent the Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow- Note ing situations: The engine restarts by itself engine from accidentally starting when without involvement from the driver. changing and passing by position R. ● You can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or in- ● The interior temperature differs from the Additional information about vehicles with creasing the brake force applied. While the value selected on the air conditioner. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly press- ● Defrost function button activated In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will ed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping  page 39. ››› start up again in certain operating conditions and starting for example. As soon as strong ● The brake has been pressed several times if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the consecutively. ahead drives off again. engine will stop. ● The battery is too low. ● If the selector lever is placed in position WARNING D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, the ● High power consumption. ● Never switch the engine off until the ve- vehicle must be driven at a speed faster hicle is stationary. The brake servo and than 10 km/h (6 mph) for the system to re- power steering functions will not be com- turn to conditions in which the engine can pletely covered under warranty. More force be stopped. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 239 Driving

Manually switching on/off the Start- Hill Descent Control (HDC) mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of Stop system 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed Control lamps within the limit by pressing the accelerator or the brake. At this point the function is inter-  It lights up white rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated. Hill Descent Control is active. Even so, it is imperative that the surface  It lights up grey guarantees sufficient adhesion. For this reason, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switch- function when, for example, descending a ed on, but is not adjusting. slope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Some control and warning lamps will light up Hill Descent Control is available when the Fig. 200 Centre console: Start-Stop system but- briefly when the ignition is switched on to dash panel display shows the message . ton. check certain functions. They will switch off Hill Descent Control automatically inter- after a few seconds. If you do not wish to use the system, you can venes if the following conditions are met: switch it off manually. WARNING ● The vehicle engine is running. ● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● The Offroad driving profile has been se- system, press the  button ››› Fig. 200. trol and warning lamps on page 109. lected ››› page 271. Driving at a speed below 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message  is shown The button symbol  remains lit up yellow on the dash panel display). when the system is switched off. Description and operation ● The slope of the descent is at least 10% Note when driving forward and 9% when driving in Hill Descent Control limits the speed on reverse. The system is automatically switched on steep descents by automatically braking all each time the engine is deliberately stop- ● The brake and the accelerator are not four wheels, both when moving forward and ped during a stopping phase. The engine pressed. in reverse. As the anti-lock brake system re- will start automatically. mains active, it prevents the wheels from Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- locking. ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function may be dis- After starting the descent of a slope below connected manually in the Easy Connect 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- 240 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems system by pressing the  button > HDC The control light of the  ››› Fig. 201 button Conditions for keeping the vehicle station- function button ›››  Fig. 42. remains on when the Auto Hold function is ary with the Auto Hold function connected. ● The driver door must be closed. WARNING Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac- sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ● The engine is running. cident could occur and cause injury. ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- ● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary od of time with the engine running, for ex- Switching the Auto Hold function on and system that in some situations may not suf- ample, when going up a slope, when stop- off ficiently brake the vehicle when going ped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with in- down a slope. termittent stops. Press the button  ››› . The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold ● The speed of the vehicle may increase When connected, the Auto Hold function function is switched off. despite the intervention of Hill Descent automatically prevents the vehicle from roll- Control. ing when stationary without pressing the Automatically engaging and disengaging brake pedal. the Auto Hold function After detecting that the vehicle is stationary If the Auto Hold function was switched on Auto Hold Function and the brake pedal has been released, the with the  button before disengaging the ig- Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The nition, the function will remain on after the Description and operation driver can lift their foot off the brake pedal. ignition is re-engaged. When the driver touches the accelerator If the Auto Hold function was not switched pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- on, it will automatically remain off next time ing, the Auto Hold function releases the the ignition is engaged. brake. The vehicle moves according to the slope of the road. The Auto Hold function is automatically If the vehicle is stationary and one of the switched on if the following conditions are conditions required by the Auto Hold func- met: tion is impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's control light goes out ››› Fig. 201. All conditions must be met at the same time The electronic parking brake connects auto- ››› : matically, if necessary, to park the vehicle Fig. 201 In the lower part of the centre console: 1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake safely . Auto Hold function button. ››› pedal on a flat surface or on a slope. 2. The engine rotates “correctly”. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 241 Driving

All conditions must be met at the same time hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on Cruise control operation ››› : slippery or frozen surfaces. Upon accelerating, the brake releases gradually. Note

The Auto Hold function is automatically Before entering a car wash, always switch turned off if the following conditions are off the Auto Hold function, because if the met: electronic parking brake is automatically connected, it may cause damage. If any of the conditions mentioned on page 241, Conditions for keeping the vehi- 1. ››› cle stationary with the Auto Hold function are no longer met. Cruise control system (CCS)* If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly 2. is detected. Control lamp 3. If the engine is switched off.  It lights up green Fig. 202 Instrument panel display: CCS status in- 4. If the accelerator is pressed. dications. The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and If any of the tyres has only minimal contact with 5. active. Read the additional information carefully the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articulation. ›››  page 37 OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is WARNING switched on and active. The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active. The smart technology incorporated into mph). the Auto Hold function cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the lim- Several warning and control lamps light up The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas- its of the system. The greater convenience for a few seconds when the ignition is switching to accelerate, not by actively braking the provided by the Auto Hold function should ed on, signalling that the function is being vehicle ››› . never tempt you to take any risk that may verified. They will switch off after a few sec- compromise safety. onds. Displayed on the CCS screen ● Never leave the vehicle running and with Status Fig. 202: the Auto Hold function switched on. WARNING ● The Auto Hold function cannot always Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- trol and warning lamps on page 109.

242 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

A CCS temporarily switched off. The set ● If the airbag is triggered. WARNING speed is displayed in small or darkened figures. WARNING Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109. B System error. Contact a specialised Use of the cruise control could cause acci- workshop. dents and severe injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining C CCS switched on. The speed memory is the safety distance. empty. Speed limiter ● Do not use the cruise control in heavy D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in displayed in large figures. Control lamp front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances Changing gear in CCS mode (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-  It lights up green ded roads. The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch The speed limiter is switched on and active. pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road cally after a gear is engaged. or on unpaved roads.  Flashes green ● Always adapt your speed and the distance Travelling down hills with the CCS to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded. When travelling down hills the CCS cannot weather conditions, the condition of the maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle road and the traffic situation. down using the brake pedal and reduce ● To avoid unexpected operation of the  It lights up cruise control system, turn it off every time gears if required. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limit- you finish using it. er are active. Automatic off ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or The cruise control system (CCS) is switched Some warning and control lamps will light up weather conditions. off automatically or temporarily: briefly when the ignition is switched on to ● When travelling down hills, the CCS can- check certain functions. They will switch off ● If the system detects a fault that could af- not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle after a few seconds. fect the working order of the CCS. tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to ● If you press and maintain the accelerator WARNING slow the vehicle. pedal for a certain time, driving faster than Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- the stored speed. trol and warning lamps on page 109. ● If the dynamic driving control systems intervene (e.g. ASR or ESC). https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 243 Driving

Display indications A The speed limiter is active. The last limiter when the status of the road and the speed set is displayed in large figures. weather conditions allow it. B The speed limiter is not active. The last ● When driving downhill, the speed limiter speed set is displayed in small or dark- cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed ened figures. will increase due to its own weight. In this C The speed limiter is switched off. The to- case, select a lower gear or use the foot tal mileage is displayed. brake to slow the vehicle.

WARNING Note After use, always switch off the speed limit- ● Different versions of the instrument pan- er to prevent the speed being regulated el are available and therefore the versions against your wishes. and instructions on the display may vary. Fig. 203 On the instrument panel display: indications of the speed limiter status. ● The speed limiter does not relieve the ● If when switching the ignition off, the driver of their responsibility to drive at the cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a appropriate speed. Do not drive at high cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter speed individually programmed upwards of speed if not necessary. were switched on, then the cruise control approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in ● Using the speed limiter under adverse system or the adaptive cruise control will forwards gears ››› weather conditions is dangerous and can automatically switch themselves on when cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, the ignition is back on. However, no speed will be stored. The last set speed of the Display messages on the speed limiter snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed speed limiter will be stored. Status ››› Fig. 203:

244 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 204 On the left of the steering column: con- Fig. 205 On the left of the steering column: third trol and buttons to operate the speed limiter. lever for operating the speed limiter.

Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 204 or the third lever Function ››› Effect ››› Fig. 205

Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the  position and press The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed Switching on the speed limiter button 2 or move the third lever forward and press button 2 . limiter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter and cruise control (CCS) or the adaptive It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever cruise control (ACC) (with the speed lim- adaptive cruise control (ACC). iter switched on)

Press the button 3 on the turn signal lever or button  1 on the third The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and Activating the speed limiter lever. the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed lim- Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position  or move the The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be iter limitation third lever into position . stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be limitation pressing down the accelerator overtake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tempo- stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return- (kick-down) rarily. ing to less than the set speed. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 245 Driving

Position of the turn signal lever Fig. 204 or the third lever Function ››› Effect ››› Fig. 205

Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi- The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed Switching the speed limiter on again tion . you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or move the third lever into position  to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of Increasing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or press  1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of Reducing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lever Switching off the speed limiter The system switches off into position .

The values shown in the table in brackets, in ››› page 243 flash and an acoustic warning ››› Fig. 204 1 of the turn signal lever into mph, are displayed only in instrument panels may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to position  or the third lever into pressure with indications in miles. slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a point  or press button 2 on any lever. lower gear. After overtaking, the speed limiter can be Going down slopes with the speed limiter switched on with the previously set speed by Switching off temporarily If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards If you wish to temporarily switch off the the area  or by moving the third lever in- the warning and control lamps  speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control to pressure point .

246 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by Emergency braking assistance The function is intended to prevent collisions pressing down the accelerator (kick- with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same down) system (Front Assist)* lane travelling in the same direction, or with If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It down) and the set speed is exceeded be- Topic introduction may fail to activate in other danger situa- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is tions. temporarily disabled. The Front Assist function is active within a To confirm it being switched off an acoustic range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) signal sound once. While the limiter is off, and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on the warning and control lamp  flashes. speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour, some of the sub-functions described When the accelerator is no longer pressed below are omitted in order to optimise the down and the speed is reduced below the system’s general behaviour. set value, the limiter switches on again. The control lamp  will light up and remain lit. The Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the driver’s attention. Automatic off Fig. 206 On the instrument panel display: advance warning indications. The speed limiter is automatically switched Safety distance warning off: The objective of the emergency braking as- If the system detects a situation of danger ● If the system detects a fault that could sistance system is to prevent head-on colli- because the vehicle is too close to the vehi- negatively affect the working order of the sions against objects that may be in the vehicle ahead, it will warn the driver by means of limiter. cle’s path or minimise the consequences of an indication on the instrument panel display such impacts.  ● If the airbag is triggered. . Within the limitations imposed by the envi- The timing of the warning varies depending CAUTION ronmental conditions and by the system it- on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. self, the function acts in staggered fashion, For automatic switching off due to system depending on how critical the situation is. In- failures, for security reasons, the limiter is Advance warning itially it warns the driver, and if the driver’s only completely switched off when the If the system detects a possible collision with reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it driver stops pressing the accelerator at the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by some point or consciously switches off the activates an independent emergency brak- means of an audible warning and an indica- system. ing. tion on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 206. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 247 Driving

The warning moment varies depending on WARNING may issue unnecessary warnings and inter- the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At vene inopportunely in the braking. the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109. ● The Front Assist does not react to animals possible emergency braking . ››› or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane. Critical warning WARNING ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning The Front Assist system cannot change the trians walking in the same direction or ap- (advance warning), the system may actively laws of physics or replace the driver in proaching head-on down the same lane. terms of keeping control of the vehicle and intervene in the brakes and generate a brief ● The driver must always be ready to take reacting to a possible emergency situation. jolt to warn the driver of the imminent dan- over the control of the vehicle. ger of a collision. ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, WARNING the brake pedal is “harder”. Automatic braking Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- If the driver also fails to react to the critical ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by warning, the system may initiate independ- tion and try to avoid the collision by braking pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving ent emergency braking by progressively in- or by dodging the obstacle, as applicable. the wheel. creasing the braking effect in accordance ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- with how critical the situation is. scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly in- Note tervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. ● When the Front Assist is connected, the Driver emergency braking assistance sys- ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to indications on the instrument panel screen tem the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit may be concealed by warnings from other visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- Faced with an imminent collision, the system functions, such as an incoming call. may detect that the driver is not braking hard tions. ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- the brake pedal is “harder”. will automatically increase the braking effect. dents and serious injuries. ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- ● In complex driving situations, occasional- Due to certain driving circumstances and the sist on the brakes may be interrupted by ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and limitations of its operation, there are some pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex- cases in which the system cannot prevent a the wheel. ample at traffic islands. collision, although it can significantly mini- ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- mise the consequences by reducing the until it stops completely. However, the paired, for example, by dirt or because the speed and the force of the impact. brake system does not halt the vehicle per- radar sensor has lost its settings, the system manently. Use the foot brake!

248 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

● If the Front Assist does not work as de- When the radar sensor begins to operate compromise the system's efficacy or dis- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes properly again, the Front Assist will automati- connect it. cally be available again. The message will dis- several times unnecessarily), switch it off. ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- appear from the instrument panel display. Have the system checked by a specialised cialist knowledge and special tools. This is workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a Front Assist operation may be affected by a why CUPRA recommends visiting a special- specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- ised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. dealership. cur, for example, in a closed car park or due ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer on the road or sheets used in road works). spray. Radar sensor The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this Operating the Emergency braking as- may negatively affect Front Assist operation. sistance system (Front Assist) If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, for example if the suspension is lowered, Front Assist operation may be affected. This is why CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. Fig. 207 On the front bumper: radar sensor. CAUTION A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- If you have the sensation that the radar er to determine the traffic situation sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, ››› Fig. 207 1 . disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid Fig. 208 On the screen of the instrument panel Front Assist switched off message. possible dangerous situations caused by a The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired system malfunction. If this occurs have it by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- adjusted. fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the tion is switched on. Front Assist does not work. The instrument ● The sensor may become damaged or lose When the Front Assist is switched off, so too panel displays the following message: Front its settings when knocked, for example, during a parking manoeuvre. This may are the advance warning function (pre warn- Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary ing) and the distance warning. » clean the radar sensor ››› . https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 249 Driving

CUPRA recommends leaving the Front Assist Depending on the infotainment system in- Switching the Front Assist off tempo- always switched on. Exceptions ››› page 250, stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning rarily in the following situations Switching the Front Assist off temporarily function may be adjusted as follows: in the following situations. In the following situations the Front Assist ● Advance should be deactivated due to the system's Switching the Front Assist on and off ● Medium limitations: With the ignition switched on, the Front As- ● Delayed ● When the vehicle is to be towed. sist can be switched on and off as follows: ● Deactivated ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● Select the corresponding menu option us- CUPRA recommends driving with the func- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- ● When the radar sensor is damaged. tion in “Medium” mode. tems ››› page 109. ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision. ● OR: switch the system on and off in Easy Switching distance warning on and off Connect using the  button SETTINGS > ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. Driver assistance button If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily ›››  page 33. in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will appear on the instrument panel display with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- . In this case, increase the safe dis- ditional headlight or the like. ment panel will inform that it has been tance. ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, switched off with the following indicator  ferry or train. The distance warning can be switched on Fig. 208. ››› and off in the Easy Connect system using the  button > SETTINGS > Driver assis- Activating or deactivating the pre-warning tance ›››  page 33. System limitations (advance warning) The system will store the setting for the next The pre-warning function (advance warning) The Front Assist has certain physical limita- time the ignition is switched on. can be switched on or off in the Easy Con- tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain nect system with the  button > SETTINGS CUPRA recommends keeping the distance circumstances, some of the system's reac- Driver assistance function button warning switched on at all times. tions may be inopportune from the driver's ›››  page 33. standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary. The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on. CUPRA recommends keeping the pre-warning function switched on at all times. 250 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

The following conditions may cause the ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- When driving behind another vehicle, the Front Assist not to react or to do so too hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards ACC function reduces speed until it is the late: or over the top. same as that of the vehicle ahead and main- ● In the first few instants of driving after tains the set distance between the vehicles. switching on the ignition, due to the system’s If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adap- initial auto-calibration. tive cruise control also accelerates, going no Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* higher than the target speed programmed. ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. If the vehicle is equipped with automatic ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. Introduction gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it aged. stops. ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the The distance programmed should be in- ESC activated in Sport mode manually creased when the road surface is wet. ››› page 223. ● If the ESC is controlling. Driver intervention prompt ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- During driving, the ACC is subject to certain trically connected trailer are damaged. limitations inherent in the system. In other ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. words, in certain circumstances the driver ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the will have to adjust speed him or herself, as Fig. 209 Detection area. road or sheets used in road works. well as the distance from other vehicles. ● If the vehicle is reversing. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an ex- In this case, the instrument panel screen will warn you to intervene by applying the brake ● If the vehicle over-accelerates. tension of the normal cruise control system (CCS) ››› . and a warning tone will be heard ● In case of snow or heavy rain. ››› page 252. ● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- The ACC function allows the driver to pro- bikes. gram a cruise speed of between 30 and WARNING 210 km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the ● Misaligned vehicles. The intelligent technology in the ACC can- distance required with regard to the vehicle not overcome the system's inherent limita- ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. in front. tions or change the laws of physics. If used ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite di- The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed negligently or involuntarily, it may cause rection. at all times, maintaining a safe distance with serious accidents and injuries. The system the vehicle in front based on its speed. is not a replacement for driver awareness. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 251 Driving

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to ● The driver should be ready to accelerate Symbols on the instrument panel dis- the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit or brake by him/herself at all times. play and control lamps visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. CAUTION The speed reduction by the ACC to ● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, If you have the sensation that the radar  maintain the distance from the ve- on steep roads, with several bends or in hicle in front is not sufficient. slippery circumstances such as snow, ice, sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this oc- rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads. Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention curs have it adjusted. prompt. ● Never use the ACC when driving off-road ● or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been Repairs to the radar sensor require specialist knowledge and special tools. This is designed for use on paved roads only.  The ACC is not currently availa- why CUPRA recommends visiting a special- ble.a) ● The ACC does not react on approaching a ised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually Note ped at the traffic lights. ››› Fig. 211 1 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still un- ● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes- ● If the ACC system does not work as de- available, refer to a specialised workshop to have the trian monitoring system is available. In ad- scribed in this chapter, do not use it until it system inspected. dition, the system does not react to animals has been checked by a specialised work- a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour or vehicles crossing your path or approach- shop. This is why CUPRA recommends visit- display is in colour. ing head-on down the same lane. ing a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT ● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- dealership.  The ACC is active. ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated is applying the pedal. limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed remains constant. ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, ● When the ACC is switched on, strange the ACC system could automatically switch noises may be heard during automatic off during the journey. Switch off the sys- braking cause by the braking system.  If the symbol is white: the ACC is tem when starting off. active. ● If the vehicle continues to move involun- A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts tarily after a driver intervention prompt, speed and distance from the vehicle in front. brake the vehicle by applying the pedal. ● If the dash panel displays a driver intervention prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

252 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Indications on the display 5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis-  If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive (Standby) tance based on speed.

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting. Note When the ACC is connected, the indica-  It lights up green tions on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by warnings from other func- The ACC is active. tions, such as an incoming call. Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off Radar sensor after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 109.

Fig. 210 On the instrument panel display: (A) ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Status display Indications on the display ››› Fig. 210: Fig. 211 On the front bumper: radar sensor. 1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac- A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- tive and is not regulating your speed. er to determine the traffic situation 2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is ››› Fig. 211 1 . not active and is not regulating your dis- The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired tance. by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- 3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the and is regulating your speed. adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. 4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. The instrument panel displays the following »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 253 Driving

message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec- compromise the system's efficacy or dis- essary clean the radar sensor ››› . connect it. When the radar sensor begins to operate ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- properly again, the ACC will automatically be cialist knowledge and special tools. This is available again. The message on the instru- why CUPRA recommends visiting a special- ment panel screen will switch off and the ised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. ACC will be reactivated again. ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer ACC operation may be affected by a strong spray. radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the Fig. 213 On the left of the steering column: third presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control. road or sheets used in road works). Operating the Adaptive Cruise Con- The area in front of and around the radar trol ACC When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is sensor should not be covered with adhe- connected, the green control lamp  will sives, additional or similar headlights, as this light up on the instrument panel, and the may negatively affect ACC operation. programmed speed and ACC status will be displayed ››› Fig. 210. If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made What ACC settings are possible? to it, for example, if the suspension is low- ● ered, ACC operation may be affected. This is Setting your speed ››› page 255. why CUPRA recommends visiting a special- ● Setting your distance ››› page 255. ised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership. ● Connecting and activating the ACC ››› page 255. CAUTION Fig. 212 On the left of the steering column: third ● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC If you have the sensation that the radar lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise Control. ››› page 255. sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, ● Adjusting the default distance level at the disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. start of your journey ››› page 255. ● ● The sensor may become damaged or lose Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 255. its settings when knocked, for example, ● Conditions in which the ACC does not re- during a parking manoeuvre. This may act ››› page 255.

254 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Setting speed Connecting and activating the ACC Adjusting the default distance level at the To set your speed, move the third lever loca- To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- start of your journey ted in position 1 upwards or downwards un- tion of the gearbox selector lever, the vehi- In wet road conditions, you should always set til the desired speed is shown on the instru- cle speed and the position of the third level a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in ment panel display. The speed adjustment is of the ACC must all be taken into account. front than when driving in dry conditions. made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals. ● The gearbox selector lever must be in po- The following distances can be preselected: Once you are driving, if you wish to set the sition D or S. current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed ● Very short ● To activate the ACC, with the third lever in and activate the ACC, press the  ● Short position 1 press the  button or move the ››› Fig. 213 button. If you wish to increase or third lever of the ACC to position 2 ● Media reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 Fig. 212. At this point, the image of the ● Long mph), move the lever to position 2 ››› ACC on the instrument panel display will Fig. 212 or press the  button, respec- ● Very long ››› switch to Active mode Fig. 210. tively. ››› In the Easy Connect system you can adjust The set speed can be changed when the ve- When the ACC function is active, the vehicle the distance level that will be applied when hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like. travels at a set speed and distance from the the ACC is connected using the  > SET- Any modification to the programmed speed vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can TINGS > Driver assistance will be shown on the bottom left part of the be changed at any time. ›››  page 33. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 210. Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC Changing the driving profile Setting your distance level To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the The driving profile selected can affect ACC To increase/reduce the distance level, press 0 position ››› Fig. 212 (engaged). An ACC acceleration and braking behaviour the rocker switch towards the left/right deactivated message appears and the ››› page 271. ››› Fig. 213 A . function is totally deactivated. The instrument panel display shows the If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, The following conditions may lead the ACC modification of the distance level. There are just to switch it temporarily to inactive mode not to react: 5 distance levels to choose from. CUPRA rec- (Standby), move the third lever to position 3 ● If the accelerator is pressed. ››› Fig. 212 or press the brake pedal. ommends level 3. The set distance can be ● If there is no gear engaged. changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) ● If the ESC is controlling. ing driving, as you like ››› . if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened. ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 255 Driving

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is WARNING trically connected trailer are damaged. applied. The ACC is available once again after the parking brake is released. There is a danger of rear collision when the ● If the vehicle is reversing. minimum distance to the vehicle in front is ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).  ACC: currently not available. exceeded and the speed difference be- Intervention of stability control tween both vehicles is so great that a speed reduction by the ACC will not suffice. In this Driver messages The message for the driver is displayed when case the brake pedal should be applied im-  ACC not available the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- mediately. venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically The system can no longer continue to guar- ● The ACC may not be able to detect all sit- switched off. antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- uations properly.  activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is ACC: Take action! ● “Stepping” on the accelerator may cause damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised The message for the driver is displayed if, the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver workshop and have the fault repaired. when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a braking will have priority over intervention by the speed control or adaptive cruise  ACC and Front Assist: currently mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al- control. not available. No sensor vision though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding ● Always be ready to use the brakes! This message will be displayed to the driver if with another vehicle. ● Observe country-specific provisions gov- the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for erning obligatory minimum distances be- example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.  ACC: engine speed tween vehicles. Clean the sensor Fig. 211. ››› The message for the driver is displayed if,  ACC: currently not available. when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the Note Gradient too steep driver does not shift up or down a gear in time, which means exceeding or not reach- ● The programmed speed is erased once The maximum road slope has been excee- ing the permissible engine speed. The ACC the ignition or the ACC are switched off. ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard. ● When the traction control system (ASR) is guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched deactivated during acceleration or else the on. Door open ESC is activated in Sport* Mode  ACC: only available in D, S or Vehicles with automatic transmission: the (›››  page 33), the ACC switches off auto- M ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle matically. stationary and the door open. ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, Select the D/S or M position on the selector the engine switches off automatically dur- lever. ing the ACC stopping phase and restarts  ACC: parking brake applied automatically to begin driving.

256 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Function for preventing overtaking in Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Note an inside lane Control ACC temporarily in certain sit- If you do not switch off the ACC in the uations aforementioned situations, you may com- mit a legal offence. In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to the system's limitations ››› :

● When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and deceleration lanes on motorways or in sections with road works to prevent involuntary acceleration to reach the programmed speed. Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac- ● When going through a tunnel, as operation tive, vehicle detected in an outer lane. could be affected. ● On roads with several lanes, when other The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a vehicles are driving more slowly in the over- function that helps avoid overtaking while taking lane. In this case, slower vehicles will driving in inside lanes at certain speeds. be overtaken on the right. If another vehicle is detected travelling at a ● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed vehicle in front might not be detected prop- on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 214. erly or, in certain circumstances, might not To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside be detected at all. lane the system will gently brake, and in accordance with the speed will prevent the car WARNING from overtaking. The driver can override this If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- function at any time by pressing the acceler- tions described, serious accidents and inju- ator pedal. At low speeds the function is in- ries may occur. active, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or ● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa- in city traffic. tions.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 257 Driving

Special driving situations Overtaking When the turn signal lights up before the vehicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehicle in front. When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the programmed speed and maintains it. System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever backwards ››› page 254.

Fig. 216 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One vehi- Driving through a bend cle turning and another stationary. On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen- Fig. 215 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcyclist sor may stop detecting the vehicle in front or ahead out of range of the radar sensor. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer- reacting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- Fig. 215 A In these situations the vehicle tem. For example, certain reactions of the ››› may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to the ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex- vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to pected or come late from the driver's point intervene by accelerating or interrupting the of view. So pay attention in order to inter- braking process by applying the brake or vene if necessary. pushing the third lever backwards For example, the following traffic situations ››› page 254. call for the utmost attention: Driving in tunnels Starting driving after a stopping phase When driving through tunnels the radar sen- (only vehicles with automatic gearbox) sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin tunnels. driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off ››› . 258 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Narrow or misaligned vehicles ››› Fig. 216 D. In these cases, you should Trailer mode The radar sensor can only detect narrow or brake as necessary. When driving with trailer the ACC controls misaligned vehicles when they are within less dynamically. range ››› Fig. 215 B. This applies particularly Vehicles driving in the opposite direction to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In and vehicles crossing your path Overheated brakes these cases, you should brake as necessary. The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- If the brakes overheat, for example after proaching from the opposite direction or ve- abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, Vehicles with special loads and accessories hicles crossing your path. the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. Special loads and accessories of other vehi- The relevant text message will appear in the cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or Metal objects dash panel display. In this case, adaptive over the top may be out of the ACC's range. Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets cruise control cannot be activated. used in road works, can confuse the radar Switch off the ACC when driving behind ve- Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. hicles with special loads and accessories or once brake temperature has cooled suffi- when overtaking them. In these cases, you ciently. The message will disappear from the should brake as necessary. Factors that may affect how the radar sen- instrument panel display. If the message ACC sor operates not available remains on for quite a long Other vehicles changing lanes If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to time it means that there is a fault. Contact a heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends Vehicles changing lanes a short distance deactivated temporarily. The relevant text visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any away from your own can only be detected message will appear in the dash panel dis- SEAT dealership. when they are within range of the sensors. play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- Fig. 211 1 . WARNING act ››› Fig. 216 C. In these cases, you should ››› brake as necessary. When the radar sensor begins to operate If you do not heed the Press the brake properly again, the ACC will automatically be message, the vehicle may initiate an invol- Stationary vehicles available again. The message on the instru- untary movement and could crash into the vehicle ahead. In any event, before driving The ACC does not detect stationary objects ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC will be reactivated again. off, check that the road is clear. The radar while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged sensor may not detect obstacles on the vehicles. ACC operation may be affected by a strong road. This could cause an accident and se- If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or radar reverse reflection, for example in a rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake. moves over and there is a stationary vehicle closed car park. in front of it, the ACC will not react to it

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 259 Driving

Lane Assist system* Control lamp Indications on the instrument panel display Introduction  It lights up yellow Lane Assist active but not available. The system cannot accurately recognise the lane. Please see page 262, Lane Assist system is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow).

 It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off Fig. 217 On the windscreen: field of vision of the after a few seconds. Lane Assist system camera. WARNING Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the possible Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- trol and warning lamps on page 109. voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has detected, the system notifies the driver with a corrective steering movement. The purpose is not only to warn the driver, but also Fig. 218 On the instrument panel display: Indica- to keep the vehicle inside the lane. This tion on the Lane Assist system display (example 1). movement can be over-regulated at any time. No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.

260 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

– Fig. 219 : The system is operational, Or: Using the Driving Assist button on the the highlighted line A indicates that turn signal lever* ››› page 109. there was a risk of involuntarily crossing the lane line and that the steering is be- Lane Assist with lane centring guide ing adjusted to correct the angle. The Lane Centring Guide function is in- – Fig. 219 : The two highlighted lines A tended to keep the vehicle in the centre of light up simultaneously when both lane the lane. lines are recognised and the Lane Assist If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly function is activated. off centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver preferences. Operating mode The Lane Centring Guide function is activated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- Steering wheel vibration tem using the  button > SETTINGS function button  page 33. The following situations can cause vibration ››› in the steering wheel and require the driver Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist to take active control of driving: system can be automatically deactivated if there is a system malfunction. The control ● When the steering angle assist value re- lamp disappears. quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is high- Fig. 219 On the instrument panel display: Indica- er than the system’s maximum operating val- Hands-Off Function tion on the Lane Assist system display (example 2). ue. In the absence of steering wheel activity the ● If the system ceases to display the lane Status display system alerts the driver with acoustic signals lines while assisting with steering. – Fig. 218 : The system is active, but not and a text message on the dash panel asking to actively take over the steering. available, either because the minimum Switching the Lane Assist system on or off speed has not been reached or because If the driver does not react to this, the system Through the Easy Connect system the lane lines are not recognised. also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo- – Fig. 218 : The system is active and ● Press the Easy Connect button  tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle available, both lane lines are recog- ● Press the function button SETTINGS > has it, activates the Emergency Assist func- nised. The steering angle is not being Driver assistance to open the menu. tion ››› page 264. » corrected at this moment.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 261 Driving

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the ››› page 265. In this case, the Lane Assist cause accidents and injury. The system is adaptive lane guidance function will be disa- function expands its functions in the follow- not a replacement for driver awareness. bled after the corresponding warnings to the ing way: ● Always adapt your speed and the distance driver. If the driver tries to change lane and there is to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, a vehicle in the blind spot: weather conditions, the condition of the The lane assist system is active but it is not road and the traffic situation. available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) ●  The lamp flashes in the corresponding ● Always keep your hands on the steering ● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38 rear-view mirror even though the turn signal wheel so it can be turned at any time. has not been activated. mph). ● The Lane Assist system does not detect ● When the Lane Assist system does not de- ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the all road markings. The road surfaces, road tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam- driver of the risk of collision. structures or objects in poor condition can ple, in the event warnings indicating road ● torque is applied to correct the steering be incorrectly detected as road markings works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec- and return the vehicle to its lane. under certain circumstances by the Lane tions. Assist system. In such situations, switch the Lane Assist system off immediately. ● When the radius of a curve is too small. Switching off the Lane Assist system in the following situations ● Please observe the indications on the in- ● When no road markings can be seen. strument panel and act as is necessary. Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, ● When the distance to the next marking to ● switch it off in the following situations: Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- too great. roundings. ● When the system does not detect any ● When more attention is required of the ● When the area of vision of the camera clear and active steering movement during a driver becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the long period of time. ● When driving in a sporty style Lane Assist system function can be affected. ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic ● In unfavourable weather conditions driving styles. ● On roads in poor condition ● If a turn signal is activated. CAUTION ● In areas of road works ● With the stability control system (ESC) in In order to avoid influencing the operation Sport mode or switched off. of the system, the following points must be WARNING taken into account: The intelligent technology in the Lane As- BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot De- ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the sist system cannot change the limits im- tector)* camera and keep it in a clean state, without posed by the laws of physics and by the very snow or ice. The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat- nature of the system. Careless or uncon- ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions trolled use of the Lane Assist system may 262 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

● Do not cover the area of vision of the (ACC) ››› page 251. Therefore, it is essential ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be camera. that you read these two chapters carefully connected and active ››› page 254. and note the limitations of the systems and ● Check that the area of vision of the wind- ● The speed must be below 60 km/h the information about them. screen camera is not damaged. (38 mph).

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist Note Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traf- Assist control light turns yellow) ● The lane departure warning system has fic Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- ● If any of the conditions mentioned on been exclusively developed for driving on tance preset by the driver with respect to the paved roads only. page 263, Technical requirements for us- vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met. ● If the Lane Assist system does not work as ››› . described in this chapter, do not use it and ● If any of the conditions required for opera- contact a specialised workshop. To do this, the system automatically controls tion of the Lane Assist are not met the accelerator, brakes and steering, and page 260. ● Before starting a journey, verify that the ››› slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces- field of vision of the camera is not covered ● If any of the conditions necessary for the sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that ››› Fig. 217. adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no has stopped. It automatically moves off again ● longer fulfilled ››› page 251. Always keep the field of vision of the when the vehicle ahead moves. camera clean. ● If there is a fault in the system, have it Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must checked by a specialised workshop. motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never be switched off use it in city traffic. Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic Jam Assist must always be switched off in the Technical requirements for using Traffic following situations: Traffic Jam Assist Jam Assist ● ● Lane departure warning must be activated: When more attention is required by the driver. Description and operation Infotainment button  > SETTINGS > Driver assistance > Lane departure ● When driving in a very sporty style. Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the warning (Lane Assist) function button ● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case car within its lane and to move in convoy in ›››  page 33. of snow or heavy rain. case of traffic congestion or slow traffic. ● Adaptive lane guidance must be activated: ● When driving on roads in poor condition. Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of Infotainment button  > SETTINGS > ● In sections with roadworks. Lane Assist ››› page 260 and combines Lane Driver assistance > Lane Assist func- Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control tion button . ● In city journeys. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 263 Driving

WARNING ● If driver intervention is requested on the that you read these two chapters carefully dash panel display, immediately resume and note the limitations of the systems and The smart technology incorporated into control of the vehicle. the information about them. Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times Operation of Emergency Assist system. Accidents and severe injury may to be ready to intervene in the steering at occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negligent- any time. The driver is always responsible Emergency Assist detects when the driver ly or involuntarily. The system is not a re- for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. ceases to perform any activity and repeated- placement for driver awareness. ● Always be prepared to take charge of ly requests that he/she regain active control ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to driving (accelerating or braking) yourself. of the vehicle, through the use of optical and the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit acoustic warnings and by applying the the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- Note brakes. ditions. ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de- If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- scribed in this chapter, stop using it and tem automatically takes over the accelerator, neys. contact a specialised workshop. brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is hicle and keep it in its lane . When the ● If the system is faulty, take it to a special- ››› poor visibility, for example, in case of snow, ised workshop and have it checked. Emergency Assist is actively adjusting, the ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip- hazard warning lights come on ››› page 136 pery sections or flooded roads. and the vehicle makes slight zigzag move- ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or ments in the lane in order to warn other driv- on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf- Emergency Assist ers. fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only. If the remaining braking distance is suffi- Description and operation cient, if necessary the system slows down the ● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo- vehicle until it stops completely and auto- ple or animals or vehicles crossing your Emergency Assist detects whether there is matically switches on the electronic parking path or that approach you head-on down inactivity by the driver and can automatically brake page 219. the same lane. ››› keep the car within the lane and stop it alto- ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce gether if necessary. This way the system can Switching the Emergency Assist on and off speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme- actively help avoid an accident. diately by applying the pedal. The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- Emergency Assist is an additional function of ● If the vehicle continues to move when matically when the Lane Assist is switched on you wish it to stop after a driver interven- Lane Assist ››› page 260 and combines Lane ››› page 260. tion prompt, brake the vehicle by applying Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control the pedal. (ACC) ››› page 251. Therefore, it is essential

264 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Technical requirements for using the works within the limits of the system. The going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any Emergency Assist driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. SEAT dealership. ● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to switched on ››› page 251. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit Note the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ● The Lane Assist must be switched on ● ditions. Automatic interventions by the Emergen- ››› page 260. cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times ● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- by pressing the accelerator or brake or by to be ready to intervene in the steering at tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. moving the wheel. any time. ● The system must have detected a lane ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto- ● The Emergency Assist alone cannot al- separation line on both sides of the vehicle matically can be switched off by pressing ways avoid accidents or serious injuries. ››› Fig. 219. the accelerator or the break, moving the ● If the operation of the Emergency Assist steering wheel or pressing the hazard is impaired, for example if the radar sensor warning light switch. The following conditions may cause the of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the Emergency Assist not to react or to switch ● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may Lane Assist camera are covered or have lost off automatically: decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a their settings, the system may intervene incomplete stop. ● If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves opportunely in braking or in steering. ● When the Emergency Assist is activated, the steering wheel. ● The Emergency Assist does not react to it is only available again after the ignition ● If any of the conditions mentioned in people or animal or vehicles crossing your has been switched off and back on again. ››› page 265, Technical requirements for path or which approach you head-on in the using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled. same lane. ● If any of the conditions required for operation of the Lane Assist are not met WARNING Blind spot detector (BSD) with ››› page 260. If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inop- parking assistance (RCTA)* ● If any of the conditions necessary for the portunely, serious accidents and injuries adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no may occur. Introduction longer fulfilled ››› page 251. ● If the Emergency Assist does not operate properly, switch off the Lane Assist The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to de- WARNING ››› page 260. Doing so will also switch off tect the traffic situation behind the vehicle. the Emergency Assist. The smart technology incorporated into The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) ● Have the system checked by a specialised the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the helps the driver when backing out of a paral- workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only lel parking spot and in manoeuvring. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 265 Driving

The blind spot detector has been developed fic alert has been designed for use on Control lamps for driving on paved roads. paved roads. Control lamp in external rear view mirrors: ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- WARNING roundings.  It lights up The smart technology incorporated into ● Never use the blind spot detector or the the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking parking assistant if the radar sensors are It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is acti- assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- dirty. vated and ready to operate. come the limits imposed by the laws of ● It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle physics; it only works within the limits of the The external rear view mirror control in the blind spot. system. Accidents and severe injury may lamps may have limited functionality due to occur if the blind spot detection system or solar radiation. the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-  Flashes gently or involuntarily. The system is not a CAUTION The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the replacement for driver awareness. ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to may be damaged or shifted in the event of a the direction of the detected vehicle ››› . the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit collision, for example, when entering or ex- visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist iting a parking space. This may result in the page 260, a warning to switch lanes will also appear tions. ››› system disconnecting itself, or at least pos- even though the turn signal has not been engaged ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times sibly having its functionality diminished. (blind spot detector “Plus”). to be ready to intervene in the steering at ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors any time. work properly, keep the rear bumper free Some warning and control lamps will light up ● Pay attention to the control lamps that of snow and ice and do not cover it. briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off may come on in the external rear view mir- ● The rear bumper should only be painted rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- with paint authorised by CUPRA. The blind after a few seconds. low any instructions they may give. spot detector's functions may be limited or If there are no indications from the control ● The blind spot assistant could react to work incorrectly if other paints are used. lamp in the external rear view mirror, this any special constructions that might be means that the blind spot detector has not present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. Note detected any other vehicles in the area ››› . high or irregular dividers. This may cause erroneous warnings. If the blind spot detector with parking as- If the dipped beam is on, then the control sistant does not work as described in this ● Never use the blind spot detector with lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be chapter, do not use it and contact a speci- rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. dimmed (night mode). alised workshop. The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-

266 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

WARNING Blind spot detector (BSD) If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. ● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Fig. 221 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- areas. responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle. The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle ››› Fig. 221. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot detector will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver. Fig. 220 On external rear-view mirrors: blind spot detector display. Indication in the external rear view mirrors The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror ››› Fig. 220 regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 267 Driving

lamp of the right-hand external mirror indi- Radar sensors Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- cates the traffic situation to the right of the The radar sensors are located on the left and tween two lanes, the indications may be in- vehicle. right of the bumper and are not visible from correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or the outside ››› Fig. 221. The sensors monitor there are any), and can also detect stationary windows with tinted film, the indications of both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- objects such as dividers, and thus give an in- the external mirrors may not be seen clearly hicle ››› Fig. 222, ››› Fig. 223. The range to correct indication. or correctly. the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane. Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with The lane width is not detected individually, adhesives or other similar materials. but is rather pre-configured in the system.

268 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Driving situations

Fig. 222 Schematic diagram:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 223 Schematic diagram:  Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will considerably higher speed, no indication will Physical limitations inherent to the system be displayed in the external mirror be displayed. In some situations the blind spot detector   ››› Fig. 222 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 223 (ar- may not interpret the traffic situation cor- row): The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the exter- rectly. E.g. in the following situations: ● When being overtaken by another vehicle nal mirror, because the blind spot detector ● on tight bends; ››› Fig. 222 . takes into account the speed differential with ● in the case of lanes with different widths; ● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 223 other vehicles. Thus even though the dis- ●  with a speed differential of approx. tance from the other vehicle is identical, the at the top of slopes; 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a indication will appear sooner in some cases ● in adverse weather conditions; » and later in others. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 269 Driving

● in the case of special constructions to the If the system detects that someone else on You can interrupt the automatic braking by side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or viders. cle ››› Fig. 224, an acoustic alarm is heard. the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle. In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on WARNING Parking assistant (RCTA) infotainment system display. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the The smart technology incorporated into back of the image of the vehicle on the info- the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome tainment system screen. This strip displays the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is only works within the limits of the system. approaching.1) The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Automatic braking to reduce damages ● The system should never be used in limi- If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ted visibility conditions or complicated someone else on the road is approaching traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when the rear of the vehicle and the driver does crossing multiple lanes. not step on the brake, the system will engage ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- the brakes automatically. cle's surroundings, since the system often Fig. 224 Diagram of the parking assistant: detec- The parking system helps the driver by auto- fails to detect things such as bicycles or pe- ted area around the vehicle that is driving off. matically engaging the brakes to reduce any destrians. damage. The automatic intervention on the ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not The parking assistant uses the radar sensors brakes takes place when driving in reverse at brake the vehicle to a complete stop. on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 221 to monitor approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it that the vehicle is stationary, the system backs out of a parallel parking space or as it keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. is being manoeuvred, for example in very low visibility conditions. After automatically braking to reduce damage, the system will not be able to automatically brake again for approximately 10 seconds.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system. 270 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) Automatic deactivation of the blind spot Drive Profile* with parking assistant (RCTA) detector (BSD) The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Introduction Activating and deactivating the blind spot with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- detector (BSD) with parking assistant cally deactivated when, among other rea- The Drive Profile enables the driver to (RCTA) sons, one of the sensors is detected to be choose between six profiles or modes, Com- The blind spot detector with parking assis- permanently covered. This may be the case fort, Sport, Cupra, Individual, Offroad tant can be switched on and off by accessing if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice and Snow, that modify the behaviour of vari- the Assistance systems menu on the dash in front of one of the sensors. ous vehicle functions, providing different panel display using the steering wheel con- The relevant text message will appear in the driving experiences. trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- dash panel display. The Individual profile can be configured function camera, it can also be accessed by according to personal preferences. The oth- means of the driver assistance systems key Trailer mode er profiles have a fixed configuration. located on the main beam headlight lever. The Blind spot detector and the rear cross Open the Assistants menu. traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if Description ●  Blind spot the tow hitch is electrically connected to a ●  Exit Assist trailer or other similar object. Depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle, the Drive Profile can operate on the As soon as the driver starts to drive with a If the verification box on the control panel is following functions: checked , the functionality will be auto- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a matically activated at ignition. message will appear on the instrument panel Engine display indicating that the blind spot detec- When the blind spot detector is ready to op- tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti- Depending on the profile selected, the en- erate, the indications in the external mirrors vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched gine responds more spontaneously or more will turn on briefly as confirmation. from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind in harmony with the movements of the ac- When the vehicle is restarted, the last ad- spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, celerator. you will have to reactivate them in the corre- justment in the system will remain active. The gear change points are modified to posi- sponding menu. If the blind spot detector was automatically tion them in lower or higher engine speed deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, ranges. » the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 271 Driving

Address Adjusting driving profile In the Individual profile it is possible to The power steering varies its driving modes configure the characteristics of the vehicle and adapts to the profile selected, thus of- using the Profile setup button of the Easy fering the best behaviour for each situation. Connect system display. An icon on the Easy Connect system display Air conditioning provides information about the active profile Climatronic can operate in eco mode, espe- if it is different than Normal. The selector cially restricting fuel consumption. identifies the profile chosen by means of a red LED light. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Driving pro- Characteristics The acceleration and braking gradient of the file adaptive cruise control varies according to Fig. 225 Centre console: Driving Experience but- the active driving profile ››› page 251. ton. It permits more relaxed and comfortable driving, for example for long  motorway journeys. Its main charac- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) You can choose from the Comfort, Sport, Convenience teristic is the soft suspension setting Cupra, Individual, Offroad and Snow pro- In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the (DCC). files. electronic stability Control (ESC) page 221 ››› It represents the vehicle's default adjusts to adapt to the terrain. The desired mode can be selected as fol-  behaviour, suitable for dynamic driv- lows: Sport In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti- ing. vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 240. ● Turn the Driving Experience button until  It gives the vehicle a decidedly the required profile lights up on the Easy sportier nature, and makes for maxi- Cupra Connect system display as well as on the mum performance. Driving Experience button ››› Fig. 225. It allows you to personalise the con- ● OR: select the required profile on the  figuration. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment touch-screen of the Easy Connect system, in Individual fitted in the vehicle. the menu that opens up on turning the Driving Experience button. It adjusts the vehicle's parameters in  order to maintain optimal off-road The features of each profile can be seen by Offroad driving. pressing the Profile information button of the Easy Connect system display.

272 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Driving pro- compromise safety. The system is not a re- Characteristics Park Assist* file placement for driver awareness. ● Any accidental movement of the vehicle It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for Introduction could result in serious injury.  driving on slippery road surfaces, Snow optimising grip and manoeuvrability. The Park Assist system is an additional func- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all tion of ParkPilot ››› page 283 and helps the times to suit visibility, weather, road and WARNING driver to: traffic conditions. ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments When operating the Drive Profile, pay at- ● find a suitable parking space, do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could ● select a parking mode, nals. The system cannot detect, at least cause an accident. ● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- correctly, these objects or people wearing dicular and parallel spaces, such clothes. Note ● park driving forwards in suitable perpen- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ● ted by external sound sources. In certain When the vehicle is switched off it will dicular spaces, store the driving profile that was selected circumstances this may prevent them from when the ignition key was removed. Never- ● exit a parking space driving forwards from a detecting people or objects. parallel space. theless, when the engine is restarted, the ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots engine and the gear will start by default in In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- in which obstacles and people are not reg- the Normal setting. For engine and gear to istered. revert to the desired position, select the tory infotainment system, the front, rear and ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all corresponding drive profile again by rotat- side areas are represented, and the position times, since the ultrasound sensors do not ing the thumbwheel (Driving Experience of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle. detect small children, animals or certain Button) or selecting the profile on the Easy The Park Assist system is subject to certain objects in all situations. Connect display. limitations inherent to the system and its use ● When the vehicle is restarted after using requires special attention by the driver ››› . the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is WARNING always activated in the Sport profile. WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when ● Your speed and driving style must always parking or exiting a parking space with Park The technology used in the park assist sys- be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic Assist can cause serious injury. tem involves a series of limitations inherent conditions. in the actual system and in the use of ultra- ● Do not hold the steering wheel during sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space » never tempt you to take any risk that may

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 273 Driving

until the system requests it. Doing so disa- – loss of sensor visibility. Description of the Park Assist system bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- – cancellation of the parking manoeuvre sulting in the parking being cancelled. or defective parking. ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- CAUTION aged, the area corresponding to that group ● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and sensors do not detect objects such as trail- cannot be activated until the fault is cor- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, rected. However, you can still use the sen- or an open (or opening) rear lid, which sors of the other bumper as per usual. If could damage the vehicle. there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. To do so, CUPRA recom- ● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- or any SEAT dealership. Fig. 226 In the centre console, top section: but- fere with the operation of the Park Assist ton to switch on the Park Assist system. system and cause damage. Note ● The Park Assist system uses as a refer- The components of the Park Assist system ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- ● In order to guarantee good system opera- are the ultrasonic sensors located in the jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the front and rear bumpers, the  button are not damaged while parking. If necessa- bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do ››› Fig. 226 to switch the system on and off ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- not cover them with adhesives or other ob- and the messages on the instrument panel noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. jects. display. ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough may be damaged or shifted in the event of a asphalt or paving stones and the noise of Prematurely stopping or automatically in- collision, for example, when entering or ex- other vehicles can induce the Park Assist terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or iting a parking space. system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- exiting a parking space ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ings. Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do ● To become familiar with the system and not apply it directly unless very briefly and its functions, CUPRA recommends that you parking or exiting a parking space in any of always from a distance of more than 10 cm. practice operating the Park Assist system in the following cases: an area where there is not too much traffic ● A registration plate or plate holder on the ● Press the  button. front with larger than the space for the reg- or in a car park. ● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: (4 mph). – false detections, ● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. 274 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

● The parking manoeuvre does not end While entering or exiting a parking space, a Trailer mode within 6 minutes from the activation of auto- brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to The Park Assist system cannot be switched matic steering. change between forward and reverse gears on if the factory-fitted towing bracket ● There is a fault in the system (the system is (depending on the case). In successive ma- ››› page 296 is electrically connected to a temporarily unavailable). noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to trailer. change gears, at the latest, when the contin- ● ASR is switched off. uous audible signal is given (object present After changing a wheel ● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. at a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot. If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops ● The driver door is opened. When the Park Assist system turns the steer- entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that ly, the circumference of the new wheel may strument panel also displays the symbol . none of these things occur and that the  be different and the system may need to Keep the brake pedal depressed while the button is pressed again. adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and symbol remains on the dash panel display to takes place during driving. Making turns turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. Special characteristics slowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 This way, the system will require fewer ma- mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to The Park Assist system is subject to certain noeuvres to complete the parking action. this adaptation process in Introduc- limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ››› tion on page 273. ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 275 Driving

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 227 Overview of reduced displays for parking modes:  Parallel parking in reverse.  Perpendicu- lar parking in reverse.  Perpendicular parking forwards.

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- Action play ››› Fig. 228. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards ››› Fig. 227. If the mode selected by the sys- the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side correspond- tem does not correspond to the desired 3. ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal is mode, you can select another mode by not on, it parks on the right in the direction of pressing the  button ››› Fig. 226. traffic.

Action If necessary, press the  button again to change to the next parking mode. The necessary conditions to park with Park As- 1. 4. Once you have switched to all possible parking Fig. 228 On the instrument panel display: display sist have to be met ››› page 278. of the assisted parking system with decreased visi- modes, if the  button is pressed again, the bility. Press the  button. system switches off.

A control lamp on the  button lights up when Press the  button again to switch the system Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist 5. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- back on. with prior step in front of the space 2. lected parking mode is shown on the instru- Follow the instructions displayed on the instrument panel display and the reduced display After activating the Park Assist system and 6. ment panel while paying attention to traffic and shows another parking mode it can be changed after detecting a parking space, the display drive the vehicle past the parking space. to. on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected 276 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Special case of perpendicular parking Action Action space to park forwards without driving Drive forward towards the parking space while Press the  button once. past first 2. paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle. Action A control lamp on the  button lights up when 3. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- The necessary conditions to park with Park As- lected parking mode is shown on the instru- 1. sist have to be met ››› page 278. ment panel display without reduced display. Release the steering wheel in Introduc- 4. ››› tion on page 273.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 277 Driving

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 229 On the instrument panel display: perpendicular parking.  Finding a parking space.  Park- ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 230 On the instrument panel display: parallel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 229 and Fig. 230: Progress bars Necessary conditions to park with Park As- 1 Message to move forwards The progress bar sist 2 Your vehicle ››› Fig. 229 7 and ››› Fig. 230 7 on the For parallel parking For perpendicular screen of the instrument panel displays the 3 Parked vehicle spaces parking spaces relative distance to be covered. The greater 4 Parking space detected the distance, the fuller the progress bar. The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 223. 5 Message to park When driving forward, the content of the ››› progress bar decreases upwards, and when 6 Message to press the brake pedal reversing, it decreases downwards. 7 Progress bar

278 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

For parallel parking For perpendicular Do the following: Do the following: spaces parking spaces Please note the following message: Automatic Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal Do not exceed approxi- Do not exceed approxi- steering enabled. Pay attention to is heard. mately 40 km/h mately 20 km/h your surroundings. OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- (25 mph) when driving (12 mph) when driving 9. play shows the message to reverse. past the parking space. past the parking space. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h 5. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when (4 mph). ward and back until it centres it in the space driving past the parking space. During the parking manoeuvre, the system only ››› Fig. 229  or ››› Fig. 230 . Length of the space: Width of the space: width takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, For best results, wait at the end of each ma- length of the vehicle + of the vehicle + 0.8 me- have to accelerate, engage the clutch if nec- noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finished 0.8 metres tres essary, change gears and brake. turning the steering wheel. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is 10. The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre- parking. heard. sponding message is displayed on the instru- OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig- Parking the message to go forwards ››› Fig. 229  nal sounds.  6. or ››› Fig. 230 . Do the following: OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays Note the message Park Assist finished. The necessary conditions have to be met to If the manoeuvre is terminated premature- 1. park with Park Assist page 278 and the park- ››› The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to ly during parking, the result may not be the ing mode must be selected page 276. ››› cover ››› page 278. best. Look at the display on the instrument panel to Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist see if the space has been detected as “appro- system has finished turning the steering wheel. priate” and if the correct position for parking has 7.   2. been reached ››› Fig. 229 or ››› Fig. 230 . OR: until the  symbol on the instrument panel display switches off. The space is considered “appropriate” if the display on the instrument panel shows the mes- 8. Select first gear. sage to park 5 .

Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage 3. the reverse gear.

Release the steering wheel in Introduc- 4. ››› tion on page 273.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 279 Driving

Exiting a parking space with Park As- ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h For parallel parking spaces sist (only for parallel spaces) (4 mph) when exiting the parking space. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc- Exiting a parking space tion on page 273. Do the following: Please note the following message: Automatic steering enabled. Pay attention to For parallel parking spaces your surroundings. 6. While you keep watch around you, carefully The necessary conditions to exit a parking start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h 1. space with Park Assist have to be met (4 mph). ››› page 280. When exiting the parking space, the system on- 2. Switch on the engine page 214. ››› ly takes charge of the steering. You, as the driv- Press the  button ››› Fig. 226. er, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if Fig. 231 On the instrument panel display: driving necessary, change gears and brake. 3. off from perpendicular parking. A control lamp on the  button lights up when the system is switched on. Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is heard. Key to the Fig. 231: Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards OR: go backwards until the instrument panel 1 4. the road you will enter when exiting the parking 7. Parked vehicle display shows the message to go forward. space. 2 Your vehicle in reverse gear The progress bar Fig. 231 3 indicates the Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to ››› 3 Progress bar to indicate the distance left 5. distance to cover page 278. position R. ››› to cover Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist 4 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre system has finished turning the steering wheel. to exit the parking space 8. OR: press down the brake pedal until the  symbol on the instrument panel display Necessary conditions to exit a parking switches off. space with Park Assist Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal ● Only for parallel parking spaces is heard. ● The traction control system (ASR) must be OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- 9. turned on ››› page 223. play shows the message to reverse. ● Length of the space: length of the vehicle The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- + 0.5 metres ward and back until it can exit the space.

280 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

For parallel parking spaces 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the cor- Parking aid parking and ma- responding operation is halted. The vehicle can exit the space when a corre- noeuvring (ParkPilot) sponding message is displayed on the instru- Automatic braking to reduce damages ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig- 10. nal sounds. Depending on certain conditions, the Park Introduction Assist system can automatically brake the ve- Take charge of the steering with the turning an- hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- Assorted assistance systems – which vary de- gle set by the Park Assist system. tioning and holding down the brake ped- pending on the equipment fitted in the car – Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking al . Following this the driver must press will help you when parking or manoeuvring: 11. ››› space. the brake pedal. – Parking System Plus. It assists the driver Automatic braking intervention to reduce by visually and audibly warning them about damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- obstacles detected in front and behind the Automatic braking intervention by ishing. vehicle ››› page 283. Park Assist – Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visual WARNING assistant that warns about obstacles loca- Park Assist helps the driver by automatically The automatic braking intervention by Park ted behind the vehicle ››› page 287. braking in certain situations. Assist should never tempt you to take any The driver is always responsible for braking in risk that may compromise safety. The sys- WARNING time ››› . tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ● Always pay attention, also when looking ness. straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle Automatic braking intervention to avoid ● The Park Assist system is subject to cer- surroundings. The assistance systems are exceeding the speed limit tain limitations inherent to the system. In not a replacement for driver awareness. certain situations, the automatic braking When inserting or removing the vehicle To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- intervention may only work in a limited way from a parking space, or when performing prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leav- or not work at all. similar manoeuvres the driver always as- ing a parking space, the brakes may activate ● Always be ready to use the brakes your- sumes the responsibility. automatically. After automatically activating self! ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a times to suit visibility, weather, road and parking space may continue. ● The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- traffic conditions. The brakes are only automatically activated wards, brake the vehicle yourself. ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots once for each attempt to enter or exit a in which obstacles and people are not reg- parking space. If the speed of approximately istered. Pay special attention to children and animals. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 281 Driving

● Always keep visual control of the sur- as high kerbs that could damage the bot- ● In order to guarantee good system opera- roundings: use the mirrors for additional tom of the vehicle are not detected either. tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, help. ● If the first warning from the Parking Aid is free of snow or ice, and do not cover them ignored, the vehicle could suffer consider- with adhesives or other objects. CAUTION able damage. ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equipment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- ● The knocks or damage on the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle unit directly only very briefly and always from fected by different factors that may lead to a distance of more than 10 cm. damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- derbody can adjust the orientation of the rounds: sensors. This can affect the parking aid ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, function. In this case, have the function such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with ● Under certain circumstances, the system checked by a specialised workshop. the operation of the Parking Aid. does not detect or display certain objects: ● A registration plate or plate holder on the ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of – Objects such as chains, trailer draw front with larger than the space for the reg- the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- bars, fences, posts and thin trees. istration plate, or a registration plate that is vertising, may interfere with the operation – Objects that are located above the sen- curved or warped can cause: of the Park Assist. sors, such as protrusions in a wall. – false detections, ● In order to familiarise yourself with the – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- – loss of sensor visibility. system, it is advised that you practice park- tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- ing in an area or car park that is free from der snow. traffic. There must be good weather and Note ● Certain surfaces of objects and garments light conditions. do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- ● In certain situations, the system can give ● The volume and tone of the warnings can nals. The system cannot detect these ob- a warning even though there is no obstacle be modified, in addition to the indications jects or people wearing such clothes cor- in the detected area, e.g: ››› page 289. rectly. – with rough or cobbled floors or ground ● In vehicles without an infotainment sys- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- with long grass; tem, these parameters can be modified in a ted by external sound sources. In certain – with external ultrasound sources, such specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official circumstances this may prevent them from as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles Service or in a specialised workshop. detecting people or objects. equipped with ultrasound systems; ● Please observe information on towing a ● Please note that low obstacles detected – in downpours, intense snow, hail or trailer ››› page 289. by the system may no longer be registered dense exhaust gases, ● The display on the Easy Connect screen by the sensors as the car moves closer, so shows a slight time delay. the system will not give any further warn- – if the number plate is not perfectly se- ing. In certain circumstances, objects such cured to the bumper surface, – or in locations such as the brow of a hill. 282 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Parking System Plus* like, as this could affect the system's opera- ● When the ASR is switched off. tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 335. ● When there is ASR or ESC regulation. Description The approximate measurement range of the ● If the vehicle remains stationary for more sensors is: than approximately 3 minutes.

A 1.20 m B 1.60 m Parking Aid operation C 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time interval between the audible warnings will be reduced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)! Fig. 232 Represented area. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, the volume of the warning begins to reduce During parking, Parking System Plus assists after four seconds (does not affect the tone Fig. 233 Centre console: parking aid button (de- the driver by visually and audibly warning of the constant warning). pending on the version). them about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle. In order to view the entire periphery of the vehicle, the vehicle must be moved a few Manual connection of Parking Aid There are ultrasound sensors integrated in metres forwards or backwards. Thus, the ● Press the  button once. the front and rear bumpers. When they de- missing areas are screened and obstacles at tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible the sides of the vehicle are displayed Manual disconnection of Parking Aid warnings and visually on the Easy Connect ››› Fig. 232 C . system. ● Press the  button again. Special features of ParkPilot with Area In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au- Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- View dible warning will be emitted. You can tell play (the audible sounds remain active) whether the risk is in front of or behind the In the following situations the screened area ● Press a button on the main menu of the vehicle by choosing different sound fre- on the side of the vehicle is automatically factory-assembled infotainment system. quencies on Easy Connect. hidden: ● OR press the BACK function button. » Make particularly sure that the sensors are ● When a vehicle door is opened. not covered by adhesives, residues and the https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 283 Driving

Automatic connection of Parking Aid A short confirmation signal will be heard and ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector the button symbol will light up yellow when again. lever to position R. the system is switched on. ● OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be- ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle fore reducing speed below this number that is in its forwards path at a speed below again. Automatic activation 15 km/h (9 mph) ››› page 284. The obstacle ● OR: place the selector lever in position P is detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm and then move it from this position. if the automatic connection is activated in ● OR: switch on and off the automatic acti- the infotainment system. A reduced display is vation in the Easy Connect system menu. shown. ● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards. The automatic activation with parking aid miniature indication can be switched on and off from the Easy Connect system menu Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ›››  page 33: ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● ● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) Switch the ignition on. or faster. ● Select: Infotainment button  SETTINGS Fig. 234 Miniature indication of automatic activa- > Parking and manoeuvring function but- Temporary suppression of sound in Park- tion. ton. ing Aid ● Select the Automatic activation op- When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- tion. When the function button check box is ● Press the  function button. matically, a miniature of the vehicle and the activated , the function is on. segments will appear on the left of the dis- Change from reduced view to full view play ››› Fig. 234. If the system has been activated automati- ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- cally, an audible sound warning will only be lever to position R. proaching an obstacle located in front of the given when obstacles in front are at a dis- ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. vehicle. It only operates every time the tance of less than 50 cm. speed is reduced below approximately If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time. CAUTION age (Rear View Camera “RVC”) If the parking aid is switched off using the  The automatic connection of the Parking ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector button, the following actions must be carried Aid only works when you are driving slowly. lever to position R. out in order for it to automatically switch on: ● OR press the RVC function button. 284 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

If driving style is not adapted to the circum- Yellow segments: obstacles located in the Adjusting the display and audible stances, an accident and serious injury or vehicle's trajectory and which are more warnings damage may be caused. than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow. The settings for the display and audible Red segments: obstacles that are less than warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- Segments of the visual indication 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- nect*. played in red. Automatic activation Moreover, a yellow trail indicates the vehicle's expected trajectory based on the steer-  on – activates the Automatic activa- ing wheel angle. tion option ››› page 284. Whenever the obstacle is located in the ve-  off – deactivates the Automatic acti- hicle’s direction of travel, the corresponding vation option ››› page 284. audible warning will sound. Front volume* As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. Volume in the front and rear area. When the penultimate segment is displayed, Fig. 235 Parking Aid display on the Easy Connect this means that the vehicle has reached the Front sound settings/sharpness* system screen. collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front stacles are represented in red, including area. The distance of separation from the obstacle those out of the path. Do not continue to can be estimated using the segments around move forward (or backward) ››› in Intro- Rear volume* the vehicle. duction on page 281, in Introduction ››› Volume in the rear area. The optical indication of the segments works on page 282 ! as follows: In the event the car is equipped with the Top Rear sound settings/sharpness* View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- White segments: they are displayed when Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear ance will appear in accordance with the view the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- area. selected in the Top View Camera system. cle or further if it is not within the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of travel Adjust volume is in the opposite direction to its loca- With the parking aid switched on, the active tion, and also when the electronic park- audio/video source volume will be reduced ing brake is activated. to the intensity of the selected setting. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 285 Driving

Error messages Driving with a trailer Braking while manoeuvring function* 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- The emergency braking function is used to ing aid error is displayed on the instrument minimise damage in the event of a collision. panel, there is a fault in the system. Depending on the equipment, if the Parking If the fault does not disappear before dis- Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring connecting the ignition, the next time that function activates emergency braking when the parking aid is engaged in reverse, no au- it detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path dible signal of the existence of a fault will be that could cause a collision, driving forwards issued. or in reverse. If there is a fault in the parking aid system a Fig. 236 Parking assist display on the screen with The function will not brake if the Parking Aid message will appear on the instrument panel trailer attached. is activated automatically. For the system to indicating the error. operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 displayed on the Easy Connect display in device from the factory, when the trailer is mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear. sensors will not be activated when reverse faulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis- Following an intervention, the braking while gear is engaged, when the selector lever is played ››› Fig. 232. If a front sensor is faulty, manoeuvring function will be inactive in the turned to position R or when the button  is only the obstacles in area B are displayed. same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once pressed. Have the fault corrected by a specialised the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s workshop without delay. The distance to possible obstacles at the position is changed, the function will be ac- rear of the vehicle and at its sides will not be tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap- displayed on the screen and will not be indi- ply. cated by means of audible sound signals. The braking while manoeuvring function is The Easy Connect system screen will only controlled in the Easy Connect system with display objects detected at the front, and the the  button and the SETTINGS > Park vehicle's trajectory will be hidden. and manoeuvre function buttons.

●  on – permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

286 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

●  off – does not permit the use of the Make particularly sure that the sensors are If you maintain separation from the obstacle, braking while manoeuvring function. not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the volume of the warning begins to reduce the like, as this could affect the system's op- after four seconds (does not affect the tone Temporary suppression of emergency eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 335. of the constant warning). braking The approximate measurement range of the ● When the function is deactivated with the rear sensors is: Braking while manoeuvring button that appears Parking Aid operation on the Parking System screen of the Easy Side area: 0.60 m Connect system. Central area: 1.60 m Parking Aid connection ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or ● Move the selector lever to the R position. bonnet are opened. Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. Parking Aid disconnection ● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) ● Position the selector lever in P, N or D. or faster. Rear parking aid* Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 Temporary suppression of sound in Park- Description seconds before switching off. During that ing Aid time, Parking assist will switch off if: The rear parking aid is an audible and visual ● Press the  function button. assistant that warns of obstacles located be- ● The selector lever is moved to position P. hind the vehicle. Change from reduced view to full view ● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. There are sensors integrated in the rear ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you lever to position R. If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear are alerted by audible warnings and visually ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. parking aid will be automatically deactivated on the Easy Connect system. when disengaging reverse gear. As you approach the obstacle, the time in- If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rear terval between the audible warnings will be parking aid will issue an audible warning Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- reduced. When you reach around 0.30 m about objects near the rear of the vehicle, play (the audible sounds remain active) the warning will be constant: Do not contin- and the Top View Camera* image will be ue to move forward (or backward) in In- ● Press a button on the main menu of the available on the Easy Connect screen, giving ››› troduction on page 281, in Introduc- factory-assembled infotainment system. a real image of the objects around the car. ››› tion on page 282 ! ● OR press the BACK function button. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 287 Driving

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- Segments of the visual indication Red segments: obstacles that are less than ing Aid 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- ● Press the  function button. If you have played in red. the Top View Camera* system installed, you Whenever the obstacle is located in the ve- cannot use the temporary suppression of hicle’s direction of travel, the corresponding sound in Parking Aid. audible warning will sound.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view if As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. “RVC”) When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the ● Press the car icon in the reduced view. collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob- Fig. 237 Parking Aid display on the Easy Connect stacles are represented in red (including If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- system screen. those out of the path). Do not continue to age (Rear View Camera “RVC”) reverse ››› in Introduction on page 281, ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ››› in Introduction on page 282! lever to position R. ted with the help of the segments at the rear ● OR: press the RVC function button. of the vehicle. If you are equipped with the Top View Camera* The optical indication of the segments works as follows: Segments are not displayed when the vehicle is equipped with Top View Camera*. White segments: they are displayed when the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- The Parking Aid system will issue an audible cle or further if the direction of travel is warning for objects that are near the rear of in the opposite direction to its location, the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im- and also when the electronic parking age will be available on the screen, giving a brake is activated. real image of the objects around the car. Yellow segments: obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow.

288 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Adjusting the display and audible If there is a fault in a sensor, the  symbol is cisely, so using them could cause serious warnings displayed on the Easy Connect display. accidents and injury. Have the fault corrected by a specialised ● The camera lenses augment and distort The settings for the display and audible workshop without delay. the visual field and the objects on the warnings are controlled via the Easy screen are seen differently and imprecisely. Connect*. ● Certain objects may not be shown or may Towing bracket not be shown very clearly, for example, Rear volume* posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu- Volume in the rear area. In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket tion or if light conditions are insufficient. device from the factory, when the trailer is ● The cameras have blind spots in which Rear sound settings/sharpness* connected electrically, the Parking Aid will obstacles and people are not registered. not be activated, even when the selector lev- Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear ● The camera lens must be kept free, with- er is placed in the R position. area. out snow or ice, and should not be covered.

Adjust volume WARNING With the parking aid switched on, the active Top View Camera* The smart technology incorporated into audio/video source volume will be reduced the Top View Camera* system cannot over- to the intensity of the selected setting. Introduction come the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of Using 4 cameras, the system generates a the system. The greater convenience provided by the Area View system should never Error messages representation that is shown on the infotainment system display. The cameras are loca- tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. If used negligently or invol- ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors When the Parking Aid is activated or when it untarily, it may cause serious accidents and and the rear lid. is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- injuries. The system is not a replacement ing aid error is displayed on the instrument The functions and representations of the for driver awareness. panel, there is a fault in the system. Area View system may vary depending on ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit If the fault disappears before disconnecting whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- the ignition, the next time that the parking tions. aid is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of WARNING ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by the existence of a fault will be issued. The image from the cameras does not looking at the screen. » make it possible to calculate the distance to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) pre- https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 289 Driving

● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to Key to the Fig. 238: times, since the cameras do not capture clean the camera lenses. Symbol Meaning small children, animals and certain objects ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove in all situations. ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing D Left camera area ● The use of a number plate may interfere so could damage the lenses. in the views shown on the screen, since the  Exit the current display. cameras' field of vision may be reduced.  Three-dimensional views ● The system will probably be unable to Area View system represent all areas clearly. Depending on the equipment: con-  necting and disconnecting the ParkPi- lot sound. CAUTION ● The camera images are only two-dimen- Adjust the display: bright, contrast and  colour. sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, objects that jut out or holes on the road, for The aerial view is generated by combining example, are more difficult to detect or  may not be seen at all. the images from all the cameras ››› Fig. 238. The aerial view can be selected ● In certain circumstances, the camera by pressing the vehicle in the area. does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could Select the corresponding view by pressing damage the vehicle. Fig. 238 Display of the Area View system: aerial the different areas ››› Fig. 238 A to D of the ● The system displays the auxiliary lines view. aerial view or the reduced aerial view. and boxes regardless of the vehicle's environment, no objects are detected. The There are four different views to choose Conditions necessary for the use of the driver is responsible for determining that from: Area View system the vehicle will fit in the parking space. ● Key to the Fig. 238: The doors and the rear lid must be closed. ● The image must be reliable and clear. For CAUTION Symbol Meaning this reason, for example, the camera lens In order to guarantee good system opera- must be clean. A Front camera area tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow ● The area around the vehicle must be clear- or ice, and do not cover them with adhe- B Right camera area ly and totally visible. sives or other objects. ● The area for parking or manoeuvring C Rear camera area should be a flat surface. 290 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

● The vehicle should not be loaded very shown on the right side displays the view Connecting and disconnecting the Area heavily at the rear. framed in yellow. In addition, the right mar- View system ● The driver must be used to the system. gin of the screen displays the menu options possible and the views (the so-called Press the  button ››› Fig. 239 ● There should be no damage to the vehicle “modes”) of the camera in question. The ac- once. in the camera area. If the position or installa- tive view (mode) at the time is highlighted. Manual con- tion angle of the cameras have been The infotainment system screen dis- nection of the plays the aerial view Fig. 238. If changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the The reduced aerial view can be hidden by ››› display: you press the  button when driv- pressing the  symbol to thus display the se- system should be checked by a specialised ing above 15 km/h (9 mph), the im- workshop. lected view full-screen. age will not be displayed.

Camera image view Engage reverse gear. OR: The vehicle moves backwards. ● Aerial view (bird's eye view): to obtain a Instructions for use Automatic panoramic view of the vehicle , three-di- connection of The view of the image of the vehi- the display: cle's rear camera is shown in parallel mensional views, from different camera posi- parking mode with the reduced aer- tions. ial view. ● Front camera (front view): to observe Press the  button ››› Fig. 239 traffic ahead of the vehicle (vehicles cross- again. ing) , for front parallel parking , when Manual dis- OR: press a button on the factory- approaching an obstacle and in off-road connection of equipped infotainment system, for driving . the display: example the RADIO button. ● Side cameras (side view): to view the area close to the sides of the vehicle, both on the Fig. 239 Centre console: button for activat- OR: press the  function button. left  and on the right , or a combination of ing/deactivating the Area View system manually in combination with the parking aid system () or Drive forwards at over 15 km/h both sides . else with the rear ParkPilot system (). Automatic dis- (9 mph) approximately. ● Rear camera (rear view): To observe traf- connection of OR: switch off the ignition. The Area fic behind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , the display: View system menu disappears im- for reverse perpendicular parking , for re- mediately. » verse parallel parking  and for hitching a trailer to the vehicle .

The selected view is displayed on the right side of the screen. The reduced aerial view

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 291 Driving

Special characteristics Top View Camera system menus Key to the Fig. 240: (modes) Examples of optical illusions caused by the Symbol Meaning cameras:  Exiting the Area View system screen: The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is Adjust the display: bright, contrast and difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes  colour. there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehicles. Aerial views (bird's eye view) Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they really are: View On-screen display of all cameras

– On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope. Main The vehicle and its immediate vicinity mode seen from above are shown. Depending – On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane. on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path  may also be displayed. – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. The vehicle and its vicinity – If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These  seen from above are shown. objects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibility. Three-di- The vehicle and its vicinity mensional seen from above are shown Trailer mode  views obliquely. The Area View system conceals, in the rear Fig. 240 Display on the Area View system screen: The vehicle and its vicinity camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines Front camera: off-road view. Rear camera:  seen obliquely are shown. when the factory-fitted towing bracket is off-road view. connected electrically to a trailer Swipe the infotainment system display with ››› page 296. Key to the Fig. 240: your finger in the direction of the arrows to Symbol Meaning change the angle of vision in the three-di- Note mensional views of the vehicle and its vicini- To become familiar with the system and its Depending on the equipment: con- ty. functions, CUPRA recommends that you  necting and disconnecting the ParkPi- lot sound. practice handling the Area View system in an area where there is not too much traffic  Showing the reduced display. or in a car park.  Hiding the reduced display.

292 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems

Front camera views (front view) On-screen display of the side On-screen display of the rear View View On-screen display of the front cameras camera View camera Left side The area directly next to the vehicle, The vehicle's rear is presented. The  on the driver's or front passenger's red auxiliary line establishes the safety Left side of the screen: perpendicular side, is displayed, and the blind spots distance. street to the left. all along the vehicle can be seen. The Cross traffic Green and red semicircular auxiliary Middle of the screen: area directly in Right side auxiliary orange line is shown at a dis- at the front lines are displayed in vehicles with a front of the vehicle.  tance of approx. 0.4 m away from the  vehicle. factory-fitted towing bracket. The aux- Right side of the screen: perpendicular Off-road or iliary lines indicate the distance from street to the right. hitching a the towing bracket. The distance be- Rear camera views (rear view) trailer func- tween the auxiliary (green and red) Parallel park- The area in front of the vehicle is tion lines is approximately 0.3 m. The or- On-screen display of the rear ing shown. Orientation lines are shown to View  ange auxiliary line indicates, depend-  give guidance. camera ing on the turn of the steering wheel, the pre-calculated direction of the Parallel park- The area directly in front of the vehicle The area behind the vehicle is shown. towing bracket. ing seen from above is shown. For exam- Auxiliary lines are shown to give guid- In vehicles with a factory-fitted towing Off-road ple, on a slope, in order to see the area ance.  bracket, the distance from the red directly in front of the vehicle. The red  auxiliary line to the vehicle is approx. line is shown at a distance of approx. The vehicle's initial position on initiat- 0.4 m. No other lines are shown. 0.4 m away from the vehicle. Perpendicu- ing this function will be a decisive fac- lar parking tor in determining the place where the Left side of the screen: perpendicular  manoeuvre executed by the assistant Side camera views (side view) street to the left. will end. Cross traffic Middle of the screen: area directly be- On-screen display of the side at the rear View hind the vehicle. cameras  Right side of the screen: perpendicular The areas located directly to the side street to the right. of the vehicle seen from above are Right and represented in order to navigate possi- left sides ble obstacles more precisely. The or-  ange auxiliary lines are shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 away from the vehicle

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 293 Driving

Rear Assist (Rear View Cam- ● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice – When the vehicle approaches objects era)* and snow, and do not cover it. that are not on the ground surface or ● The system is not a replacement for driv- are jutting out from it. These objects er awareness. Supervise the parking opera- may also be outside the camera's angle Operating and safety warnings tion at all times, as well as the vehicle's sur- of vision when reversing. rounding area. Adapt your speed and driv- WARNING ing style at all times to suit visibility, weath- Note er, road and traffic conditions. ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible ● It is important to take great care and pay to precisely calculate the distance from ob- ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by special attention if you are not yet familiar stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can looking at the screen. with the system. it overcome the system's own limits, hence ● The images on the rear assist screen are ● Rear assist will not be available if the ve- using it may cause serious accidents and in- only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa- hicle's rear lid is open. juries if used negligently or without due tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the care. The driver should be aware of his/her road, for example, are more difficult to de- surroundings at all times to ensure safe tect or may not be seen at all. driving. ● Vehicle load modifies the representation Instructions for use ● The camera lens expands and distorts the of the orientation lines displayed. The field of vision and displays the objects on width represented by the lines diminishes the screen in a different, vague manner. with vehicle load. Pay special attention to The perception of distances is also distor- the vehicle's surroundings when the inside ted by this effect. of the vehicle of the luggage compartment ● Due to the screen resolution or insuffi- is carrying a heavy load. cient light conditions, some items may be ● In the following situations, the objects or displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- not at all. Take special care with thin posts, tem display appear to be further away or fences, railings or trees that might not be closer than they really are: Pay special at- displayed on screen and could damage the tention: vehicle. – On moving from a horizontal plane to a Fig. 241 On the rear lid handle: location of the ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is slope. rear assist camera. not possible to represent people or objects – On moving from a slope to a horizontal A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- (small children, animals and certain objects plane. cannot be detected in its field of vision). sists the driver in reverse parking or ma- Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the noeuvring ››› Fig. 241. The camera image is rear. all times. viewed together with orientation lines 294 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Driver assistance systems projected by the system on the Easy Connect ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or CAUTION system screen. The bottom of the screen is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty displays part of the bumper corresponding lens. ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens. to the number plate area that will be used as ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove reference by the driver. played very clearly or is incomplete. ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. Rear assist settings could damage the camera. ● If the position and installation angle of the Rear assist offers the user the possibility to camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- change the image's brightness, contrast and end collision. Have the system checked by a colour settings. Parking and manoeuvring with the specialised workshop. rear assist To change these settings: Familiarising yourself with the system ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. To familiarise yourself with the system, the ● Apply the parking brake. orientation lines and their function, CUPRA ● Switch the ignition on. recommends practising parking and ma- ● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connect noeuvring with the rear assist in a place with- system. out too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility condi- ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector tions. lever to position R.

● Press the  function button displayed on Cleaning the camera lens the right of the image. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of Fig. 242 Display on the Easy Connect system ● Make the desired adjustments on the snow and ice: screen: guidance lines. menu by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by moving the corresponding scroll but- ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- Switching the system on and off ton. based glass cleaning product and clean the ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- lens with a dry cloth. tion is on or the engine running and the se- Necessary conditions for parking and ma- ● Remove snow using a small brush. lector lever is changed to the R position. noeuvring with the rear assist ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. ● The system disconnects 8 seconds after The system should not be used in the follow- removing the selector lever from the R posi- ing cases: tion. The system will also disconnect immediately after switching off the ignition. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 295 Driving

● The camera will stop transmitting images Meaning of the orientation lines Towing bracket device* above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- ››› Fig. 242 verse engaged. 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the Trailer mode In combination with the Parking System Plus approximate width of the vehicle plus the page 283, the camera image will cease to rear view mirrors) on the road surface. ››› Introduction be transmitted immediately when reverse 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in gear is disengaged or when the selector lever green ends approximately 2 m behind Take into account country-specific regula- is moved from the R position, and the optical the vehicle on the road surface. tions about driving with a trailer and the use information provided by the Parking Aid sys- 3 Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi- of a towing bracket. tem will be displayed. mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the The vehicle has been developed primarily for Also in combination with the system, the rear road surface. carrying people, although it can also be used assist image can also be concealed: 4 Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis- to tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond- ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear ing technical equipment. This additional load buttons on the display. of the vehicle on the road surface. has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in ● OR: by pressing the miniature vehicle that Parking manoeuvre some cases can reduce the service intervals. appears on the left of the screen (which switches to the full-screen mode of the ● Stop the vehicle in front of a parking space Driving with a trailer requires more force Parking System Plus's optical system). and place the selector lever in the R position. from the vehicle, and thus more concentra- ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel tion from the driver. If you wish to display the rear assist image so that the side orientation lines lead to- again: In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on wards the parking space. both the vehicle and the trailer. ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so lever's position, engage reverse again or that the side orientation lines run parallel to Maximum vertical load technically permis- move the selector lever to position R. it. sible on the coupling ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) The maximum vertical load technically permitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing bracket's tow hitch is 80 kg.

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be activated and available when the selector lever is set to position R. 296 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Towing bracket device*

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a ● Take great care when overtaking. If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing perfect state of repair and is properly se- ● Reduce speed immediately if you notice bracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA, cured. that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. the Start-Stop system operates as normal. ● Never modify or repair the towing bracket ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h No special characteristics need to be taken in any way. (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more into account. ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- If the system does not recognise the trailer the event of rear-end collisions and to cumstances). This also applies in countries or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists where driving at higher speeds is permit- by CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must be when parking the vehicle, cover or remove ted. Take into account the speed limit for the tow hitch when you are not using a trail- vehicles with trailers in the corresponding disconnected by pressing the corresponding er. country, as it could be less than the speed button in the lower part of the centre con- limit for vehicles without a trailer. sole before driving with the trailer, and it ● Never fit a towing bracket “with weight should remain off for the rest of the jour- distribution” or “load compensation”. The ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing ney ››› . vehicle has not been designed for this type vehicle and trailer while accelerating. of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released Vehicles with driving profile selection WARNING from the vehicle. If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stop of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- WARNING ded. You are advised to select another of the system must be disconnected manually available driving profiles before beginning to Driving with a trailer and transporting whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise drive with a trailer. heavy or large objects can affect driving the brake system could be damaged and properties and even cause an accident. could consequently cause a serious acci- WARNING ● Always secure the load properly using dent or injury. belts or straps that are suitable and in good ● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system Never use the trailer to transport people, condition. manually when using a towing bracket that since it would put their life in danger and is has not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop. also prohibited. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Note WARNING ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are ● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- Undue use of the towing bracket may cause more likely to overturn than those with a ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm injury and accidents. low one. ››› page 112. Otherwise, the tilt sensor ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. could cause the alarm to go off. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 297 Driving

● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- The towing bracket should not impair the first 1000 km ››› page 232. sages. bumper's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the ● CUPRA recommends that, if possible, the ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity brake system. Make regular checks to ensure tow hitch be disassembled or covered when and in a safe place. it is not going to be used. In the event of a that the towing bracket is secure. rear-end collision, the damage to the vehi- CAUTION cle could be greater if the bracket is fitted. Engine cooling system ● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- Driving with a trailer increases the load on the rear towing eye. In these cases, the responding text messages when they light the engine and cooling system. The cooling towing eye should not be used for tow- up may result in damage to the vehicle. system should have sufficient coolant and be starting or for towing other vehicles. For prepared for the additional effort involved in this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- driving with a trailer. ted with a towing bracket, always keep the Technical requirements tow hitch in the vehicle when you disassem- Trailer brakes ble it. Vehicles that are factory-equipped with a If the trailer has its own brake system, please towing bracket fulfil all the technical and le- take the relevant legal requirements into ac- gal requirements for driving with a trailer. count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- Control lamp If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing tem to the vehicle's brake system. bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for  Lamp on button lights up the maximum authorised load of the trailer Tow rope that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing The tow hitch is not securely locked in position. Always use a cable between the vehicle and bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and Check that the towing bracket is locked ››› page 299. the trailer ››› page 301. the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing Some warning and control lamps will light up Trailer rear lights briefly when the ignition is switched on to bracket that has been authorised by CUPRA The trailer's rear lights should comply with check certain functions. They will switch off for this vehicle. Always check and take into the statutory safety regulations page 301. after a few seconds. account the towing bracket manufacturer's ››› instructions. Never fit a towing bracket “with Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly WARNING weight distribution” or “load compensation”. to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not If the warning lamps and the corresponding sure that the trailer's electrical connection is Towing bracket fitted on the bumper messages are ignored when they light up, correct, have it checked by a specialised the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause ac- Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or workshop. To do so, CUPRA recommends cidents and severe injuries. to the area where the bumper is mounted. 298 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Towing bracket device* going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any WARNING Electrical unlocking tow hitch SEAT dealership. If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become Exterior mirrors detached from the vehicle and cause seri- If you cannot see the area behind the trailer ous injury. with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be instal- CAUTION led in accordance with the regulations of the country in question. The exterior mirrors ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- should be adjusted before you start driving rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic and must provide a sufficient field of vision at system may be damaged. the rear. ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system Fig. 243 Right side of the boot: button to unlock Trailer maximum electricity consumption may be damaged. the tow hitch. ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- Consumers Europe, Asia, Af- Austral- tem directly to the electrical connections The tow hitch is located in the bumper. The rica, South ia of the tail lights or any other power sour- electrical unlocking tow hitch cannot be dis- America and ces. Only use the connections intended for assembled. Central America providing electric current to the trailer. There should be no person, animal or object Brake lights (to- 84 Watts 108 Watts in the path of the tow hitch ››› . tal) Unlock the tow hitch and remove it Turn signal (on 42 Watts 54 Watts each side) ● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic parking brake page 217. Side lights (on 50 Watts 100 Watts ››› each side) ● Switch off the engine.

Reverse lights (in 42 Watts 54 Watts ● Open the rear lid. total) ● Pull the ››› Fig. 243 button briefly. The tow Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts hitch unlocks electrically and automatically turns outwards. The control lamp in the but- Never exceed the values indicated! ton will flash ››› Fig. 243. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 299 Driving

● Remove the tow hitch with your hand until ● The control light of the lamp switches off CAUTION you feel and see that it has engaged and the approximately 1 minute after closing the read control lamp on the button stays on. lid. If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet di- ● Close the rear lid. rectly towards the retractable tow hitch or WARNING the trailer power socket, as this may dam- Cover the tow hitch Undue use of the towing bracket may cause age the joints or remove the grease neces- injury and accidents. ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic sary for lubrication. parking brake. ● Only use the tow hitch if it is properly engaged. ● Switch off the engine. Note ● Always ensure that no person, animal or ● At extremely low temperatures, the tow Unhook the trailer and interrupt the elec- object is to be found in the path of the tow hitch may be impossible to use. In this case, trical connection between it and the vehicle. hitch. If you are using an adapter, remove it from place the vehicle in a warmer location (for ● Never use a tool or instrument while the the trailer's power socket. example, a garage). tow hitch is moving. ● Open the rear lid. ● Never press the ››› Fig. 243 button when ● Pull the ››› Fig. 243 button briefly. The tow there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract- hitch unlocks electrically. when a carrier system or other accessories able tow hitch ● Turn the tow hitch under the bumper with are mounted on the tow hitch. ● your hand until you feel and see that it en- If the tow hitch is not attached properly, The maximum allowed weight of the carrier do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised gages and the control lamp on the system, including the load, is 75 kg. The car- workshop and have the towing bracket ››› Fig. 243 button stays on. rier system should not protrude more than checked. ● Close the rear lid. 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. ● If you detect any fault in the electrical Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes system or in the towing bracket, contact a Meaning of control lamp can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy- specialised workshop and ask them to cles must be mounted as close to the vehicle ● If the warning light of the button check it. as possible (tow hitch). ››› Fig. 243 is flashing, this means that the ● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 tow hitch has not been attached properly or mm at any one point, do not use the towing WARNING is damaged ››› . bracket under any circumstances. ● If the warning lamp stays on with the rear The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicycle rack mounted on the tow hitch can lid open, the tow hitch is correctly in place cause accidents and injury. both when engaged and when covered.

300 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Towing bracket device*

● Never exceed the maximum weight or Hooking up and connecting a trailer Key to the Fig. 244: the limits indicated above. Pin Meaning ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hitch below the ball be- 11 Earth for pin 10 cause, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack 12 Unassigned could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- 13 Earth for pin 9 cle. ● Always read and take the manufacturer Trailer power socket assembly instructions into account. The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between CAUTION Fig. 244 Diagram: assignment of the pins of the the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine trailer's electrical socket. If the maximum weight and limits indicated running, electrical devices on the trailer re- above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer ceive power from the electrical connection considerable damage. Key to the Fig. 244: (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket). ● Never exceed the values indicated! Pin Meaning If the system detects that a trailer has been 1 Left turn signal connected electrically, the electrical equip- Note ment on the trailer will receive voltage 2 Rear fog light CUPRA recommends removing, as far as through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for ex- possible, all removable parts of the bicycles 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 before setting off. These parts include, for ample, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical example, baskets and saddlebags, child 4 Right turn signal devices such as a fridge in a caravan only re- seats or batteries. This improves aerody- ceive electrical power if the engine is run- 5 Rear light, right namics and the centre of gravity of the rack ning (through pin 10). system. 6 Brake lights To avoid overloading the electrical system, 7 Rear light, left you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3, pin 11 or pin 13. 8 Reverse lights If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you 9 Permanent live will need to use an adapter cable. In this case 10 Live charge cable the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 301 Driving

Tow rope Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always of the tail lights or any other power sour- The tow rope must always be securely fixed turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the ces. to the towing vehicle and loose enough so tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. WARNING However, make sure that the cable does not Trailers with LED rear lights Contact between the pins of the trailer rub on the ground while driving. For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED power socket can cause short circuits, rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- overloading of the electrical system or fail- Trailer rear lights theft alarm system. ure of the lighting system, and consequent- Always check the trailer's rear lights to en- When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. sure they are working correctly and that they not go off when the electrical connection ● Never connect the pins of the trailer comply with the relevant safety regulations. with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with power socket to each other. Make sure that the maximum permissible light-emitting diodes. ● Make sure any work on bent pins is car- power that can be absorbed by the trailer is If the system cannot detect the attached ried out by a specialised workshop. not exceeded ››› page 299. trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an auto repair shop other than Connection to the anti-theft system CAUTION CUPRA, you must manually select the Nor- Do not leave the trailer connected to the The trailer is included in the anti-theft sys- mal profile before you start driving with a vehicle when parked; place it on its support tem if the following conditions are met: trailer attached. wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an falls due, for example, to a variation of the WARNING anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will If the cables are improperly or incorrectly be placed on the towing bracket and the ● If the trailer is electrically connected to the connected, it may lead to an excessive trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer towing vehicle through the trailer power amount of current supplied to the trailer, can be damaged. socket. which can cause abnormalities in the entire ● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- Note trailer are in perfect condition and have no dents and serious injuries. ● In case of malfunctioning of the electri- faults or damage. ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be cal systems of the vehicle or trailer, as well carried out on the electrical system are ● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the as of the anti-theft system, have these carried out by a specialised workshop. anti-theft alarm is activated. checked out by a specialised workshop. ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- ● If the trailer accessories consume energy When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- tem directly to the electrical connections gered if the electrical connection with the through the power socket to the trailer and trailer is cut off. 302 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Towing bracket device*

the engine is turned off, the battery will The vertical load increases the weight on the Tyre pressure discharge. rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- pacity. ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- electrical connection with the trailer will be ommendations. automatically cut. Gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable The gross combination weight is the actual pressure ››› page 322. Loading a trailer weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer. WARNING Technically permissible maximum trailer In some countries trailers are classified into If the maximum permissible axle weight, weight and vertical load on the coupling distinct categories. CUPRA recommends ob- the maximum load technically permissible device taining information from a specialised work- on the coupling point, the maximum au- The technically permissible maximum trailer shop regarding which type of trailer is most thorised vehicle weight or the gross combi- weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow suitable for your vehicle. nation weight of the towing vehicle and ››› . The vertical load on the coupling load trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious is exerted vertically from above on the tow Trailer loading injuries may occur. hitch of the towing bracket ››› page 345. The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer ● Never exceed the values indicated! The information on the maximum trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the ● The actual weight on the front and rear weight and vertical load on the coupling de- load must be as close as possible to the max- axles must never exceed the maximum vice contained in the type plate of the towing imum vertical load technically permissible on permissible axle weight. The weight on the bracket are experimental values only. The the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible weight. correct figures for your specific model, tributed between the back and front of the which may be lower than these figures, are trailer: given in the vehicle documentation. The in- WARNING ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy formation in the vehicle documentation objects are as near to the axle as possible or A shift in weight could jeopardize the sta- takes precedence at all times. above it. bility and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and To promote safety while driving, CUPRA rec- ● Secure the trailer load properly. ommends making the most of the maximum serious injuries. vertical load technically permissible on the ● Always load the trailer correctly. coupling device ››› page 296. An insufficient ● Always secure the load properly using vertical load has a negative influence on the belts or straps that are suitable and in good behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer. condition.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 303 Driving

Driving with a trailer ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail- WARNING er is loaded, then the load distribution is in- If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may Adjusting the headlights correct. Under these conditions, drive slowly lead to loss of control of the vehicle and se- and with extra caution. The front part of the vehicle may be raised rious injury. when the trailer is connected and the light Hill starts with a trailer ● Driving with a trailer and transporting may dazzle the rest of the traffic. heavy or large objects will change the vehi- Depending on the slope of the hill and the Adapt the height of the headlights using the cle handling and braking distances. combination weight of the towing vehicle headlight range adjuster page 1381). ● Always drive cautiously and carefully. ››› and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling Brake earlier than usual. backwards slightly when you first start up. Special characteristics of driving with a ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all trailer For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow- times to suit visibility, weather, road and ing: ● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes. gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- ● Press and hold the brake pedal. vent the jerking that can be caused by the ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- ● Press the  button to disconnect the locking of trailer wheels. tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- electronic parking brake ››› page 217. vres. ● Due to the gross combination weight of ● Move the selector lever to the D/S the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking ● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce page 224 position. distance increases. ››› speed immediately if you notice that the ● Pull out the  button and hold it in that trailer is swaying, however slightly. ● When going down a slope, go into a lower position to stop the towing vehicle and trailer ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing gear (in tiptronic automatic gearbox mode) with the electronic parking brake. vehicle and trailer while accelerating. to take advantage of the braking power provided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking ● Release the brake pedal. ● Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with a trailer, as it could be lower system could overheat and even fail. ● Start driving slowly. than for vehicles without a trailer. ● The trailer weight, as well as the gross ● Do not release the  button until the en- combination weight of the towing vehicle gine has sufficient force to start driving. and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle.

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights. 304 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Towing bracket device*

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and WARNING tomatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions. trailer The enhanced security provided by the electric stability control of the towing vehi- The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and cle and trailer should not lead you to take trailer together is an additional function of any risks that could compromise your safe- Retrofitting a towing bracket the electronic stability control (ESC). ty. If the system detects that the trailer is sway- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ing, it intervenes automatically with the driv- times to suit visibility, weather, road and er steering recommendation to reduce the traffic conditions. swaying of the trailer. ● Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. Requirements for the stabilisation of the ● When adjusting any settings, stop accel- towing vehicle and trailer erating. ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket or has been retro-fitted with WARNING a compatible towing bracket. The electric stability control for the towing ● The ESC and ASR are active. The control vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument all driving conditions. panel. ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- ● The trailer is electrically connected to the sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- towing vehicle through the trailer power so switched off. socket. ● The stability system does not always de- ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h tect light and unstable trailers, so it may not (approx. 37 mph). stabilise these correctly. ● The maximum vertical load technically ● When driving on slippery surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with permissible is being utilised on the coupling the stability system. device. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar. tip even without having previously swayed. ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip- ● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer Fig. 245 Limits and attachment points for retrofitting a towing bracket. » ped with a mechanical overrun brake. power socket is connected (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated au- https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 305 Driving

CUPRA recommends that towing brackets be ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex- tem to the electrical connections of the tail ample, it may very well be necessary to ad- lights or any other unsuitable power sour- just the cooling system or mount thermal ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- protection plates. To do so, CUPRA recom- nect the trailer. mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer ● The towing bracket should be retrofitted or any SEAT dealership. only at a specialised workshop. If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind. WARNING The distance between the centre of the If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- spherical head and the road Fig. 245 D ››› suitable, the trailer may separate from the must never be less than that indicated. This vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, ous accidents and fatal injuries. including the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device. Note Distance specifications ››› Fig. 245: Only use towing brackets that have been A Attachment points approved by CUPRA for the model in question. B 950.5 mm C 65 mm min. D 350-420 mm E 220 mm F 633.5 mm G 1,043 mm

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries.

306 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Care and maintenance

cilities to ensure that the parts are installed tioning. Due to the way the electronic com- Practical tips correctly and professionally. ponents are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- the faults. This can seriously impair safety, Care and maintenance rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is lead to excessive wear of components, and driven, such as a cruise control system or also invalidate your vehicle registration electronically-controlled suspension, must Accessories and modifications documents. be approved for use in your vehicle and bear to the vehicle the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- You will appreciate that your specialised CU- tion symbol). PRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifi- Accessories, replacement parts and If any additional electrical devices are fit- cations and/or work performed incorrectly repair work ted which do not serve to control the vehicle in the vehicle. itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  We therefore recommend that all work for advice before purchasing accessories sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in should be performed by a specialised CUPRA and replacement parts. the European Union). Service or a SEAT Official Service using genuine CUPRA parts®. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high WARNING standard of active and passive safety. For this WARNING reason, we recommend that you ask a speci- Accessories, for example telephone hold- alised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv- ers or cup holders, should never be fitted Incorrectly performed modifications or ice for advice before fitting accessories or on the covers, or within the working range other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- replacement parts. Your Official Service has of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger functions and cause accidents. the latest information from the manufacturer of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- and can recommend accessories and re- dent. placement parts which are suitable for your Radio transmitters and office equip- requirements. They can also answer any ment questions you might have regarding official Technical modifications regulations. Radio transmitters (fixed installation) Modifications must always be carried out ac- We recommend you to use only CUPRA ac- Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters ® cording to our specifications. cessories and Genuine CUPRA parts . Spe- in the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRA cialised CURA Services or SEAT Official Serv- Unauthorised modifications to the electron- generally authorises in-vehicle installations ices have the necessary experience and fa- ic components, software, wiring or data of approved types of radio transmitters pro- transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunc- vided that: » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 307 Practical tips

● The aerial is installed correctly. Business equipment Checking and refilling levels ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the Retrofit installation of business or private vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). ded the equipment cannot interfere with the Filling the tank ● The effective transmitting power does not driver's immediate control of the vehicle and exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. that any such equipment carries the  Refuelling mark. Any retrofit equipment that could in- A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official fluence the driver's control of the vehicle Read the additional information carefully Service or specialised workshop will be able must have a type approval for your vehicle ›››  page 41 to inform you about options for installing and and must carry the e mark. If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- operating radio transmitters with a higher rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the transmitting power. WARNING fuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in more Mobile telephones or radio equipment fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill Mobile radio transmitters which is operated inside the vehicle with- the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. Commercial mobile telephones or radio out a properly installed external aerial can The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- equipment might interfere with the electron- create excessive magnetic fields that could en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. cause a health hazard. flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at This may be due to: ››› page 309. Note ● No external aerial. The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- ● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- ● External aerial incorrectly installed. en in  page 41. tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its ››› ● Transmitting power more than 10 W. licence and could lead to the withdrawal of WARNING the vehicle registration document under You must, therefore, do not operate portable certain circumstances. Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- mobile telephones or radio equipment in- ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio rious burns and other injuries. side the vehicle without a properly installed operating instructions. ● When refuelling, turn off the engine and external aerial ››› . turn off the ignition for safety reasons. Please note also that the maximum range of ● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or the equipment can only be achieved with an a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in external aerial. the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. ● Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. 308 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels

● For safety reasons we do not recommend ● Never run the tank completely dry. An ir- ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. it is very small, it is possible that it will not In an accident the canister could be dam- As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the ex- be able to open the protective device. Be- aged and could leak. haust system and damage the catalytic fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have converter. turning it, try a different pump or request to carry a spare fuel canister, please ob- ● When filling the fuel tank after having run specialist help. serve the following points: it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis- engine, the ignition must be switched on ister, the protective device will not open. ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. for at least 30 seconds before starting the One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in An electrostatic charge could build up engine. When you then start the engine it very slowly. during filling, causing the fuel vapour to may take longer than normal (up to one mi- ignite. Danger of explosion. Always nute) to start firing. This is because air place the canister on the ground to fill needs to be bled from the fuel system while it. starting. Fuel – Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- 1) ble into the spare fuel canister. For the sake of the environment Identification of the fuel – If the spare fuel canister is made of Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge Note building up. There is no emergency mechanism for the – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- explosive. Risk of fatal accident! essary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION Note ● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective Fig. 246 Sticker on the tank cap (identification of should be removed immediately. It could the fuel) » otherwise damage the paintwork. device that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel with Diesel nozzles.

1) Depending on country https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 309 Practical tips

Fuels are identified with different symbols. by using the octane numbers (RON) or via ing or decrease knocking may contain met- Depending on the fuel, the different symbols the anti-knock index (AKI). al additives that damage the engine and are on the pump and the tank lid of your ve- The following pieces of text show the infor- catalytic converter. This type of products hicle. The identification serves to prevent mation included in the corresponding stick- must not be used. confusion when choosing the fuel. ers on the tank lid (examples): ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of nol). The number indicates the percent- Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or metal additives. Risk of engine damage! age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, super 95 octane petrol at least ● High engine speed and full throttle can for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 damage the engine when using petrol with octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- an octane rating lower than the correct 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power diesel). The number indicates the per- grade for the engine. centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7” loss). means, for example, a proportion of bio- If super is not available, if necessary, use Note diesel of max. 7%. normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed only use moderate engine speeds and a light the one required by the engine can be Natural Gas. throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- used. ble. ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- Type of petrol CAUTION free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sulphur content fuel. ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. The correct grade of petrol is listed inside E30 - E100 button must not be used. The the fuel tank flap. fuel system would be damaged. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or Engine compartment verter and must only be run on unleaded other metal additives entails a permanent petrol. The petrol must comply with the deterioration of the effectiveness of the Working in the engine compartment standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels catalytic converter. with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled ● Only use fuel additives that have been Read the additional information carefully (E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiated approved by SEAT. The products that con- ›››  page 17 tain substances to increase the octane rat-

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 310 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels

Always be aware of the danger of injury ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering Note and scalding as well as the risk of accident the cap with a large, thick rag to protect In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake or fire when working in the engine com- against escaping coolant and steam. fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the partment (e.g. when checking and refilling ● If it is necessary to work in the engine engine compartment ››› Fig. 247. fluids). Always observe the warnings listed compartment while the engine is running, below and follow all general safety precau- the rotating components (for example, tions. The engine compartment of the ve- poly-V belt, alternator, radiator fan) and hicle is a potentially hazardous area ››› . the high voltage ignition system are an ad- Opening and closing the bonnet ditional hazard. WARNING Read the additional information carefully ● Observe the following additional warn-  page 17 ● Switch off the engine and activate the ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- ››› hand brake. Place the selector lever in P. trical system is necessary: WARNING Let the engine cool. – Always disconnect the battery from the ● Keep children away from the engine com- on-board network. ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the partment. – Do not smoke. engine compartment. Failure to comply ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- – Never work near naked flames. could result in burns. Wait until no steam or tion on the engine compartment, as these – Always keep an approved fire extin- coolant can be seen before opening the may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- guisher immediately available. bonnet. ant). ● For safety reasons the bonnet must al- ● Take care not to cause short circuits in ways be completely closed when the vehi- the electrical system, especially when CAUTION cle is moving. Therefore, after closing the working on the battery. When topping up fluids make sure the cor- bonnet, always check that the locking ele- ● If working inside the engine compart- rect fluid is put into the correct filler open- ment is properly engaged. This is the case if ment, remember that, even when the igni- ing, otherwise this can cause serious mal- the bonnet is flush with the adjacent body tion is switched off, the radiator fan may functions or engine damage. panels. start up automatically, and therefore there ● Should you notice that the bonnet is not is a risk of injury. For the sake of the environment safely secured when the vehicle is moving, ● Never cover the engine with additional stop the vehicle immediately and close the Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- insulating materials such as a blanket. Risk bonnet. Failure to follow this instruction cle regularly so that any leaks are detected of fire! could result in an accident. » at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant other fluids in the area where it was parked, expansion tank when the engine is hot. The have your vehicle inspected at the work- cooling system is under pressure. shop. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 311 Practical tips

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.

312 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels

Fig. 247 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different tioned above. These operations are descri- Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never bed in ››› page 310. tial for the correct operation of the engine fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious and its long useful life, when topping up or damage to the engine may be caused. Overview changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards. 1 Coolant expansion tank You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical speci- The specifications (VW standards) set out in 2 Windscreen washer reservoir fications as of ››› page 344. the following page should appear on the 3 Engine oil dipstick container of the service oil; when the con- 4 Engine oil filler cap tainer displays the specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that 5 Brake fluid reservoir Engine oil the oil can be used for both types of engines. 6 Vehicle battery (underneath the cover) General notes We recommend that the oil change indica- The checking and refilling of service fluids ted in the Maintenance Programme, be per- are carried out on the components men- formed by a technical service or specialised The engine comes with a special, multi- workshop. grade oil that can be used all year round. » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 313 Practical tips

The correct oil specifications for your engine request), you may use oils for fixed service Checking engine oil level are listed in the ›››  page 42. intervals, which also appear in ›››  page 42. In this case, your vehicle Service intervals must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife comes first) page 331. service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- ››› tance travelled).

Flexible service intervals (LongLife service Warning lamp intervals*) Special oils and processes have been devel-  It lights up red oped which, depending on the characteris-  Do not continue driving! Fig. 248 Engine oil dipstick. tics and individual driving profiles, enable the Engine oil pressure too low. extension of the oil change service (LongLife Read the additional information carefully service intervals).  It lights up yellow ›››  page 41 Because this oil is essential for extending the Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of service intervals, it must only be used ob- Top up the oil at the next opportunity ››› page 315. the oil. serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-  It flashes yellow Checking oil level tervals. Fault in the oil level sensor. – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until engine oil level is too low ››› page 314, system inspected. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel. the operating temperature is reached and Checking engine oil level and LongLife oil is then stop. not available, it is permitted to top up (once) If this warning symbol  starts to flash, and with oil for fixed service intervals – Wait for about two minutes. is accompanied by three audible warnings, ›››  page 42 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li- switch off the engine and check the oil level. – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with tres). If necessary, add more oil ››› page 315. a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go. Fixed service intervals* If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even – Then pull it out once more and check the If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife oil level ››› Fig. 248. Top up with engine oil service interval” or it has been disabled (by run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. if necessary. 314 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels

Depending on how you drive and the condi- Topping up engine oil CAUTION tions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 248 A , do not start the engine. This could result in consumption is likely to be higher for the first damage to the engine and catalytic con- 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level verter. Contact a specialised workshop. must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey. For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above zone WARNING ››› Fig. 248 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in Any work carried out in the engine com- through the crankcase breather and leak partment or on the engine must be carried into the atmosphere via the exhaust system. out cautiously. Fig. 249 In the engine compartment: Engine oil ● When working in the engine compart- filler cap. ment, always observe the safety warnings Note Read the additional information carefully ››› page 310. Before a long trip, we recommend finding  page 41 ››› an engine oil that conforms to the corre- CAUTION Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- sponding VW specifications and recom- serve the warnings in Working in the mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, If the oil level is above area A , do not start ››› engine compartment on page 311. the correct engine oil will always be availa- the engine. This could result in damage to ble for a top-up if needed. the engine and catalytic converter. Contact The position of the oil filler opening is shown a Technical Service. in the corresponding engine compartment illustration ››› page 313. Changing engine oil Engine oil specification ›››  page 42. Read the additional information carefully WARNING ›››  page 41. Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil The engine oil must be changed at the inter- comes into contact with hot engine com- vals given in the service schedule. ponents when topping up. We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 315 Practical tips

The oil change intervals are shown in the For the sake of the environment Topping up coolant Maintenance Programme. ● Because of disposal problems and the – Wait for the engine to cool down. WARNING special tools and specialist knowledge re- – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with quired, we recommend that you have the a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left Only change the engine oil yourself if you engine oil and filter changed by a Technical ››› . have the specialist knowledge required! Service. – ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- ● Never pour oil down drains or into the Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- serve the warnings ››› page 310. ground. ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil ● Use a suitable container when draining coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- may cause burn injuries. the used oil. It must be large enough to tinue driving. You should obtain professio- ● hold all the engine oil. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, nal assistance ››› . such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. – If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark. ● When removing the oil drain plug with Cooling system your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to – Top up with coolant until the level be- help prevent oil from running down your comes stable. arm. Topping up coolant – Screw the cap back on correctly. ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 42 Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle stored in a safe place out of the reach of Top up coolant when the level is below the straight to a specialised workshop to have children. MIN (minimum) mark. the cooling system examined. If there are no leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of CAUTION Checking coolant level coolant can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of No additives should be used with engine oil. – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. overheating. This could result in engine damage. Any – Switch the ignition off. damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory war- – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- WARNING ranty. pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do coolant level should be between the not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- marks. When the engine is hot, it may be sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of slightly above the upper mark. burns!

316 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels

● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a CAUTION However, if the brake fluid level goes down health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze noticeably in a short time, or drops below The original additives should never be should be stored in the original container in the MIN mark, there may be a leak in the mixed with coolants which are not ap- a safe place out of reach of children. Failure brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk to comply could result in poisoning. warning light on the instrument panel display of causing severe damage to the engine monitors the brake fluid level ● If working inside the engine compart- and the engine cooling system. ment, remember that, even when the igni- ›››  page 36. ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not tion is switched off, the radiator fan may purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid start up automatically, and therefore there cates that the G13 additive has been mixed reservoir is on the other side of the engine is a risk of injury. with an inadequate coolant. The coolant compartment. must be changed as soon as possible if this WARNING is the case! This could result in serious Changing brake fluid faults and engine damage. If there is not enough anti-freeze in the The regular intervals at which the brake fluid coolant system, the engine may fail leading should be replaced are listed in the Mainte- to serious damage. For the sake of the environment nance Programme. We recommend you ● Please make sure that the percentage of Coolants and additives can contaminate have it replaced at a specialised CUPRA additive is correct with respect to the low- the environment. If any fluids are spilled, Service or SEAT Official Service, during an est expected ambient temperature in the they should be collected and correctly dis- inspection service. zone in which the vehicle is to be used. posed of, with respect to the environment. ● When the outside temperature is very WARNING low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed cle would be immobilised. In this case, the original container in a safe place out of heating would not work either and inade- Brake fluid reach of children. Risk of poisoning! quately dressed passengers could die of ● If the brake fluid is left in the system for cold. Top up brake fluid too long and the brakes are subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the CAUTION Read the additional information carefully brake system. This would seriously affect  page 43 Do not top up the expansion tank with ››› the efficiency of the brakes and the safety coolant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter of the vehicle. This may cause an accident. » the cooling system. In this case, stop driv- Checking the brake fluid level ing. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, The brake fluid level must be between the there is a risk of engine damage. MIN and MAX markings.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 317 Practical tips

CAUTION 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ● Use clean water with a window cleaner ter). recommended by CUPRA. Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive. ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to Approximate proportion of the winter mix- the water in the reservoir. ture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 pro- CAUTION Windscreen washer reservoir portion of mixture in the washer fluid tank. ● Do not mix cleaning products recom- Capacity mended by CUPRA with other products. Checking and topping up the wind- This could lead to flocculation and may screen washer reservoir The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres in block the windscreen washer jets. versions without headlight washer and 5 li- ● When topping up service fluids, make ab- tres in versions with headlight washer. Read the additional information carefully solutely certain that you fill the fluids into ›››  page 43 the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- WARNING Check the water level in the windscreen ids could cause serious malfunctions and washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- If the water from the windscreen washer engine damage! quired. does not contain enough anti-freeze, it ● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re- may freeze on the windscreen and rear duces visibility through the windscreen, The container for the windscreen washer window, reducing forward and rear visibili- and leads to loss of visibility in headlights in contains the cleaning fluid for the wind- ty. models with headlight washer. screen, the rear window and the headlight ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer washer system*. contains enough anti-freeze. ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 310. ● In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have Battery ● The windscreen washer reservoir is marked warmed the windscreen with the ventila-  with the symbol on the cap. tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on General information ● Check there is enough windscreen water in the windscreen and reduce visibility. the reservoir. Read the additional information carefully WARNING ›››  page 44. Recommended windscreen wipers Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other The battery is located in the engine com- ● For the hottest seasons we recommend similar additives with the windscreen wash- partment and is almost maintenance-free. summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- er water. A greasy layer may be formed on It is checked as part of the Inspection Serv- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: the windscreen which will impair visibility. ice. Nevertheless, check the terminals are

318 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Checking and refilling levels clean and have the correct tightening tor- or the remote door opening, may be tempo- Important safety warnings for han- que, especially in summer and winter. rarily disabled to prevent the battery from dling a vehicle battery running flat. These functions will come back Disconnecting the battery on as soon as the ignition is switched on and All work on batteries requires specialist the engine started. The battery should only be disconnected in knowledge. Please refer to a specialised CU- exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- PRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a work- connected, some of the vehicle's functions Winter conditions shop specialising in batteries: risk of burns or are “lost” (››› table on page 319). These During the winter, the starting power may be exploding battery! functions will require resetting after the bat- reduced, and if necessary, the battery The battery must not be opened. Never try tery is reconnected. should be charged ››› in Important safety to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- warnings for handling a vehicle battery on Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you erwise explosive gas is released from the page 319 disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm battery that could cause an explosion. will be triggered.  Wear eye protection. Function Reprogramming Warning lamp  Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. In the One-touch function of ››› page 128, One-touch It lights up the electric windows opening and closing.  event of electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty of water. Alternator fault. If the vehicle does not re- spond to the key, they  Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro- Remote control key should be synchronised The control lamp lights up when the ignition hibited. page 121. is switched on. It should go out when the en- ›››  The battery should only be charged in a well- gine has started running. Digital clock ››› page 104. ventilated zone. Risk of explosion! If the control lamp  lights up while driving,  Keep children away from acid and batteries! After driving for a few me- the alternator is no longer charging the bat- ESC warning lamp tres, the warning lamp goes out again. tery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop. WARNING ● When repairing or working on the electri- You should avoid using electrical equipment If the vehicle is not used for long periods cal system, proceed as follows: that is not absolutely necessary because this The vehicle has a system for monitoring the will drain the battery. – 1. Remove the key from the ignition. current consumption when the engine is left The negative cable on the battery must unused for long periods of time ››› page 234. be disconnected. » Some functions, such as the interior lights,

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 319 Practical tips

– 2. When the repair is finished, recon- – Connect the charger clamps as described Replacing the battery nect the negative pole of the battery. to the positive pole of the battery (+) and exclusively to an earth on the bodywork The new battery should have the same spec- ● Switch off all electrical devices before re- (–). connecting the battery. Reconnect first the ifications (amperage, load and voltage) as the used battery. positive cable and then the negative cable. – Only use a charger which is compatible for Never reverse the polarity of the connec- use with 12 V nominal voltage batteries. Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent tions. This could cause an electrical fire. The charge must not exceed a voltage of power management system to control the ● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- 15 V. distribution of electrical energy ››› page 234. nected to the battery. The power management function ensures – Now connect the battery charger to the that the battery is charged much more effi- ● Never use damaged batteries. This could power socket and switch on. cause an explosion! Replace a damaged ciently than on vehicles without a power battery immediately. – At the end of the charging process: switch management system. To maintain this func- off the battery charger and disconnect the tion after replacing the battery, we recom- power socket cable. CAUTION mend that the replacement battery used is – Finally disconnect the charger cables from of the same make and type as the original fit- ● Never disconnect the battery if the igni- the battery. ted battery. To make proper use of the power tion is switched on or if the engine is run- management function after the battery has ning. This could damage the electrical sys- – Replace the battery cover correctly. been changed, have the battery coded to tem or electronic components. – Close the bonnet ›››  page 17. the power management mode at a specialised workshop. Important: Before you charge the battery Charging the battery make sure you read the manufacturer's in- CAUTION structions for using the battery charger. ● Some vehicles, for example those with Terminals for charging the battery are fitted the Start-Stop system* are fitted with a in the engine compartment. WARNING special battery (AGM-type or EFB-type bat- – Note the warnings ››› in Important Never charge a battery that has frozen: re- tery). If any other type of battery is fitted, safety warnings for handling a vehicle place it! Failure to do so may lead to an ex- the Start-Stop function may be considera- battery on page 319 and ››› . plosion. bly reduced and the vehicle may not stop on repeated occasions. – Switch off all electrical devices. Remove Note ● Make sure that the vent hose is always at- the ignition key. tached to the original opening on the side Use only the terminals in the engine com- – Raise the bonnet ›››  page 17. of the battery. Gases or battery acid can partment to charge the battery. – Open the battery cover. 320 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Wheels otherwise escape and possibly cause dam- Wheels New tyres age. New tyres do not give maximum grip straight ● The battery holder and clamps must al- away and should therefore be “run in” by ways be correctly secured. Wheels and tyres driving carefully and at moderate speeds for ● Before starting any work on the battery, about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will always observe the warnings listed under General notes also increase the useful life of the tyres. ››› page 319, Important safety warnings for The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- handling a vehicle battery. – When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). cording to the type and make of tyre and the ● Do not forget to replace the battery cov- tread pattern. erings, where applicable. It is a protection – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar for high temperatures. This in turn extends obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as Low profile tyres the vehicle service life. possible at a right angle to the obstacle. Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and – Check from time to time if the tyres are tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and For the sake of the environment damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or a greater rim diameter along with a lower  Batteries contain toxic substances in- dents). Remove any foreign objects em- height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a cluding sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedded in the treads. more agile driving behaviour. However, on be disposed of appropriately and must not – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- roads that are in poor condition, this might be disposed of with ordinary household placed immediately. affect comfort and cause more noise. waste. Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Low profile tyres may deteriorate more spilt! quickly than standard tyres, for instance due – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers possible. and kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the cor- – Mark the wheels before taking them off so rect tyre pressure is particularly important that they rotate in the same direction when ››› page 322. put back. To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive – When removed, the wheels or tyres should with special care when driving on roads in be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark poor condition. place. Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km regarding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on the rims. »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 321 Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy SEAT Official Service centre for advice re- ● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- impact or have been damaged, have them garding current technical recommendations. ried by the vehicle. checked and, if required, replaced at a speci- ● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, alised workshop. save the modified pressure of tyres Low profile tyres may deteriorate more Service life of tyres ››› page 325, ››› page 322. quickly than standard tyres. ● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. ● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from Concealed damage time to time. Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the The useful life of your tyres depends on the car pulling to one side, this may indicate following factors: that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to Tyre pressure suspect that damage may have occurred. In- The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a spect the tyres for damage. If no external sticker on the rear of the front left door damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully frame ››› Fig. 250. to the nearest specialised workshop and Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- have the car inspected. duces the useful life of the tyres and adversely affects vehicle performance and ride. Tyres with directional tread pattern Correct inflation pressures are very impor- An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the tant, especially at high speeds. direction of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated Fig. 250 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can when mounting the wheel. This guarantees be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-  optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan- Correct inflation pressures and sensible driving comfort (tyre pressure ). When driving ing, excessive noise and wear. ing habits will increase the useful life of your with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption tyres. may increase slightly.

Retrofitting accessories ● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or and also prior to any long trip. ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, wheel trims, we recommend that you con- ● The tyre pressure should only be checked the tyre pressure should be increased to the sult with a specialised CUPRA Service or when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the maximum value indicated on the sticker pressure of warm tyres. ››› Fig. 250. 322 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Wheels

Do not forget the spare wheel when check- WARNING The original tyres on your vehicle have ing the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” running inflated to the highest pressure required for ● Always adapt the tyre pressure accord- across the tread. Depending on the manu- ingly when the vehicle load changes. the road wheels. facturer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced ● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a at equal distances around the tyre. Markings In the case of a minimised temporary spare lot more when the vehicle is heavily loaded on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of or at high speeds, therefore causing over- “TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la- heating to occur. Under these conditions, the tread wear indicators. bel ››› Fig. 250. the tyre bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident! The minimum tread depth required by law is Driving style 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). (Different fig- Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard For the sake of the environment ures may apply in other countries.) braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- wear. sumption. WARNING Wheel balance The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. Wear indicators wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- However, certain circumstances may lead to struction could result in an accident. imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- ● Especially in difficult driving conditions brations in the steering wheel. such as wet or icy roads. It is important that Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be as they otherwise cause excessive wear on approximately the same on the tyres of steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must both the front and the rear axles. also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted ● The scant driving safety due to insuffi- or if a tyre is repaired. cient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of Incorrect wheel alignment “aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water and when driving through corners, and Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- braking is also adversely affected. cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the Fig. 251 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators. vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, ● The speed has to be adapted accordingly, Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is you should check wheel alignment at a spe- otherwise there is a risk of losing control worn. over the vehicle. cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service. https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 323 Practical tips

Interchanging tyres – Do not use tyres whose effective size ex- 60 Height/width ratio in % ceeds the dimensions of the factory-approved makes of tyre. R Tyre construction: Radial

– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims or 16 Rim diameter in inches tyres different to those installed in the fac- 95 Load rating code tory, it is advisable to consult with a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official V Speed index Service before purchasing them. The manufacturing date is also indicated on The tyres and wheel rims are an essential the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and part): rims approved by CUPRA are specially DOT ... 2216 ... Fig. 252 Interchanging tyres. matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good it means, for example, that the tyre was man- To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres roadholding and safe handling ››› . ufactured in the 22nd week of 2016. the wheels should be changed round from The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for But note that with some types of tyre, the time to time according to the system your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- actual tyre size can differ from the nominal Fig. 252. The useful life of all the tyres will ››› mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity size marked on the tyre (for instance then be about the same time. or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- 215/60 R16 95 V), and there may be signif- tation varies depending on the country of icant differences in the contours of the residence. tyres, even though the tyres are marked New tyres or new wheels with the same nominal size. When replac- A knowledge of tyre designations makes it ing the tyres, it is therefore important to easier to choose the correct tyres. The fol- – All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of make sure that the actual size of the new lowing wording can be read on the sides of the same type, size (rolling circumference) tyres does not exceed the dimensions of the tyre: and preferably the same tread pattern. the factory-approved makes of tyre. 215/60 R16 95V – Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs Failure to observe this requirement can af- and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or This contains the following information: fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If both rear tyres together). the tyres rub against the bodywork, in cer- 215 Tyre width in mm tain circumstances the tyres, running gear

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 324 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Wheels or bodywork and pipes may be damaged, tyres or the vehicle, causing a serious safety Wheel bolts and vehicle safety could be severely im- risk. Risk of accident! It may also invalidate paired ››› . the vehicle's registration for use on public The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. When installing different wheels (for instance If you use tyres that are approved by CU- roads. alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is PRA, you can be sure that the actual tyre ● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that important to use the correct wheel bolts with dimensions will be correct for your vehicle. are more than 6 years old. If you have no al- the right length and correctly shaped bolt If you decide to fit a different type of tyre, ternative, you should drive slowly and with heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- you must obtain the appropriate manufac- extra care at all times. curely and that the brake system functions turer's certificate from the tyre retailer to ● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is correctly. confirm that the tyres are suitable for your purchased, ensure that there is an ade- vehicle. Keep this certificate in a safe quate flow of air for cooling the brake sys- The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi- place. tem. ly. Your specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT A special adapter is required to turn the anti- For the sake of the environment Official Service will be able to advise you theft wheel bolts* ›››  page 48. on which tyres may be fitted to your vehi- Old tyres must be disposed of according to cle. the laws in the country concerned. It is best to have all servicing of wheels and Tyre monitoring system tyres performed by a specialised workshop. Note They are familiar with the procedure and ● A CUPRA Service Centre should be con- Introduction have the necessary special tools and spare sulted to find out whether wheels or tyres parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- of different sizes to those originally fitted posing of the old tyres respecting the envi- by CUPRA can be fitted, and to find out WARNING ronment. about the combinations allowed between Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to WARNING (axle 2). tread separation or even to a blow-out. ● It is very important to ensure that the ● Never mount used tyres if you are not ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- tyres you have chosen have adequate sure of their “previous history”. sure they are maintained at the pressures clearance. When selecting replacement ● For technical reasons, it is not generally indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal possible to use the wheels from other vehi- could cause overheating, resulting in tread tyre size marked on the tyre, since the ef- cles. In some cases, this may also be true detachment or even burst tyres. » fective tyre size can differ significantly de- for the same model of wheel. pending on the manufacturer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result in damage to the https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 325 Practical tips

● Tyre pressure should be that indicated on Tyre control lamp ● If the warning lamp  lights up, stop im- the label when the tyres are cold at all times mediately and check the tyres. ››› page 345.  It lights up ● If the tyres are inflated at different pres- ● Regularly check the cold inflation pressures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will The tyre pressure in one or more wheels has clearly sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the increase tyre wear, negatively affecting ve- gone down from the tyre pressure set by the driver or tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they hicle stability and increasing braking dis- the tyre has structural damage. are cold. Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a tances. ● Regularly check your tyres for damage text message is displayed on the instrument panel dis- ● If tyres are inflated at different pressures and wear. play. or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be Stop the vehicle! Reduce speed immediately! Stop damaged and burst resulting in a loss of ● Never exceed the maximum permitted the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden control of the vehicle. speed or loads specified for the type of tyre manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres and pres- fitted on your vehicle. sures. Replace any damaged tyres. ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended For the sake of the environment  Flashes tyre pressure is indicated on the label Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel Fault in the system. ››› page 345. consumption and tyre wear. The control lamp flashes for approximately one minute ● The tyre monitoring system can only op- and then lights up permanently. erate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and on to the correct pressure when cold. Note again. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni- ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the system ● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- checked by a specialised workshop. can damage them and result in an accident. pand, which could then produce an air Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the pressure warning. Several control and warning lamps light up tyres correspond to the vehicle load. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● Only replace used tyres with those au- ● Before starting a journey, always inflate ed on while the function is verified. They will thorised by CUPRA for the corresponding tyres to the correct pressure. switch off after a few seconds. type vehicle. ● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjected to more flexing. Due to this, the tyre ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring WARNING system. Regularly check your tyres to en- could become excessively hot, causing sure that the tyre pressure is correct and When the tyres are inflated at different tread separation and also tyre blow-out. that the tyres are not damaged due to pressures or at a pressure that is too low ● With an overloaded vehicle at high puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a speed, the tyres can overheat and burst re- Remove objects from the tyres only when loss of control of the vehicle and a serious sulting in a loss of vehicle control. they have not pierced the tyres. or fatal accident.

326 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Wheels

● Tyre pressures which are too high or too Tyre monitoring indicator ● Tyre structure is damaged low reduce the useful life of the tyre, af- ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a fecting vehicle performance. load ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it ● The wheels on an axle are subject to a does not have to be changed immediately, heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). drive to the nearest specialised workshop ● at a moderate speed and have the tyre The vehicle is fitted with snow chains checked and inflated to the correct pres- ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted sure. ● The wheel on one axle is changed

WARNING There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not in- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- Fig. 253 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre dicate anything under certain circumstances trol and warning lamps on page 109. pressure. (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads, or when driving with snow Note The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel chains). ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- revolutions and, with this information, the ted with the ignition on, an audible warning tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If will sound. In the event that there is a fault the rolling circumference of one or more Calibrating the tyre monitoring indi- wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in- in the system, an audible warning will cator sound. dicator will indicate this on the instrument panel through a warning lamp and a warning ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of After changing the tyre pressure or replacing to the driver Fig. 253. When only one spe- time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- ››› one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring in- cific tyre is affected, its position within the rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control dicator must be recalibrated. Do the same, vehicle will be indicated. lamp shows a fault, but disappears when for example, when the front and rear wheels road conditions or the driving style change.  Loss of pressure: Check left are swapped. tyre pressure! ● Switch the ignition on. » Wheel tread change The wheel tread changes when:

● Tyre pressure is manually changed ● Tyre pressure is insufficient https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 327 Practical tips

● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy Temporary spare wheel reason, do not use a temporary spare wheel Connect1) system with the  > SETTINGS from a different type of vehicle. function button ›››  page 33. General information ● In vehicles without a radio: press and hold Removing the temporary spare wheel down the  button , with the ignition on, – Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove until an acoustic signal is heard. the temporary spare wheel.

When driving, the system self-calibrates the – Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise tyre pressure provided by the driver and the ››› Fig. 254. wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied – Take out the temporary spare wheel. speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored. Chains With the wheels under very heavy loads, the For technical reasons, snow chains must not tyre pressure must be increased to the total be used on the temporary spare wheel. recommended tyre pressure before the calibration ››› page 345. If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- Fig. 254 Spare wheel: floor panel raised. Note porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear The temporary spare wheel has been de- ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not wheel that you have removed and replace signed to be used for short periods of time. function when there is a fault in the ESC or the punctured front wheel with this wheel. ABS ››› page 221. Have the tyre checked and replaced as soon ● An erroneous indication may be given as possible at a specialised CUPRA Service, WARNING when snow chains are in use because they SEAT Official Service or at a specialised ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, increase the tread of the wheel. workshop. check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- Please note the following restrictions when ble. Failure to do so may cause an accident. using the compact temporary spare wheel. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of The compact temporary spare wheel is de- the left front door frame ››› Fig. 250. signed specifically for this model. For this

1) In vehicles that are not equipped with the Easy Connect system, the switch for adjusting tyre pressure is located in the centre console next to the hazard warning lights. 328 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Wheels

● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) Getting the spare wheel out of vehi- “FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer should when the temporary spare wheel is fitted cles with BEATS Audio 10 speakers point forward. on the vehicle: risk of accident! (with subwoofer)* ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ● Never travel more than 200 km using a rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that temporary spare wheel. the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking place. and fast cornering: risk of accident! ● Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- Winter service dent. ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or Winter tyres winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. – Winter tyres must be fitted on all four ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, wheels. the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the sys- – Only use winter tyres that are approved for tem when starting off. Fig. 255 In the boot: remove the subwoofer. your vehicle.

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- – Please note that the maximum permissible move the subwoofer. speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres. ● Lift and secure the luggage compartment – Also note that winter tyres are no longer floor as described in page 155. ››› effective when the tread is worn down. ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 255 1 speaker cable. – After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- take into account the correct tyre pres- wise direction ››› Fig. 255 2 . sures listed on the rear of the front left ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the door frame ››› page 322. spare wheel. In winter road conditions winter tyres will ● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place considerably improve vehicle handling. The the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- with care. When doing so, the tip of the pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 329 Practical tips

and snow. This applies particularly to vehi- Speed rating It is best to contact a specialised CUPRA cles equipped with wide section tyres or code letter Maximum speed limit Service or SEAT Official Service to check the with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y ››› page 324 maximum speed which is permissible for the on the sidewall). V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis H 210 km/h (130 mph) of this information. Only use winter tyres of the correct type approved for your vehicle. The sizes of these 240 km/h (149 mph) (please V WARNING tyres are specified in the vehicle's docu- note relevant restrictions) ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or Exceeding the maximum speed permitted W 270 km/h (168 mph) COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies for the winter tyres fitted on your car can depending on the country of residence. See Y 300 km/h (186 mph) cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- also ››› page 324. trol of the vehicle – risk of accident. Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- must have an appropriate sticker attached For the sake of the environment ties when the tread is worn down to a depth so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable of 4 mm. stickers are available at specialised CUPRA Summer tyres should be fitted again as soon as possible after the winter period; The performance of winter tyres is also se- Services, SEAT Official Service centres and they give better handling on roads which specialised workshops. Please note the reg- verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is are free of snow and ice. Summer tyres per- ulations to this effect in your country. still much deeper than 4 mm. form with less rolling noise, tyre wear and – Winter tyres are subject to the following “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead most important – reduce fuel consump- maximum speed limits according to speed of winter tyres. tion. rating code letter: ››› Using winter tyres with V-rating

Speed rating Please note that the generally applicable code letter Maximum speed limit 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres ››› page 324 with the letter V is subject to technical restrictions; the maximum permissible Q 160 km/h (100 mph) speed for your vehicle may be significantly S 180 km/h (112 mph) lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres depends directly on the maximum axle T 190 km/h (118 mph) weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 330 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Maintenance Programme

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your special- by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or a dealership or a specialised workshop. Maintenance Programme specialised workshop will document the following information: CAUTION Service intervals ● When each one of the services was carried CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- out. age to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts. Servicing and Digital Maintenance ● Whether a specific repair has been sug- Plan gested, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. Note Log of services performed (“Digital Main- ● If you have expressed a special request for Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will maintain its value, but also its correct oper- Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealer- write the work order. ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with CU- ships or a specialised workshop records ● The components or fluids that were PRA guidelines. Service receipts in a central system. Thanks changed. to this comprehensive documentation of the ● The date of the next service. service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. CUPRA recom- The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until Fixed Service or Flexible Service mends requesting a Service receipt after ev- the next inspection. This information is ery service carried out containing all the documented in all checks performed. Services are classified as oil change service services carried out on the system. and inspection. The service interval display The type and the volume of the service may on the instrument panel display serves as a Whenever there is a new service the receipt vary from one vehicle to another. A special- reminder of the next service. is replaced with a current one. ised workshop will be able to provide specific Depending on the features, the engine and The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa- information on the jobs for your vehicle. the conditions of use of the car, either the ble in some markets. In this case, your spe- Fixed service or the Flexible service will be cialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealer- WARNING applied for an oil change service.. ship will inform you about the current doc- If the services are insufficient or not per- umentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not How to know which type of service needs observed, the vehicle may be immobilised to his vehicle in traffic cause an accident and severe injuries. ● Check the tables below: »

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 331 Maintenance

Oil change servicea) you have to carry out this service, take into If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under account the individual conditions of use and adverse conditions of use, some of the Type of personal driving style. A major component of work must be carried out before the next PR No. Service interval service the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- service period or even between service instead of conventional engine oil. tervals. Every 5000 km or after QI1 1 yearb) Bear in mind the information about the Conditions of use adverse include: specifications of the engine oil according to Every 7500 km or after ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur con- QI2 b) the VW standard ›››  page 41. 1 year tent. Fixed If you do not want to the flexible service Every 10000 km or after ● QI3 Frequent short trips. 1 yearb) you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs The ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of Every 15000 km or after time, as in the case of taxis. QI4 Service Advisor will gladly advise you. 1 yearb) ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. According to the service in- Service intervals display QI6 Flexible ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending terval display At CUPRA, the dates of the services are indi- on equipment). a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. cated by the service interval display on the ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a instrument panel page 106 or in the Ve- b) Whatever happens first. ››› lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). hicle settings menu of the infotainment ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. system  page 33. The service interval Inspection Servicea) ››› display gives information for service dates This applies especially for the following According to the service interval display that involve an engine oil change or an in- parts (depending on equipment): spection. When the time for the corre- a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. sponding service comes, additional work re- ● Dust and pollen filter Bear in mind the information about the quired, such as the change of brake fluid and ● Air Care allergen filter specifications of the engine oil according to the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Air filter the VW standard ›››  page 41. ● Toothed chain Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information on the conditions of use ● Particulate filter Service ● Engine oil Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil The service intervals and groups are usually change service only has to be performed based on normal conditions of use. The Service Advisor of your specialised when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when workshop will gladly inform you about the

332 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Maintenance Programme need of performing service work between ● Your SEAT dealership service to you, offering the possibility of re- normal service intervals, always considering ● Your specialised workshop placing complete sets, such as: light engine, the conditions of use of your vehicle. gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- components, etc. WARNING opment of components) the sets of services These parts are, approved parts, and are the may vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer, If the services are insufficient or not per- same as the factory parts, which are also ap- any SEAT dealership or a specialised work- formed and if the service intervals are not proved spare parts. observed, the vehicle may be immobilised shop always receives updated information in traffic and cause accidents and severe about any modifications that are made. injuries. Original accessories ● Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT Additional service offers We recommend you only use CUPRA Origi- dealership or a specialised workshop. nal Accessories and CUPRA approved acces- Approved spare parts sories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety CAUTION and suitability of these accessories have CUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam- Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- been inspected specifically for this type of age to the vehicle due to insufficient work ceived for their vehicles and approved by vehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for the or of lack of availability of spare parts. SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. safety and suitability of parts from other These parts correspond exactly to the man- manufacturers. ufacturer's requirements in terms of design, Sets of services accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been Service Mobility Sets of services include all the maintenance conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For works needed to ensure the safety and the this reason, we always recommend the use Since the moment you purchase your CU- smooth running of the vehicle (depending of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be PRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy the on the conditions of use and the features held liable for the safety and suitability of benefits and coverage of the CUPRA Mobility of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, parts from other manufacturers. Service. or operating fluids). Maintenance services For the first two years after the purchase, are divided into inspection and review serv- your new CUPRA vehicle is automatically ices. Consult the details of the jobs required Approved spare parts covered by the CUPRA Mobility Service with- for your vehicle at: out additional costs. » Approved spare parts, following the manu- ● Your CUPRA dealer facturer's requirements, are an additional https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 333 Maintenance

If you wish to enjoy this service after this pe- Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle riod, you can extend the Mobility Service as long as you carry out the recommended In- The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. spection and Maintenance Services at a spe- Maintenance and cleaning remains of insects, bird excrements, tree cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehi- Service. Basic considerations cle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to a strong sunlight, further intensify the dam- fault or an accident, our assistance services Regular and careful care helps to maintain age. will help you keep moving. the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- Before washing the car, soften the dirt using Take into account that the Mobility Service ranty in the event of corrosion damage and plenty of water. differs depending on the country where the deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- vehicle was purchased. For further informa- work. To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, tion, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, any bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water SEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA website Specialised workshops have the necessary and a microfibre cloth. in your country. care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging. Have the underside of the vehicle washed after the end of the anti frost salts in winter. WARNING High pressure cleaners Warranty ● Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- Fault-free operation warranty health if misused. sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- ● Always keep care products in a safe place, structions for the equipment. This applies Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official out of the reach of children. Danger of poi- particularly to the operating pressure and Services ensure the perfect condition of new soning! the distance between the spraying water. Do vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or not aim the jet directly to the side window complementary additional documentation gaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- For the sake of the environment provided by your Technical Service to see roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- the conditions and the terms of the warran- ● When purchasing car care products, ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ty. Consult further information in this regard chose products that are compatible with camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least in your specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT the environment. 40 cm. Official Service. ● The waste from car-care products should Do not remove snow and ice with a high- not be disposed of with ordinary household pressure cleaner. waste.

334 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To mirrors must always be folded/deployed in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft micro- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household fibre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car wash tunnels Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the wind- – Never select washing programs that in- screen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- the instructions of the car wash tunnel oper- switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. ator, especially if your vehicle has detacha- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts ble parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possi- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself ble. from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment cut! Washing by hand The car should only be washed in special ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. ing products that do not contain solvents. dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several Washing vehicles with a matte paint by times. hand Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when CAUTION tions washing it, first remove the thicker dust and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and matic car wash, please make sure to retract components of the vehicle can be checked fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner the exterior mirrors to prevent them from in the following tables. The contents should for matte paint. being damaged. Electric exterior rearview be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 335 Maintenance

have special questions or parts that are not Wheels Problem Solution listed. Take he general considerations into Problem Solution Have your specialised workshop account ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion take care of this page 339. Anti frost salt Water The water does not Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning prod- Maintain with hard wax (at least create droplets on dust uct 2 times a year) Exterior cleaning the clean paint End exhausts Treat with suitable wax and ap- No shine de- Windscreen wipers ply paint preservative afterwards spite sober main- Problem Solution if the wax used does not contain tenance/paint Problem Solution preservative ingredients Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird drop- and remove with a microfibre Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims pings, tree sap, cloth road salt Problem Solution Problem Solution Fat-based dirt, e.g. Delete immediately with a neu- Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cosmetic products tral soap solutiona) and a soft a) solution cleaning product is required or sunscreen cloth

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses Paint Carbon fibre parts Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution

Sensors: soft cloth with cleaning Check the paint's colour code in Dirt Clean the same way as painted product which does not contain Flaws in the paint an authorised service and re- parts ››› page 334 solvents Dirt store with a touch-up pencil Camera lenses - soft cloth with cleaning product with no alco- Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water hol content Apply rust remover and then ap- Hand brush/Anti frost spray with Environmental rust ply hard wax. Go you your speci- Snow/ice no solvents tank alised workshop if you have any queries

336 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution

Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based dirt, Apply a neutral soap solutiona). e.g. oil, make-up, Absorb the dissolved grease and Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal etc. paint particles drying with an ab- solutiona) display cleaner sorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water afterwards a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Control panels in 1 litre of water Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with an Problem Solution pens, nail polish, absorbent cloth, if applicable, dispersion paint, apply neutral soap solution af- Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with shoe cream etc. terwardsa) Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Windows in 1 litre of water in 1 litre of water Problem Solution Natural leather Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), allowed Covers / Trims solutiona) to dry before retracting Problem Solution Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: leather cleaner Dirt Neutral soap solutiona) in 1 litre of water blood etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather Grease-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth in 1 litre of water e.g. oil, make-up, and leather cleaner Problem Solution etc. Dry stains: grease dissolving Plastic parts spray Dirt particles ad- Vacuum cleaner Problem Solution hered to the sur- Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for leath- face pens, nail polish, er » Dirt Damp cloth dispersion paint, Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral shoe cream etc. Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if possi- e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) ble solvent-free plastic cleaner blood etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 337 Maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove moved through friction. Risk of damaging Care Apply preservative cream regu- ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of the paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel in 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ● Remove snow and ice from windows and of scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts To avoid scratches, the scraper should only switched off and cooled down before clean- be pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights ● To prevent damage to the heating of the Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with rear window, do not put stickers over the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean Wheels based cleaning agents. them. ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive ● Seat belts and their components must products. Paint never be cleaned with chemical products, ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust nor should they be allowed to come into rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! sharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric! paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, damaging the paint job! ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question. 338 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a er prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best ● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara to cover the leather. leather with leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain remov- WARNING ers or similar products. Do not use water-repellent coatings on the ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it as humid weather, darkness or when the removed there. This will prevent damage. sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard can also cause the windscreen wiper blades sponges, etc. to clean. to make noise. ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Note ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ● Remains of insects can be removed much ets or belts can damage the surface. more easily with previously treated paint. ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage ● Regular car care treatments can prevent the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro deposits of ambient rust. fasteners are closed.

Natural leather ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe Remove the vehicle from traffic cream, spot removers or similar products on If you want to leave your vehicle stationary leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 318. seats. ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 339 Information for the user

aforementioned situations, accelerating or may be exceptions to this, depending on le- Information for the user decelerating the vehicle. gal or contractual provisions. Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- Due to legal requirements in safety-related Event Data Recorder cludes data from systems such as: products, CUPRA may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Description and operation system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ● Emergency braking assistance system ses of research will be treated anonymously Your vehicle has an event data recorder (Front Assist). (in other words, no reference will be made to (EDR). ● Park Pilot system the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). The EDR’s function is to record data in the ● Parking aid system (Park Assist). event of a mild or serious accident. These ● Lane Assist data are used to support the analysis of how different vehicle systems behaved. The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in The EDR records, over a reduced time range normal driving conditions. (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving data and data from the restraint systems, No audio or video data inside or around the such as: vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances are personal data such as name, age, or ● How different vehicle systems worked. gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties ● Whether the driver and the occupants (such as criminal proceedings authorities) were wearing their seat belts. may relate the contents of the EDR data to ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal other data sources and create a personal was pressed. reference in the context of an accident in- vestigation. ● Vehicle speed. In order to read the EDR data it is necessary These data will provide a better understand- to access (if legally permitted to do so) the ing of the circumstances of the accident. vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- Data from the driving assist systems are also face while the vehicle is switched on. recorded. This includes data such as wheth- CUPRA will not have access to EDR data un- er the systems were inactive or active and if less the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the such action had an impact on the vehicle’s lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the 340 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU

Information about the EU Features of the Name of the device ac- Features of the Name of the device ac- vehicle cording to the declara- vehicle cording to the declara- Directive 2014/53/EU tion of compliance tion of compliance

Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT - Antenna 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna Simplified EU compliance declaration mote control (auxiliary 50000914 heater) 8S7.035.503.B Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de- Antenna amplifiers 575.035.225 vices. The manufacturers of these devices Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW 575.035.225.A declare that they comply with Directive Bluetooth MIB2 Main-Unit 575.035.225.B 2014/53/EU when legally required. A580 / A270 The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following ad- Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit dress: A580 / A270

www.cupraofficial.com  Keyless Access System MQB-B B Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B sistance systems Table of correspondences BSD3.0 Central control unit 5WK50254 The table of correspondences will help you to associate the name of the device in the 5WK50474 declaration of compliance with the features Infotainment system MIB2 Main-Unit of the vehicle and the terminology used in the on-board documentation. A580 / A270 Wireless charging WCH-183 Features of the Name of the device ac- vehicle cording to the declara- Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 tion of compliance ternal antenna of the car Radiofrequency re- FS12A, FS12P Instrument panel Immobilizer integrated in mote control (vehicle) dashboard module instrument cluster

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 341 Information for the user

Addresses of the manufacturers Radioelectrical Addresses of the equipment fitted in manufacturers According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all the vehicle relevant components must include the ad- Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. dress of the manufacturer. Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 control key The address of the manufacturers of com- 59552 Lippstadt, GERMANY ponents that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as Radio frequency remote Digades gmbH control (auxiliary heat- Äußere Weberstraße 20 long as it is legally required: er) 02763 Zittau, GERMANY

ADC Automotive Distance Radar sensors for assis- Control Systems GmbH tance systems Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) 868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p.

Auxiliary heating 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p.

Bluethooth 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

342 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW

76 GHz-77 GHz 35.0 dBm Radar sensors for assistance systems 24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 343 Technical data Technical data Vehicle identification data Identifying letters The identifying letters of the engine can be viewed on the instrument panel when the Technical specifications engine is switched off and the ignition is on.

● Hold down the button  on the dash Important panel for more than 15 seconds.

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual. Information on fuel consump- All technical specifications provided in this tion documentation are valid for the standard Fig. 256 Chassis number. model in Spain. Fuel consumption The figures may be different depending VIN in the Easy Connect whether additional equipment is fitted, for ● Select:  button > SETTINGS > Service Approved consumption values are derived different models, for special vehicles and for > Chassis number. from measurements performed or super- other countries. vised by certified EU laboratories, according Chassis number to the legislation in force at the time (for Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- more information, see the Publications Of- The VIN is located in the Easy Connect and fications section fice of the European Union on the EUR-Lex under the windscreen, on the driver side website: © European Union, http://eur- Fig. 256. Also the VIN is located in the en- kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. ››› lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified gine compartment, on the left-hand side in Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly vehicle characteristics. PS the direction of travel. The number is en- used to denote engine power. graved on the top side rail, and is partially The values relating to fuel consumption and rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. covered. CO2 emissions can be found in the documentation provided to the purchaser of the Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. Type plate vehicle at the time of purchase. Cetane number, indication of the diesel CZ The type plate is located on the right side Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- combustion power. door pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun- pend on the equipment/features of each in- Research octane number, indication of tries do not have a type plate. dividual vehicle, as well as on the driving RON the knock resistance of petrol.

344 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Technical specifications style, road conditions, traffic conditions, en- could lead to accidents, injuries and dam- light-weight single axle trailers or tandem vironmental conditions, load or number of age to the vehicle. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 passengers. metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar Note load. In practice, and considering all the factors Trailer mode mentioned here, consumption values can WARNING differ from those calculated in the current Trailer weights ● For safety reasons, you should not drive European regulations. at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when Trailer weight towing a trailer. This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted. The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- Weights proved are selected in intensive trials ac- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer cording to precisely defined criteria. The ap- weights or the drawbar load. If the permis- Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in sible axle load or the permissible total fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to optional extras. The figure quoted includes mph) (in certain circumstances up to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi- 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver. 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif- cle. Special versions, optional equipment fittings ferent in other countries. All data in the offi- or retro-fitting accessories will increase the cial vehicle documentation takes prece- weight of the vehicle ››› . dence over these data at all times ››› . Wheels WARNING Drawbar loads ● Please note that the centre of gravity may The maximum permitted drawbar load on Tyre pressure, snow chains and wheel shift when transporting heavy objects; this the ball coupling of the towing bracket must bolts may affect vehicle handling and lead to an not exceed 88 kg. accident. Always adjust your speed and In the interest of road safety, we recommend Tyre pressure driving style to suit road conditions and re- that you always tow approaching the maxi- quirements. The sticker with the tyre pressure values can mum drawbar load. The response of the be found on the back of the left front door ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating trailer on the road will be poor, if the drawbar frame. The tyre pressure values given there or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the load is too small. are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres- permissible axle load or the permissible to- sures of warm tyres must not be reduced. tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac- If the maximum permissible drawbar load teristics of the vehicle may change, which cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and ››› » https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 345 Technical data

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar Wheel bolts ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer After the wheels have been changed, the is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- tyres. tightening torque of the wheel bolts should cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the be checked as soon as possible with a torque tightening torque is too high, the wheel Snow chains wrench ››› . Rim torque is 140 Nm. bolts and threads can be damaged. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only for the following tyres: WARNING Note ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per We recommend that you ask your Technical 225/50 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm month. Checking the tyre pressure is very Service for information about appropriate 225/45 R19 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm important. If the tyre pressure is too high or wheel, tyre and snow chain size. too low, there is an increased danger of ac- Other dimensions do not allow chains cidents - particularly at high speeds.

346 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engines

2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 221 (300)/5,300-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 400/2,000-5,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,984

Fuel Super 98 RON / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) RON

Gearbox DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 245 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 3.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 5.4

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,150

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,632

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 2,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 2,100 a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 347 Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 257 Dimensions and angles.

348 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Technical specifications

››› Fig. 257 Ateca 4Drive A Front projection (mm) 868

B Rear projection (mm) 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Front track (mm) 1,572

F Back track (mm) 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

1,611a) H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,625b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.6°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 25.5°

Turning radius (m) 10.8 a) Distance to the roof. b) Dimension to the roof bars.

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 349 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Adjustment Anti-theft alarm ...... 112, 121 Index front head restraints ...... 144 trailer ...... 302 rear head restraints ...... 61 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow Numbers and Symbols Airbag covers ...... 21 protection ...... 123 4Drive ...... 237 Airbags ...... 68 Anti-theft security system ...... 15, 112, 120 Airbag system ...... 21, 68 Anti-theft system A activation ...... 69 trailer ...... 302 ABS control lamp ...... 73 Anti-tow protection ...... 123 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 221 deactivation of front airbag ...... 72 Anti-trap function ACC ...... 251 description ...... 68 sun blind (sunroof) ...... 131 radar sensor ...... 253 front airbags ...... 21, 70 sunroof ...... 131 Accessories ...... 149, 307 functioning ...... 69 App Adaptive cruise control ...... 251 head-protection airbags ...... 24 Media Control ...... 179 Adaptive Cruise Control knee airbags ...... 23 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 175, 177 control and warning lamps ...... 252 side airbags ...... 23 Area view system (Top View Camera) deactivating temporarily ...... 257 Air conditioning special characteristics ...... 292 function for preventing overtaking in an Climatronic ...... 39, 158 Aspects to note before setting off ...... 56 inside lane ...... 257 heated windscreen ...... 162 Assistance systems instructions on the screen ...... 253 user instructions ...... 160 ACC ...... 251 malfunction ...... 252 Air outlets ...... 161 Adaptive cruise control ...... 251 operating ...... 254 Air recirculation ...... 161 Auto Hold function ...... 241 radar sensor ...... 253 Alcantara leather: cleaning ...... 337 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as- special driving situations ...... 258 Alternator sistance (RCTA) ...... 265 Adjust warning lamp ...... 319 cruise control system ...... 242 Vehicle menu ...... 33 AM ...... 182 disable ...... 109 Adjusting Ambient lighting ...... 138 Emergency Assist ...... 264 front head restraints ...... 60 Android Auto™ ...... 175, 177 emergency braking assistance (Front As- sist) ...... 247 front seats ...... 143 Anti-freeze ...... 42 enable ...... 109 lights ...... 138 Anti-lock brake system ...... 221 fatigue detection ...... 100 rear head restraints ...... 144 Anti-puncture ...... 47, 78 Hill Descent Control ...... 240 seats ...... 57 Anti-puncture kit ...... 47, 78 Park Assist ...... 273 Adjusting the head restraints check after 10 minutes ...... 80 parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 265 front head restraints ...... 144 Anti-puncture set ...... 78 Anti-slip regulation ...... 221 parking system Plus ...... 283 rear parking aid ...... 287 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 351 Index

speed limiter ...... 243 AUX-IN ...... 212 Brake system Top View Camera ...... 289 external audio source ...... 188 warning lamp ...... 218 traffic jam assist ...... 263 Average consumption ...... 95 Braking traffic sign detection system ...... 102 front assist ...... 221 tyre monitoring ...... 326 B BSD tyre monitoring indicator ...... 327 Battery ...... 120 see Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 265 tyre monitoring system ...... 325 Before setting off ...... 56 BSD Plus ...... 262 Assisted starting ...... 52 Belt tensioners Audible warning signal control lamp ...... 73 C control and warning lamps ...... 109 Belt tightening ...... 66 Camera lights ...... 132 Bench seat ...... 146 cleanliness ...... 104 unfastened safety belt ...... 62 Bicycle rack Lane Assist ...... 260 Auto Hold ...... 241 fitting on the retractable tow hitch ...... 300 Capacities ...... 41 Auto Hold function ...... 241 maximum load ...... 300 windscreen washer water ...... 318 Auto Lock (central locking) ...... 112 Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 265, 266 CCS ...... 37 Automatic control lamps ...... 266 CD-ROM player (navigation) ...... 148 transmission ...... 38 driving situations ...... 269 Central locking ...... 112 Automatic car washes indication in the external rear view mirror . 267 adjustment ...... 114 switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . 242 malfunction ...... 266 anti-theft alarm ...... 121 Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 335 operating ...... 267 central locking switch ...... 115 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 133 towing ...... 271 electric windows ...... 127 Automatic gearbox ...... 224 Bluetooth® emergency locking ...... 16 downhill speed control ...... 230 connect audio source ...... 188 Keyless Access ...... 116 driving tips ...... 228 Bonnet ...... 310, 313 Panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof ...... 127 emergency program ...... 230 opening and closing ...... 17, 311 remote control key ...... 114 kick-down feature ...... 229 Boot shelf selective unlocking system ...... 114 launch control program ...... 229 store ...... 152 Centre console ...... 13 manual release of the selector lever ...... 38 store the shelf ...... 152 Changing a wheel ...... 48 selector lever lock ...... 226 Brake fluid ...... 43 subsequent work ...... 50 selector lever positions ...... 225 Brakes ...... 217 Changing bulbs ...... 89 steering wheel with the gear shift paddles . 227 brake fluid ...... 317 number plate light ...... 91 tiptronic ...... 224, 227 brake servo ...... 217 rear bulb in the side panel ...... 89 Automatic transmission electronic parking brake ...... 219 rear light in the rear lid ...... 90 control lamp ...... 225 emergency braking function ...... 220 Changing the blades ...... 81 towing ...... 82 new brake pads ...... 217 Changing the wiper blades ...... 54 352 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Charging the battery ...... 320 Climatronic ...... 39 EDS ...... 221 Checking levels Clocks electromechanical steering ...... 231 engine compartment ...... 313 digital ...... 104 engine oil ...... 314 Child-proof locking set time ...... 104 ESC ...... 221 electric windows ...... 126 Close gear change ...... 231 Child seat ...... 24, 75 sunroof ...... 129 handbrake ...... 218 Child seats Closing ...... 112 Hill Descent Control ...... 240 categorisation into groups ...... 75 bonnet ...... 17, 311 instrument panel ...... 36 ISOFIX system ...... 26 rear lid ...... 124 Lane Assist ...... 260 safety instructions ...... 24, 74 sun blind (sunroof) ...... 130 lights ...... 132 securing with seat belt ...... 25 sunroof ...... 129 parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 266 Top Tether system ...... 26, 29 windows ...... 126 refuelling ...... 308 Cleaning Clutch (warning lamp) ...... 230 seat belt ...... 62 Alcantara leather ...... 337 Coming Home ...... 135 speed limiter ...... 243 carbon fibre ...... 336, 338 Coming Home function ...... 135 Start-Stop ...... 238 control panels ...... 337 Communication between the Infotainment steering column locking ...... 231 decorative sheets ...... 337 system and mobile devices ...... 172 tow hitch ...... 300 exhaust tail pipes ...... 336 Connectivity ...... 172 towing bracket ...... 298 exterior ...... 336 Full Link ...... 172 transmission ...... 225 fabrics ...... 337 Media Control ...... 179 tyre monitoring system ...... 326 headlights / tail lights ...... 336 WLAN point of access ...... 180 Control and warning lights high pressure cleaners ...... 334 Connectivity Box ...... 212 emission control ...... 236 Interior ...... 337 Control and warning lamps ...... 36, 109 engine management ...... 236 leather ...... 337 ABS anti-blocking system ...... 221 ESC ...... 223 paint ...... 336 adaptive cruise control ...... 252 Control lamps plastic parts ...... 337 airbags ...... 72 engine coolant ...... 106 seat belts ...... 337 airbag system ...... 73 Fuel reserve ...... 105 sensors/camera lenses ...... 336 alternator ...... 319 refuel ...... 105 special care ...... 338 applying the brake ...... 252 Controls and displays the radio screen ...... 337 ASR ...... 221 general instrument panel ...... 93 trims/covers ...... 336, 337 audible warning signal ...... 109 Controls for the windows ...... 18, 126 washing the vehicle ...... 334 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 266 Controls on the steering wheel ...... 110 wheels ...... 336 brake systems ...... 218 Coolant windows ...... 337 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 242 checking level ...... 316 windscreen wipers ...... 336 depress the brake ...... 247 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 353 Index

Cooling system Display indications safe ...... 56 checking coolant ...... 316 compass indications ...... 97 towing ...... 85 topping up coolant ...... 316 driving recommendation ...... 97 Driving abroad Copyright ...... 184 instrument panel ...... 96 headlights ...... 137 Correct position ...... 57 speed limiter ...... 244 Driving data ...... 99 Correct sitting position time ...... 104 Driving in winter driver ...... 57 Display of traffic signs on the instrument trailer ...... 296 front passenger ...... 58 panel Driving mode ...... 272 rear seat passengers ...... 59 activate ...... 102 Driving on flooded roads ...... 236 Cruise control ...... 37, 242 deactivate ...... 102 Driving profile ...... 272 control and warning lamps ...... 242 Disposal DSG ...... 224 operation ...... 242 belt tensioners ...... 67 Duplicate keys ...... 113 Cruise control system ...... 242 Distance control Dust and pollen filter ...... 158 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 251 DVD D Door cylinder ...... 15 DVD video mode ...... 191 DAB ...... 182 Door handle ...... 15 Dynamic adjustment of headlight range . . . . 138 Dangers in not using the seat belt ...... 64 Door lock ...... 15 Dashboard ...... 94 Door release lever ...... 93 E Dash panel ...... 36 Doors Easy Connect ...... 33 Data label ...... 344 childproof locks ...... 121 Easy Open ...... 116 Data transfer ...... 172 opening and closing ...... 15 things to note ...... 119 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 22 Downhill speed control ...... 230 EDL Deactivation of front airbag ...... 72 Downhill speed control function ...... 230 see Electronic differential lock ...... 221 Defective bulbs Drawer ...... 147 Electrical accessories changing bulbs ...... 89 Drink holders ...... 148 see Power socket ...... 149 Diesel Drive Profile ...... 271 Electric windows ...... 18, 126 engine oil ...... 313 Driver convenience opening and closing ...... 127 Digital Cockpit ...... 95 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 Electromechanical steering ...... 231 information profiles ...... 95 Driver-side general instrument panel lamp ...... 231 navigation map ...... 96 left-hand drive ...... 9 Electronic differential lock ...... 221 Digital instrument right-hand drive ...... 10 Electronic immobiliser ...... 15 panel (Digital Cockpit) ...... 95 Driving Electronic self-locking ...... 221 Dimensions ...... 348 driving abroad ...... 137 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 221 Direction of rotation driving through water ...... 236 Electronic torque management (XDS) ...... 222 tyres ...... 50 economical ...... 233 354 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Emergencies ...... 78 Engine dipstick ...... 314 anti-puncture kit ...... 78 assisted starting ...... 52 inspection service ...... 313 automatic gearbox emergency program . 230 noises ...... 216 maintenance intervals ...... 313 bulbs ...... 46 running in ...... 232 specifications ...... 313 changing a wheel ...... 48 Engine and ignition topping up ...... 315 emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 51 automatic ignition switch-off ...... 214 Engine oil pressure fuses ...... 45 My Beat ...... 217 control lamp ...... 314 hazard warning lights ...... 136 preheating the engine ...... 216 Environment jump leads ...... 52 starting the engine ...... 216 ecological driving ...... 233 manual unlocking and locking ...... 80 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . 216 environmental compatibility ...... 232 puncture ...... 46 stopping the engine ...... 216 Environmental tips replacing a blown fuse ...... 46 Engine breakdown filling the tank ...... 309 replacing the battery ...... 320 Control light ...... 236 refuelling ...... 308 vehicle tool kit ...... 78 Engine compartment ...... 310, 313 Equipment ...... 149, 307 Emergency Assist ...... 264 battery ...... 44, 318 ESC see Emergency Assist ...... 264 brake fluid ...... 43, 317 electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 221 switching off ...... 264 coolant ...... 42, 316 Multi-collision Brake ...... 222 switching on ...... 264 engine oil ...... 41, 315 Sport Mode ...... 223 Emergency braking assistance system opening and closing ...... 17, 311 Event Data Recorder ...... 340 indications on the display ...... 247 safety notes ...... 310 Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . 280 malfunction ...... 249 windscreen washer reservoir ...... 43, 318 Exterior lighting operating ...... 249 Engine coolant ...... 42 changing bulbs ...... 89 radar sensor ...... 249 control lamp ...... 106 Exterior mirrors switching off temporarily ...... 250 G 12 plus-plus ...... 42 adjustment ...... 20 system limitations ...... 250 G 13 ...... 42 driving with a trailer ...... 299 Emergency braking function ...... 220 specifications ...... 42 Exterior rear-view mirrors Emergency braking warning ...... 137 temperature display ...... 106 adjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors . . 142 Emergency operation warning lamp ...... 106 exterior ...... 142 front passenger door ...... 16 Engine data ...... 347 heated ...... 142 selector lever ...... 38 Engine management ...... 235 Exterior view ...... 7, 8 Emission control system control light ...... 236 External aerial ...... 307 control light ...... 236 Engine oil ...... 41, 313 changing ...... 313, 315 F checking oil level ...... 314 Fabrics: cleaning ...... 337 consumption ...... 314 Fastening rings ...... 153 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 355 Index

Fatigue detection ...... 100 Fuel tank cap H Filling the tank ...... 308 opening and closing ...... 41 Handbrake Floor mats ...... 61 Fuel tank flap lamp ...... 218 Fluid level control ...... 41 opening and closing ...... 41 see Parking brake ...... 219 FM ...... 182 Full-LED Headlights ...... 89 Hazard warning lights ...... 31, 136 Four-wheel drive Full Link ...... 172 HDC snow chains ...... 237 pairing ...... 175 see Hill Descent Control ...... 240 winter tyres ...... 237 setup ...... 175 Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . 64 Frequency band Function buttons ...... 168 Head-protection airbags AM ...... 182 Function Leaving Home ...... 136 description ...... 24 change ...... 182 Fuses ...... 45, 85 safety instructions ...... 71 DAB ...... 182 fuse box ...... 86, 87 Headlights FM ...... 182 identifying blown fuses ...... 46 changing bulbs ...... 89 Front airbags ...... 21, 70 identifying by colours ...... 45 driving abroad ...... 137 Front armrest ...... 146 preparation before replacing ...... 46 headlight washers ...... 140 Front Assist ...... 221 replacing ...... 46 Head restraints ...... 19 indications on the display ...... 247 adjustment ...... 144 Front passenger front airbag G front head restraints ...... 60 control lamp ...... 73 Gear-change indicator ...... 227 rear head restraints ...... 61 deactivation ...... 22 Gearbox ...... 38 Headrests ...... 19 Front seats Gearbox DSG adjustment ...... 144 manual adjustment ...... 19 see Automatic gearbox ...... 224 front ...... 60 Fuel ...... 41, 309 Gear recommendation ...... 227 Heated consumption ...... 344 Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . 227 windscreen ...... 162 fuel gauge ...... 105 General Heated rear window ...... 40 identification ...... 309 instrument panel ...... 95 Hill Descent Control petrol ...... 310 General instrument panel control lamp ...... 240 refuelling ...... 308 control and warning lamps ...... 36 Horn ...... 93 saving ...... 233 controls and displays ...... 93 How to jump start ...... 52 Fuel consumption engine compartment ...... 313 description ...... 52 engine cut-off due to inertia ...... 233 Glove compartment ...... 148 Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . 236 Fuel gauge ...... 105 I control lamp ...... 105 Identification of the fuel ...... 309

356 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Identifying letters on the engine update navigation data ...... 193 Instrument panel ...... 95 show ...... 98 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) ...... 181 control and warning lamps ...... 109 Ignition lock Infotainment System display ...... 95 see Starter button ...... 30 AUX-IN ...... 188 display indications ...... 96 Incorrect position ...... 59 Bluetooth® audio ...... 188 instructions shown on the screen ...... 98 Indications on the display ...... 98 changing the volume ...... 168 instruments ...... 95 adaptive cruise control ...... 253 DVD ...... 191 service interval indication ...... 106 Drive Profile ...... 271 general equipment panel ...... 166 structure of the menus ...... 98 Emergency braking assistance system Images main menu ...... 192 use with the multifunction steering wheel . 108 (Front Assist) ...... 247 infotainment knobs ...... 167 Instrument panel display ...... 95, 96 identifying letters of the engine ...... 97 initial configuration ...... 171 Instruments ...... 95 odometer ...... 97 Internet access ...... 181 Interference from a mobile telephone ...... 167 selector lever positions ...... 225 memory buttons ...... 183 Interior lights ...... 32 service intervals ...... 106 mute ...... 168 Interior view ...... 14 traffic signs ...... 102 navigation ...... 193 ISOFIX ...... 26, 28 tyre monitoring ...... 327 Radio mode ...... 182 ISOFIX system ...... 26 warning and information messages ...... 100 rotary knobs ...... 167 ISOFIX System ...... 28 Indications on the screen scroll knob ...... 169 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 97 scroll (display) ...... 169 J Outside temperature ...... 97 search in lists ...... 169 Jack ...... 48, 78 positions of the selector lever ...... 97 sharing a WLAN connection ...... 180 mounting points ...... 49 speed warning ...... 97 standby ...... 167 Journey data display ...... 99 Information profiles ...... 95 station logos ...... 183 Jukebox (SSD) ...... 189 Infotainment knobs ...... 167 switch on and off ...... 167 Jump leads ...... 52 Infotainment system ...... 33, 164 Telephone mode ...... 206 CD player ...... 186 touchscreen ...... 168 K function buttons ...... 168 USB ...... 187 Key-operated switch ...... 72 general instructions for use ...... 167 Vehicle menu ...... 205 Keyless-Entry input mask ...... 170 verification boxes ...... 168 see Keyless Access ...... 116 Jukebox (SSD) ...... 189 WLAN ...... 180 Keyless-Exit memory card ...... 187 WLAN audio ...... 190 see Keyless Access ...... 116 on-screen keypad ...... 170 Inspection ...... 313, 331 Keyless Access safety instructions ...... 164 Inspection service ...... 313 Easy Open ...... 116 text input ...... 170 Keyless-Entry ...... 116

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 357 Index

Keyless-Exit ...... 116 changing bulbs ...... 89 Luggage compartment ...... 16 Press & Drive ...... 30, 214 coming home ...... 135 automatic locking ...... 126 special characteristics ...... 119 control and warning lamps ...... 132 electric opening and closing ...... 124 starting the engine ...... 216 daytime running lights ...... 132 luggage compartment lighting ...... 138 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 116 dipped beam headlight ...... 132 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . 155 Keyless Access locking and ignition system fog light ...... 135 manual release mechanism ...... 17 see Keyless Access ...... 116 hazard warning lights ...... 31 net bag ...... 154 Keys interior lights ...... 138 shelf ...... 151 assign key ...... 113 leaving home ...... 136 special characteristics of the electric rear car key ...... 113 light control ...... 132 lid ...... 125 remote control ...... 113 lighting of instruments ...... 138 see also Loading the luggage compart- replacing the battery ...... 120 lighting of the controls ...... 138 ment ...... 150 spare key ...... 113 main beam lever ...... 133 Luggage compartment floor ...... 155 synchronising ...... 121 main beam lights ...... 132 Luggage compartment variable floor ...... 155 unlocking and locking ...... 15, 114 main beams ...... 31 Luggage net Kick-down motorway light ...... 137 luggage compartment ...... 154 automatic gearbox ...... 229 parking lights ...... 137 Lumbar support ...... 143 Knee airbag reading lights ...... 138 safety information ...... 23 side lights ...... 132 M switch ...... 30 Main beam assist ...... 134 L turn signal lever ...... 133 Main beam lever ...... 133 Lane Assist ...... 260 Load compartment in the luggage compart- Main panel Control and warning lamp ...... 260 ment turn signal and main beam lever ...... 133 Lane Assist system see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 150 Maintenance see Lane Assist ...... 260 Loading the luggage compartment ...... 150 see Service ...... 331 Launch control (automatic gearbox) ...... 229 Loading the vehicle Maintenance intervals ...... 313 Leaving Home ...... 136 fastening rings ...... 153 Malfunction Lifting the vehicle ...... 49 luggage compartment ...... 16 adaptive cruise control ...... 252 Light roof carrier system ...... 157 clutch ...... 230 dynamic adjustment of headlight range . . 138 tailboard for transporting long items ...... 152 emergency braking assistance system Light Assist ...... 134 trailer ...... 303 (Front Assist) ...... 249 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 138 Locking and unlocking gearbox ...... 231 Lights ...... 30, 132 in the door cylinder ...... 15 towing bracket ...... 302 audible signals ...... 132 Locking the front passenger door manually . . 16 Manual release mechanism AUTO ...... 133 Luggage ...... 150 rear lid ...... 17 358 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Manual unlocking and locking ...... 80 Navigation with images ...... 202 sunroof ...... 129 Maximum trailer weight Offroad navigation ...... 202 windows ...... 126 loading the trailer ...... 303 points of interest (POI) ...... 198 Opening and closing ...... 15, 112 Media predictive navigation ...... 201 bonnet ...... 17, 311 changing the Media source ...... 186 route ...... 196 by remote control ...... 114 main menu ...... 184 select the destination on the map ...... 195 fuel tank flap ...... 308 messages and symbols ...... 185 split screen ...... 199 in the door cylinder ...... 15 playback sources ...... 186 traffic reports (TRAFFIC) ...... 200 rear lid ...... 16 playing modes ...... 184 updating and installing navigation data . . . 193 rear lid with electric opening and closing . 124 MEDIA Navigation system sunroof ...... 129 copyright ...... 184 CD-ROM player ...... 148 windows ...... 126 Media Control ...... 179 Net bag with the central locking switch ...... 115 data transmission and control functions . . 180 luggage compartment ...... 154 Operating malfunction Memory card ...... 187 Noises Park Assist ...... 273 Mirror ...... 142 adaptive cruise control ...... 252 sunroof ...... 129 MirrorLink ...... 176 brakes ...... 217 Original Spare Parts ...... 333 Mobile ...... 307 ESC ...... 223 Outside temperature Mobile Signal Amplifier ...... 212 parking brake ...... 220 display ...... 97 Mobile telephones ...... 307 tyres ...... 50, 322 Overview Motor Number of seats ...... 62 of the structure of the menus ...... 98 Start-Stop system ...... 238 Multi-collision Brake ...... 222 O P Multifunction display ...... 99 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 310 Panoramic sliding sunroof Multifunction steering wheel ...... 110 Odometer ...... 95 convenience opening and closing ...... 127 Multimedia ...... 212 total ...... 95 see also Sunroof ...... 128 My Beat ...... 217 trip recorder ...... 95 Park Assist ...... 273 Offroad Navigation ...... 202 automatic braking intervention ...... 281 N Oil change ...... 315 automatic interruption ...... 274 Navigation ...... 193 One-touch opening and closing conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . 280 change view ...... 198 electric windows ...... 128 exiting a parking space (only for parallel entering the destination ...... 195 Opening ...... 112 spaces) ...... 280 importing vCards ...... 201 bonnet ...... 17, 311 operating malfunction ...... 273 main menu ...... 194 fuel tank flap ...... 308 parallel parking ...... 278 messages and symbols ...... 194 rear lid ...... 124 parking conditions ...... 278 my destinations ...... 196 sun blind (sunroof) ...... 130 perpendicular parking ...... 278 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 359 Index

see Park Assist ...... 273 Passenger Radio-operated remote control stopping prematurely ...... 274 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 see Keys ...... 113 Parking ...... 220, 228 Passenger-side instrument panel Radio DISPLAY: clean ...... 337 with Park Assist ...... 278 left-hand drive ...... 11 Radio transmitters ...... 307 Parking aid right-hand drive ...... 12 Rain sensor ...... 141 adjusting the display and audible warn- Pedals ...... 61 control of the function ...... 141 ings ...... 285, 289 Petrol Raising the vehicle ...... 49 automatic activation ...... 284 Petrol ...... 310 RCTA ...... 270 braking while manoeuvring ...... 286 Positioning seat belts see Parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 265 driving with a trailer ...... 286 during pregnancy ...... 66 Rear malfunction ...... 286, 289 seat belts ...... 66 headrests ...... 61 rear parking aid ...... 287 Power ...... 149 Rear-view mirror sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 336 Power management ...... 234 anti-dazzle ...... 142 towing bracket ...... 289 Power socket ...... 149 interior anti-dazzle ...... 142 visual indication ...... 285, 288 trailer ...... 301 Rear Assist ...... 294 Parking aid system Power steering instructions for use ...... 294 see Parking aid ...... 281, 283, 287 see Electromechanical steering ...... 231 parking ...... 295 Parking assistance Preheating the engine ...... 216 screen ...... 294 parking system plus ...... 283 Press & Drive special characteristics ...... 295 see Park Assist ...... 273 starter button ...... 30, 214 Rear Assist system ...... 294 surroundings warning ...... 283 starting the engine ...... 216 Rear bulbs in the side panel Parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 265, 270 Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 334 disassemble the rear light ...... 89 control lamp ...... 266 Puncture Rear fog light Parking brake ...... 219 action ...... 46 control lamp ...... 132 activate ...... 219 Rear lid ...... 16, 17 automatic activation ...... 220 R see also Luggage compartment ...... 124 automatic release ...... 219 Racks ...... 148 Rear lights in the rear lid emergency braking function ...... 220 Radar sensor ...... 249, 253 disassemble the bulb holder ...... 90 release ...... 219 Radio Rear parking aid ...... 287 Parking distance warning system changing frequencies ...... 182 Rear seat backrest see Parking aid ...... 281, 283, 287 main menu ...... 182 folding down ...... 146 Parking (automatic gearbox) ...... 228 memorise station logos ...... 183 folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . 146 ParkPilot memory buttons ...... 183 lifting ...... 146 see Parking aid ...... 281, 283, 287 RADIO Rear seat passengers Parts ...... 307 information and icons ...... 182 see Correct sitting position ...... 57, 58, 59 360 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Rear View Camera ...... 294 Running in Seats Refuel new brake pads ...... 217 adjustment ...... 143 control lamp ...... 105 new engine ...... 232 electric seat ...... 19 fuel gauge ...... 105 new tyres ...... 321 heating ...... 145 refuelling rear seat backrest ...... 146 Petrol additives ...... 310 S Selective unlocking system ...... 114 Refuelling Safe driving ...... 56 Selector lever lock ...... 226 opening fuel tank flap ...... 308 Safelock ...... 120 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Remote control key see also Anti-theft security system ...... 112 malfunction ...... 226 unlocking and locking ...... 114 Safety manual release mechanism ...... 38 Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . 144 child safety ...... 73 positions ...... 225 Repair work ...... 307 child seats ...... 73 Service Replacement deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . 22 conditions of use ...... 332 parts ...... 307 safe driving ...... 56 digital maintenance plan ...... 331 Replacement parts ...... 307 Safety equipment ...... 56 fixed service ...... 331 Replacing the battery Safety information flexible service ...... 331 of the vehicle key ...... 120 knee airbags ...... 23 oil change service ...... 331 Retaining hooks ...... 153 Safety instructions service ...... 331 Retrofitting belt tensioners ...... 67 Service proof ...... 331 towing bracket ...... 305 head-protection airbags ...... 71 services ...... 331 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) ...... 225 side airbags ...... 70 servicing ...... 331 Revolution counter ...... 95, 105 use of seat belts ...... 63 sets of services ...... 333 Rims using child seats ...... 24, 74 Service interval indicator ...... 98 changing a wheel ...... 48 Seat belt position Service intervals ...... 106 Roll-back function for pregnant women ...... 20 Service intervals display ...... 332 windows ...... 127 seat belts ...... 20 Service Menu Roof carrier ...... 156 Seat belts ...... 62 identifying letters on the engine ...... 98 Roof carrier system ...... 156 adjustment ...... 20, 65 restart oil service ...... 98 Roof load ...... 157 control lamp ...... 62 restart Trip ...... 98 technical data ...... 157 protective function ...... 63 service interval indicator ...... 98 Roof luggage rack purpose ...... 62, 68 time ...... 98 attach the cross bars ...... 157 safety instructions ...... 63 Service Mobility ...... 333 Roof rack ...... 156 unfastened ...... 64 Service warning: check ...... 107 Rotary knobs ...... 167 Seat belt tensioners ...... 20, 66 Set Seat heating ...... 145 time ...... 104 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 361 Index

Side airbags Starter button ...... 30, 214 Tail lights description ...... 23 Starting the vehicle ...... 30 changing bulbs ...... 89 safety instructions ...... 70 Steering Technical data Signal lever ...... 31 control lamp ...... 231 capacity ...... 318 Sliding panoramic sunroof ...... 18 electromechanical steering ...... 231 roof load ...... 157 Snow chains ...... 50, 346 Steering wheel vertical load on the coupling ...... 296 four-wheel drive ...... 237 adjustment ...... 21, 58 Technical modifications ...... 307 Spanner symbol ...... 107 gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . 227 Technical specifications ...... 344 Special characteristics Storage area Telephone area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . 292 front seat ...... 147 Bluetooth® profiles ...... 207 high-pressure cleaning devices ...... 300 Storage compartments ...... 147, 148 call lists ...... 211 tow-starting ...... 81, 82 glove compartment ...... 148 display and symbols ...... 210 towing ...... 81 glove compartment lighting ...... 138 enter telephone number ...... 211 trailer mode ...... 304 Storing objects general information ...... 206 Special features trailer ...... 296 main menu ...... 209 Lowering the volume ...... 167 Sun blinds pairing a mobile phone ...... 208 Speed limiter ...... 243 anti-trap function (sunroof) ...... 131 places with special regulations ...... 207 control lamp ...... 243 sunroof ...... 130 Temperature display display indications ...... 244 Sun protection ...... 139 of the engine coolant ...... 106 operate ...... 245 Sunroof ...... 128 Things to note Speed warning ...... 99 anti-trap function ...... 131 towing ...... 83 Sport Mode ...... 223 closing ...... 129 Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 346 SSD opening ...... 129 Time see Jukebox (SSD) ...... 189 operating malfunction ...... 129 adjust ...... 98 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer .305 sun blind ...... 130 set ...... 104 Start-Stop ...... 238 Sun visors ...... 139 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 224, 227 Start-Stop system Switch Top Tether ...... 26, 29 operation ...... 238 hazard warning lights ...... 136 Top Tether system ...... 26, 29 switching off and on ...... 240 Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) . . . . . 167 Top View Camera ...... 289 switch the engine off and on ...... 238 Switching off the lights ...... 132 see Top View Camera system ...... 289 Start-Stop System Switching on the lights ...... 132 Top View Camera system driver instructions ...... 238 Switching the ignition on and off ...... 30 Instructions for use ...... 291 lamps ...... 238 menus ...... 292 the engine does not switch off ...... 238 T modes ...... 292 the engine starts by itself ...... 238 Tailboard for transporting long items ...... 152 screen ...... 291 362 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Total traction ...... 237 Traffic sign detection system ...... 102 Trailer mode towing ...... 82 indication on the display ...... 102 also see towing bracket ...... 296 Tow-starting ...... 52 limited operation ...... 103 see Driving with a trailer ...... 296 Tow-starting the engine ...... 82 operation ...... 102 Trailer weight ...... 345 special characteristics ...... 81 speed warning ...... 103 Transporting children ...... 73 Tow hitch trailer ...... 103 Transporting items control lamp ...... 300 windscreen damage ...... 104 fastening rings ...... 153 electrical unlocking ...... 299 Traffic signs roof carrier ...... 156 Towing indication on the display ...... 102 roof carrier system ...... 156 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 271 Trailer ...... 296 Transporting objects special characteristics ...... 271 adjusting the headlights ...... 304 loading the trailer ...... 303 Towing bracket ...... 299 anti-theft alarm ...... 302 net bag ...... 154 also see Trailer ...... 299 anti-theft system ...... 302 retaining hooks ...... 153 control lamp ...... 298 connecting ...... 301 roof carrier system ...... 157 electrical unlocking tow hitch ...... 299 exterior mirrors ...... 299 tailboard for transporting long items ...... 152 fitting a bicycle rack ...... 300 hooking up ...... 301 trailer mode ...... 304 malfunction ...... 302 loading ...... 303 Trip odometer ...... 98 retrofitting ...... 305 malfunction ...... 302 Turn signal convenience function ...... 133 Towing the vehicle ...... 51, 81, 82 maximum trailer weight ...... 303 Turn signal lever ...... 133 driving tips ...... 85 mode ...... 304, 345 Tyre Mobility Set ...... 47 front towing eye ...... 83 parking aid ...... 286, 289 components ...... 79 rear towing eye ...... 84 power socket ...... 301 inflating a tyre ...... 79 special characteristics ...... 81 rear LED lights ...... 298, 302 sealing a tyre ...... 79 things to note ...... 83 rear lights ...... 298, 302 Tyre Mobility System total traction ...... 82 retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 305 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 78 tow bar ...... 82 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- Tyre monitoring system ...... 325 towing prohibited ...... 82 er ...... 305 tyre monitoring indicator ...... 327 tow rope ...... 82 technical requirements ...... 298 Tyre pressure ...... 322, 345 with the towing bracket ...... 82 tow rope ...... 298, 302 Tyre profile ...... 323 Towline anchorages ...... 51, 78 trailer mode ...... 304 Tyre repair ...... 78 Tow rope ...... 298, 302 unlocking the electrical unlocking tow Tyre repair kit ...... 78 Traffic Jam Assist ...... 263 hitch ...... 299 see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 78 malfunctions ...... 264 vertical load on the coupling ...... 296, 303 Tyres ...... 321 situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must accessories ...... 322 be switched off ...... 263 changing ...... 48 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 363 Index

dimensions ...... 324 Vehicle battery ...... 44, 318 sensors ...... 273 interchanging ...... 324 assisted starting ...... 52 things to note ...... 119 new tyres ...... 324 charge level ...... 234 Weights ...... 345 repair kit ...... 78 charging ...... 320 What negatively affects driving safety? ...... 56 service life ...... 322 connecting and disconnecting ...... 318 Wheel balance ...... 322 tyre pressure ...... 322 disconnect and connect ...... 107 Wheel bolts ...... 346 wear indicators ...... 323 power management ...... 234 anti-theft ...... 48 with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . 50 replacing ...... 320 caps ...... 48 with directional tread pattern ...... 322 winter conditions ...... 318 loosening ...... 49 Tyre tread depth ...... 323 Vehicle care tightening torque ...... 325 Tyre wear ...... 323 windscreen wipers service position ...... 54 Wheels ...... 321, 345 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- chains ...... 346 U tem ...... 123 changing ...... 48, 50 Unfastening your seat belt ...... 65 activation ...... 122 new wheels ...... 324 Unfasten the seat belt ...... 20 Vehicle maintenance ...... 334 snow chains ...... 50 Unlocking and locking ...... 15 Vehicle paint temporary spare wheel ...... 328 by remote control ...... 114 maintenance ...... 336 Wheel spanner ...... 78 with Keyless Access ...... 116 Vehicle seats ...... 62 Wheel trim with the central locking switch ...... 115 Vehicle tool kit ...... 48, 78 removing ...... 48 USB ...... 212 Ventilation slits ...... 151 Windows connecting an external data storage de- Vertical load on the coupling ...... 296 electric ...... 18, 126 vice ...... 187 Vertical load on the trailer coupling Window wiper ...... 139 USB/AUX-IN Port ...... 212 loading the trailer ...... 303 Window wiper blade ...... 32 windscreen and rear window wiper blades V W changing ...... 54 Vanity mirror ...... 139 Warning lamps cleaning ...... 54 Vehicle engine coolant ...... 106 Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . 81 data label ...... 344 Warning symbols Windscreen heating ...... 162 identification data ...... 344 see Control and warning lamps ...... 109 Windscreen washer ...... 43, 139 identification number ...... 344 Warning triangle ...... 136 Windscreen washer water raising ...... 49 Warranty ...... 334 capacity ...... 318 unlocking and locking the vehicle with Washing the vehicle checking ...... 318 Keyless Access ...... 116 external vehicle maintenance ...... 334 topping up ...... 318 vehicle identification number ...... 344 high pressure cleaners ...... 334

364 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Index

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems service position ...... 54 Windscreen wipers ...... 32, 139 cleaning ...... 336 functions ...... 140 headlight washer system ...... 140 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 140 lifting the wiper blade ...... 54 rain sensor ...... 141 replacing the wiper blades ...... 54 service position ...... 54 special characteristics ...... 140 window wiper lever ...... 139 Winter conditions battery ...... 318 snow chains ...... 50 tyres ...... 329 Winter driving sunroof ...... 129 Winter operation headlight washers ...... 140 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 140 salt on the roads ...... 141 Winter tyres ...... 329 four-wheel drive ...... 237 Wireless Charger ...... 212 WLAN ...... 180 connecting an external audio source . . . . 190 X XDS ...... 222

https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 365 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.18 https://www.automotive-manuals.net/ 575012720BF (09.18)

Inglés

ATECA

(09.18) ATECA

575012720BF Owner’s manual

Inglés https://www.automotive-manuals.net/